JP2018094097A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce a code amount of a game control program.SOLUTION: In a game machine, arithmetic processing means is configured to exchange a value stored in a first register group with a value stored in a second register group, and to permit execution of an exchange instruction stored in the respective register groups. Based on satisfaction of predetermined starting conditions, the arithmetic processing means extracts a random number used for a lottery regarding whether a special game state is allowed to occur in a variation display game, retracts the random number stored in the first register group by the exchange instruction to the second register group while the extracted random number is in storage in the first register group, restores the random number retracted to the second register group by the exchange instruction to the first register group before execution of prior determination regarding whether a special game state is allowed to occur based on the random number, and performs the prior determination by using the random number restored to the first register group.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 134B

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with game control means for performing game control.

  As a game machine control, a game machine generally includes a game control device (game control means) for controlling a variable display game and an effect control device for controlling the screen effect of the variable display game based on a command from the game control device. Is provided. Since the ROM capacity of the game control device is limited, a gaming machine in which the random number judgment value stored in the ROM is compressed is known in order to reduce the ROM capacity while satisfying the diversifying gaming machine functions. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-94101 A

  In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the capacity of the table stored in the ROM is merely reduced, which is different from that for reducing the so-called program code itself. However, if the program code is simply reduced, the execution content of the game control is simplified and the functions and effects provided by the gaming machine may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to reduce the code amount of the game control program while maintaining the conventional functions.

  In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a game in which a variable display game is executed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a special game state is generated that gives a player a privilege when the variable display game results in a special result. In the gaming machine provided with the game control means for performing control, the game control means includes a game control program storage means for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means for performing a predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and the arithmetic Update information storage means for storing information to be updated by the processing means, a first register group, and a second register group comprising a register group having the same configuration as the first register group, The arithmetic processing means exchanges the value stored in the first register group with the value stored in the second register group, and stores the value in each register group. A random number used for a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special gaming state in the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the extracted random number In the state stored in the first register group, the random number stored in the first register group is saved to the second register group by the exchange instruction, and the special gaming state is generated based on the random number. Before making a prior determination, whether or not the random number saved in the second register group by the exchange instruction is restored to the first register group, and the random number restored to the first register group is used. Then, the preliminary determination is performed.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, the code amount of the game control program is reduced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a discharge ball number display part. The display mode of the payout rate display unit will be described. A display mode of the accessory ratio display unit will be described. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a table which shows the priority order of winning-port monitoring. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the modification of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & winning prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning number counter update process. It is a figure explaining the discharge ball number area | region, the acquired ball number area | region, and the earned ball number area | region classified by accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the appearance performance monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation | variation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability variation frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of effect mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process setting process 1 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 in the small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle hit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit | ending process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation | variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the example of a layout of the display screen of a display apparatus. It is a reverse view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the payout command (payout number command) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a reverse view of the gaming machine according to the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the appearance performance monitoring process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the appearance performance monitoring process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the single shot type command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the count information setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol type command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation | variation type command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation point control process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hall | game / player setting mode process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is the first half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. In 3rd Embodiment, it is the second half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus in the ending at the time of the end of a big hit state. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the player setting mode waiting for a customer. It is a front view of a game board provided with the sub display device concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the discharge ball number area | region which concerns on 4th Embodiment, the acquired ball number area | region, and the acquired ball number area | region according to the accessory. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the payout command (payout number command) which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the single shot type command processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability (short time) completion | finish process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot command processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is the first half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. In 4th Embodiment, it is the second half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the appearance performance monitoring process which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the over-winning alert | report process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the 1st over winning alert and 2nd over winning alert which concern on 6th Embodiment. It is a table which shows the other example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the 1st over winning alert | report and 2nd over winning alert which concern on 6th Embodiment. In 6th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hall | game / player setting mode process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus in the hall | hole setting mode which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game by 7th Embodiment. In 7th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game by the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. In the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game by the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment. In the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment, it is the figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus. It is the figure which showed the display screen which applied the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment to the case of the big hit without a re-lottery, and the case of a big win with a re-lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of CPU of the microcomputer for games concerning 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the flag register which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of power activation concerning 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game control apparatus program start preparation process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the main process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2 which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure pending | holding information determination process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the main process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows the program structure of the timer interruption process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the start port switch monitoring process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the hard random number acquisition process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the procedure which detects the starting information which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the special figure start port switch common process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the special figure start port switch common process which concerns on the modification of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special figure 1 reservation storage area which concerns on each embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 reservation storage area which concerns on each embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the special figure pending | holding information determination process which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the special figure pending | holding information determination process which concerns on the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the change start information setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the gate switch monitoring process which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows the part program structure of the segment LED edit process which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows the conventional program structure of LED edit processing. It is a figure explaining the display data corresponding to the number of usual figure hold concerning 13th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows the part program structure of the external information edit process which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a program list of the random number update process 2 which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a program list explaining a part of special figure game processing concerning a 14th embodiment. It is a program list explaining a part of special figure game sequence branch table which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a program list of the modification 1 of the special figure game process which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a program list of modification 2 of special figure game processing concerning a 15th embodiment. It is the conventional latter half fluctuation group table for demonstrating the compression system which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a latter half fluctuation group table concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the compression system which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the read-out format of the data concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a program list of the fluctuation pattern setting processing according to the seventeenth embodiment. It is a program list of the conventional 2-byte distribution process for demonstrating the compression system of 17th Embodiment. It is a program list of the 2-byte sorting process according to the seventeenth embodiment. It is a latter half fluctuation group table concerning an 18th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the compression system of 18th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the read-out format of the data of 18th Embodiment. It is a program list of the 2-byte sorting process according to the eighteenth embodiment. It is another example of the latter half fluctuation group table concerning the 18th embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

  Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when the variable display game is simply used, in this specification, the special figure variable display game is indicated.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

  Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a state where a specific game state is a short-time state or a state where a probability of a special result (for example, big hit) is high (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (special game state) ), A small hit gaming state (small hit state).

  Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-times type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launching device can change the launching force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and can play the game in various launching modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. The firing mode includes left-handed (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a plate-like game board main body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 (display means) is provided as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  The center case 40 has an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. Part 40b. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game balls that roll on the stage portion 40b enter the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The top effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 (general winning area) is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of game balls in the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35 a to 35 n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35. In the present embodiment, there are two winning port switches 35 a for the left general winning port 35 and a winning port switch 35 b for the right general winning port 35.

  The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal variation winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball is prevented from winning the normal variation winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure changing display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called velo-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via a general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal-variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. And the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball tends to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 (a winning easy state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of an easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the normal variation display game or setting the probability of hitting the general variation display game to be higher than usual. By making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, a short time state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state. Even in the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state), the time-short state (the ordinary power support state) occurs repeatedly.

  In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, an attacker type that opens the big prize opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling to the near side by the big prize opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having an open / close door 39c is provided. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

  As described above, the game area 32 is provided with the general winning opening 35 and the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening) as a plurality of winning areas where game balls can be won without any particular conditions. Further, as a variable winning device that can operate when a predetermined condition (predetermined result of a special map variable display game or a normal map variable display game) is established and a game ball can be won, a normal variable winning device 37 (second A start winning opening) and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) are provided.

  When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, and the special variable winning apparatus 39 (large winning opening), the payout control apparatus 200 (see FIG. 3) receives the winning winning opening. The number of award balls corresponding to the type of is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In the present embodiment, the prizes of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port), the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port), the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39 (large winning port) are awarded. The number of balls is 2, 3, 10, and 14, respectively, and increases in this order.

  In addition, the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like. An out ball detection switch 65 (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that enters the out port 30b and is discharged to the outside of the game area 32.

  In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game configured by a 7-segment type indicator (LED lamp) or the like. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), fluctuation display part 53 (general figure display, lamps D10 and D18) for the usual figure fluctuation display game, and the start (hold) memory number of each fluctuation display game And a storage display unit for notification (a special figure 1 hold display 54, a special figure 2 hold display 55, a general figure hold display 56). The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 includes lamps D13 and D14. The general-purpose hold indicator 56 includes lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first gaming state display unit 57 (first gaming state indicator, lamp) for notifying whether the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally-timed). D8), the second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when the time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state, and the probability state of jackpot when the gaming machine 10 is turned on has a high probability 3rd game state display part 59 (3rd game state indicator, probability state display part, lamp D17) which displays that it is in the state, the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of special fluctuation winning device 39) is displayed A round display section 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by variable display in which identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an assembly of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all LEDs provided as an indicator are all turned on and off (simultaneously blinking of all LEDs), cycled on (turns on and off from any one LED in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a plurality of It may be performed by turning on / off (flashing) or circulating lighting with a predetermined number of LEDs. Also on the normal display 53, the variation display game is executed by variation display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the general-purpose display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special-figure 1 display 51 and the special-figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the collective display device 50 includes a discharge ball number display unit 66 for displaying the number of balls discharged from the gaming machine 10, a payout rate display unit 67 for displaying the payout rate of the gaming machine 10, and a percentage of the game machine 10 Is displayed. Each of the discharge ball number display unit 66, the output rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is configured by a plurality of (or even one) 7-segment type indicators (LED lamps). The display unit constitutes display means for displaying the number of balls to be discharged, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio.

  In addition, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the output ball rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are not limited to those that directly display the discharge ball number, the output ball rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively. The number of balls, the payout rate, and the ratio of the accessory may be indirectly displayed (for example, a countdown display of the number of discharged balls described later). That is, it is only necessary that the number of discharged balls display unit 66, the output rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 can display information on the number of discharged balls, the output rate, and the rate of an accessory. In addition, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the output ball rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 do not display the number of output balls, the output rate, and the accessory ratio numerically on a 7-segment display. It may be displayed with a level meter or the like.

  Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32, and is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening and the number of game balls that have passed through the out port 30b. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls, which is the number of game balls shot from the ball launcher to the game area 32. In the present embodiment, the prize winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included. As will be described later, a counting means for counting the number of discharged balls (number of shot balls) is provided. Then, the discharged ball number display section 66 (discharged ball number display means) displays the number of discharged balls, so that the player can grasp the number of game balls launched into the game area 32, and convenience is improved.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of prize balls). The payout rate according to this definition can be obtained even if the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning a prize and the actual prize balls are not paid out due to the ball running out. In addition, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 as in the present embodiment, the yield rate may be easily obtained from the number of acquired balls until the number of discharged balls reaches 0 to 100, You may calculate correctly from said definition using the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) and the number of discharge balls accumulated from the power-on of the gaming machine to the present. In the past, displaying the payout rate was not performed. However, in this embodiment, the payout rate display unit 67 (the payout rate display means) displays the payout rate, thereby allowing the player to display the payout rate. Interest and interest in the general winning opening 35 can be given. And the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the ratio of the bonuses is a big hit state (that is, during fanfare and ending) among the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) obtained by winning the winning award from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. Is the ratio (%) (so-called consecutive character ratio) of the number of winning balls (number of balls acquired by each role) obtained by winning the winning prize. In addition, the ratio of the prizes is the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit and under the big prize) obtained by winning the big prize opening out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) Unit ratio), or the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning a prize winning device 37 and a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port) ((Role ratio)). Since the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning a prize, the prize ratio can be calculated even if the actual prize balls are not paid out due to the ball running out. In the present embodiment, the prize ratio display unit 68 (the bonus ratio display means) displays the bonus ratio, so that the interest of the game is improved and the player can easily win the variable winning device (open state). Therefore, it becomes a motivation for the player to continue playing the game. Further, the accessory ratio display is an index for determining whether or not the player should continue to play the game. Furthermore, since the winning at the general winning opening 35 affects the winning ratio, the player can be interested in the general winning opening 35 through the winning ratio display.

  With reference to FIG. 2B, the display mode of the discharge ball number display unit 66 will be described. The discharge ball number display section 66 is composed of two 7-segment type indicators (8-segment type including a point portion) (LED lamp). As shown in FIG. 2B (I), the number of discharged balls is counted down in the discharged ball number display section 66, and (100−the number of discharged balls) is displayed. Further, the number of discharged balls is only counted up to 100 (predetermined number). As will be described later, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the output rate displayed on the output rate display unit 67 is the number of balls until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. It is updated to the latest appearance rate during. As a result, if the acquired number of balls (the total number of winning balls) is displayed as it is on the output rate display unit 67, the output rate is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of discharged balls is counted down from “99” to “00” in the discharged ball number display section 66, but may be configured to count up from “00” to “99”. When the number of discharged balls reaches 100, “00” is displayed in the discharged ball number display section 66. In the present embodiment, at the timing when “00” is displayed on the number-of-balls display section 66, the display of the payout rate display of the payout rate display section 67 is updated to the latest one. The discharged ball number display section 66 starts the countdown display from the display of “00” after the power is turned on (including power failure recovery). Also, the number of discharged balls is cleared to 0 at the timing of the big hit, and the discharged ball number display section 66 starts a countdown display from the display of “00” after the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (II), in the state other than the game ball being launched or in the customer waiting demonstration state, the discharge ball number display unit 66 is in a non-display state with the display segment (light emitting unit) turned off. Good. The state other than the game ball being fired and the customer waiting demo state are collectively referred to as a “customer waiting state”. The state other than the game ball being launched is a state in which the touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is turned off. Further, when the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) transmits a customer waiting demo command to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4), the gaming machine 10 enters a customer waiting demo state (a state during a customer waiting demo). On the other hand, in a state where the waiting-for-customer demonstration is not in progress or a game ball is being launched, a segment (light-emitting unit) of the indicator lights up in the discharged ball number display unit 66 so that the player in the game can recognize, and a countdown display is displayed. Run. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (III), the discharged ball number display unit 66 performs error display (“EE” display) in order to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball breakage and overflow (fullness). (Shoot ball break error and overflow error described later) are not included. Since the game ball can be manually inserted into the winning opening while the frame is open, the display of the discharge ball number display section 66 is not updated, but the number of discharge balls is counted by the game control device 100 inside the game machine. .

  With reference to FIG. 2C, the display mode of the payout rate display unit 67 will be described. The payout rate display section 67 is composed of two 7-segment type indicators (8-segment type including a point portion) (LED lamp). As shown in FIG. 2C (I), in the payout rate display section 67, the payout rate is displayed only from 0 to 99. When the payout rate reaches 100 or more, “99” is displayed blinking or lit. FF "is displayed.

  In addition, as described above, the payout rate display of the payout rate display unit 67 is performed until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100 every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number). It is updated to the latest appearance rate. Each time the appearance rate display unit 67 updates the appearance rate display, it changes the emission color of the segment (light emitting unit) to clearly indicate that the output rate display has been updated. In this case, the player can easily recognize the update of the payout rate. For example, the payout rate display unit 67 changes from red to green or from green to red every time the payout rate display is updated. It should be noted that the output rate display unit 67 may always display the output rate in a single color without changing the color.

  Further, the output rate display unit 67 may change the color of the output rate display according to the output rate based on the design value (for example, the base value 40 in the normal gaming state). Thereby, the information warning of the deviation from the design value of the payout rate can be performed. For example, the payout rate is displayed in green in the range of 30-50, displayed in yellow in the range of 10-29 and 51-60, and displayed in red in the range of 0-9 and 61 or more. In addition, during the big hit, the payout rate becomes very large, so it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow) instead of red. Note that in the configuration in which the output rate is displayed in a single color without changing the color, the output rate display blinks when the output rate is significantly different from the design value (when it is greater than or equal to a predetermined value). You can do it.

  Further, the payout rate display section 67 displays “00” after power-on (including power failure recovery). Further, the payout rate is cleared to 0 at the timing when the big hit ends, and the payout rate display section 67 displays “00”.

  As shown in FIG. 2C (II), in the state other than the game ball being fired or in the customer waiting demonstration state (that is, the customer waiting state), the payout rate display unit 67 is in a state in which the display segment is turned off and is not displayed. It may be. On the other hand, in a state where the waiting-for-customer demonstration is not in progress or a game ball is being launched, the segment of the indicator is turned on in the game output rate display section 67, and the game output rate is displayed so that the player in the game can recognize. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased. Furthermore, since the payout rate cannot be obtained until the number of discharged balls reaches 100 after the game machine 10 is turned on, the payout rate display unit 67 may be in a non-display state.

  Conversely, in a state other than a game ball being fired or in a customer waiting demo state, the payout rate display unit 67 displays the ball payout rate, and the game ball is not in a customer waiting demo or in a state where a game ball is being fired. It is good also as a structure which hides a cypress rate. Thereby, the player can select a gaming machine or a game machine to play in consideration of the payout rate.

  As shown in FIG. 2C (III), the payout rate display unit 67 performs error display (“EE” display) to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball breakage and overflow (fullness). (Shoot ball break error and overflow error described later) are not included. In addition, since it is possible to put the game ball into the winning opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the payout rate display section 67 is not updated, but the game control device 100 inside the game machine calculates (updates) the payout rate. doing.

  With reference to FIG. 2D, the display mode of the accessory ratio display unit 68 will be described. The accessory ratio display unit 68 includes three 7-segment type indicators (8-segment type including a point portion) (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2D (I), the accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the value of the accessory ratio (%) from “00.0” to “99.9” from the first decimal place. When the ratio of the accessory is 100%, “100” is displayed. For example, when the accessory ratio display unit 68 is composed of four 7-segment indicators (LED lamps), the value of the accessory ratio (%) to the second decimal place is displayed.

  Further, the accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the accessory ratio according to the accessory ratio with reference to a reference value determined by the rules (for example, a continuous accessory ratio of 60% which is a prize ball by continuous operation of the accessory). You may change the color. Thereby, it is possible to notify and notify the deviation from the reference value of the accessory ratio. For example, in the case where the ratio of the actors corresponds to the ratio of consecutive actors, the actors ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 55.0% and yellow in the range of 55.1% to 60.0%. And in red in the range of 60.1% to 100%. In addition, during the big hit, since the ratio of the accessory increases, it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow). In addition, for example, the bonus rate is obtained by winning a so-called bonus rate that is commonly used (out of the total number of winning balls, winning all bonuses (special variable prize winning device 39 and normal variable prize winning device 37). The ratio of the number of prize balls is 70%, and the role ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 65.0%, and 65.1% to 70.0%. Is displayed in yellow, and in the range of 70.1% to 100%, it is displayed in red. In addition, in the configuration in which the feature ratio is displayed in a single color without changing the color, the feature ratio display blinks when the feature ratio deviates greatly from the design value (when it is greater than or equal to a predetermined value). You can do it.

  The number of winning balls for each role (the number of winning balls for each role) for calculating the winning rate of the winning rate ratio display unit 68 is accumulated until the gaming machine 10 is turned off and cleared when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (including power failure recovery), the accessory ratio display is “00.0”. Thereafter, in the accessory ratio display unit 68, the accessory ratio is updated whenever a winning occurs. In addition, assuming that a special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) is one set, the number of acquired balls for each function (also called the number of acquired balls for each function) is a plurality of blocks (storage area of predetermined bytes). In this case, the number of balls acquired for each role is retained without being cleared even when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (II), in the state other than the game ball being fired or in the customer waiting demo state (that is, in the customer waiting state), the accessory ratio display unit 68 is turned off when the segment (light emitting unit) of the display is turned off. It may be in a display state. On the other hand, in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not being performed or the game ball is being launched, the segment (light emitting unit) of the indicator lights up in the accessory ratio display unit 68, and the accessory ratio is set so that the player in the game can recognize it. indicate. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the state other than the game ball being launched or in the customer waiting demo state, the accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the accessory ratio, and in the state not in the customer waiting demonstration or the state in which the game ball is being launched. It is good also as a structure which hides an object ratio. Thereby, the player can select a gaming machine or a game table to be played in consideration of the bonus ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (III), the accessory ratio display unit 68 performs error display (“EEE” display) to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball breakage and overflow (fullness). (Shoot ball break error and overflow error described later) are not included. In addition, since it is possible to put the game ball into the prize opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the accessory ratio display unit 68 is not updated, but the accessory ratio is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. doing.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the general map variation display game and the special map variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, wins the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30 b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is passed through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

  The normal start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been executed and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or the result of the normal map variable display game is normal When the variable winning device 37 has been converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 34, if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1).

  In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

  The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

  When the common figure random number value extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 are detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball won at the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game and is stored as a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball won at the normal variable prize winning device 37 is shown in FIG. It is detected as the start winning ball of the variable display game, and stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

  When detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, each fluctuation pattern random number value and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning at the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) are identified in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (see FIG. This is performed by suspending and displaying a predetermined result form after variably displaying special symbols and special symbols). In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the decoration special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest.

  When a game ball is won at the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning device 39 opens widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player is given a privilege that he can acquire many game balls. The

  When the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variable display game As a result of this, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In this embodiment, a big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short period of time by energizing the large winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. That the condition device does not operate means that the specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big win, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

  As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure change display game is ready to be executed, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, the count switch. (39a) includes a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board). The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). A data bus 140 that connects between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130; a CPU 110 having the input unit 111; an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; Etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference for a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach productions, and there is a possibility that a special result mode is derived (differing expected value). As a system of reach production, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach). Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in a variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a jackpot for determining the jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including execution time of a fluctuation display game in a fluctuation display without various reach and reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  Further, the CPU 111a obtains any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the general start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. The switch 36a is connected to a start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37, winning port switches 35a to 35n, and a large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal having a low level of 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the big winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. Is done.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Further, the second input port 123 has an out-ball detection switch 65 for detecting a detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and a game ball entering the out-port 30b. Detection signal, a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame). Is the payout busy signal in a state in which the payout control device 200 can accept a command? It is a signal indicating whether or not.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. A game is acquired via the data bus 140 by taking in a signal, a shot ball switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before paying out, an overflow switch signal indicating overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24. A first input port 122 for supplying to the microcomputer 111 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 receives opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b that opens the special variation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

  The output unit 130 also includes third output ports 135-1 and 135-for outputting on / off data of segment lines to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50. 2. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the power solenoid 37c and the big prize solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. , Second drivers 138b-1, 138b-2 for outputting segment line on / off drive signals output from the third output ports 135-1, 135-2 on the current supply side of the collective display device 50, fourth output. A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the port 136, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 is provided. The second driver 138 b-2 outputs segment line on / off drive signals for the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 in the collective display device 50. The second driver 138b-1 outputs a segment line on / off drive signal for the other display unit (display) of the collective display device 50.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 serving as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure A possible FeRAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) includes a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a change command, a stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 via the command I / F 331. As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111b. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a hit / decision of the normal variation display game is determined.

  Then, the universal symbol display game is displayed on the universal symbol display device, after the identification symbol is varied and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped. When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the start memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

  Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the start memory, the random value for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result state on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control for allowing the game ball to flow into the special winning opening by, for example, opening the open / close door 39c of the special variable winning apparatus 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b. .

  Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. One round (R) is to open the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 or 4 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability variation state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short-time state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short-time operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since the opening time of the vehicle is controlled so as to be substantially increased, the power transmission is supported. Even in a high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the ordinary power support is executed in a time-short state overlappingly.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to perform time-reduced variation in which the execution time of the above-described usual map variation display game (ordinary diagram variation time) is set to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the short time state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shortened from the normal time, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure change display game is also executed.

  Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Also, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first release time (for example, 100 msec) in which the release time (normal power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the short time state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In addition, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control apparatus 100, the step code (number) is represented as “A ***”.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from game control apparatus 100 serving as main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the computer starts normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control apparatus 100 performs the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Determine (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

  In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time has ended, the game control apparatus 100 reads out and writes RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (the result of A1016 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). As the validity determination, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power-off (A1020). In addition, you may exclude the area | region (For example, discharge | emission ball number area | region, the acquired ball number area | region, and the earned ball number area | region classified by accessory) which memorize | stores the information regarding a ball and the number of acquired balls from the object of validity determination. If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process in the case of normal recovery from a power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1026 in FIG. 5B and the initialization process is executed. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value when the power failure is restored (when the power is turned on) in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Further, the areas to be initialized include a discharge ball number area, an acquired ball number area, and an earned ball number area for each accessory, which will be described later, and these areas are initialized by 0 clear (initial value = 0). As a result, the number of discharged balls, the number of acquired balls, the number of acquired balls for each role, as well as the winning rate obtained from the number of acquired balls, and the rate of bonuses calculated from the number of balls acquired for each role are cleared to 0. become. In addition, the structure which does not clear 0 is also possible for the number-of-acquisition ball number area (and thus the ratio of the bonuses). In addition, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. After that, the game control apparatus 100 examines an area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the gaming state is not a high probability state (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 skips the processing of Step A1023 and Step A1024 and proceeds to the processing of Step A1025. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1023), for example, a high probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 50 (Error indicator) ON (lighted) data is saved in the segment area (A1024). And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to rationally perform the below-mentioned special figure game process is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (A1025), and step A1031 Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when the processing of step A1026 is executed after execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the process of step A1031.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step A1025 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in step A1030 include the model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and the suspension of special figures 1 and 2. A decoration special figure 1 holding number command indicating a number and a decoration special figure 2 holding number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. If the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, the customer waiting demo command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included. The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command.

  The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1031, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, the CPU 111a performs setting of a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

  Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random numbers according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, Big hit symbol random number 2), Random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), Random number to determine base symbol hit (per random number), Random number to determine base symbol hit symbol (per symbol random number) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1033) and an interrupt is permitted (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operation clock. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing).

  In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number goes around. Each random number may be updated by a counter by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without overlapping until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step A1035, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of checking by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and monitoring the power failure. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process of step A1035. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1035) (A1034), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process of step A1035 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. Determine (A1038). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1039) and off-data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is executed (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

  In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) includes When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) operable from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as a calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (A1107).

  If the checksum calculation has not ended (the result of A1107 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is terminated.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the big hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (A1201), and updates the small hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1202). Subsequently, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1204), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.

  Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” determines the small hit symbol stop figure of the special figure It is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number to be performed. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the usual figure variation game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure. It is a random number that is the initial value.

  As described above, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM head address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing for inputting from various sensors and switches, capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). If a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the big winning port switch 39a, and an error is monitored (front surface). A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (A1308).

  Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1309), and then a general figure game process for carrying out a process relating to the normal figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1310).

  Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1311).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1312). Furthermore, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (panel radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is executed (A1313).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that, when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, the interrupt is permitted after the external information editing process. Or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of input processing.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read state of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, a switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares an address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares an address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, a switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and saved (stored) in the port input state of the target switch control area. (A1504). Thereafter, the process waits until a delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and the port input state of the target switch control area (first time data) ) And save the inverted data (second time data) (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same state bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (A1510), and the determinate bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed to confirm this time Bits are set (A1511).

  Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same status bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt The logical product with the definite state is calculated and used as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the current confirmed bit and the previous held bit and saves it as the current confirmed state (A1514). Further, an exclusive OR of the previous state and the final state is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process ends.

  If the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but in such a case, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that it cannot be determined correctly. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

  The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off-data to the ports 135-1 and 135-2 (see FIG. 3) that output the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50, for example, in the range of 0 to 4 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). The acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135-1 (A1608).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the touch switch signal from the touch switch (launching touch switch) provided on the operation handle 24 is an ON signal (A1609). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 24 is operated. When the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an ON signal (the result of A1609 is “Y”), the segment output data is loaded from the segment area corresponding to the digit counter (A1610), and the segment output data is sent to the segment output port 2 ( Output to the port 135-2) (A1612). The segment output data to be output here is the segment output data for the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68. As a result, when the operation handle 24 is operated, the number of discharged balls displayed on the discharged ball number display unit 66, the output of the output rate on the output rate display unit 67, and the amount ratio display unit 68 are displayed. It is possible to display the ratio of items.

  On the other hand, when the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an off signal (the result of A1609 is “N”), the game control device 100 turns off the 7-segment display (LED lamp) (LED off). The segment output data is set (A1611), and the segment output data is output to the segment output port 2 (port 135-2) (A1612). Thereby, when the operation handle 24 is not operated, the number of discharged balls displayed on the discharged ball number display unit 66, the display of the output rate on the output rate display unit 67, and the amount ratio display unit 68 The character ratio display is hidden.

  In step A1609, instead of determining whether or not the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is on, it may be determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is in progress (customer waiting demo state). Then, when the customer is waiting for the demonstration, the display is executed by the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 (A1610, A1612). If not, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 may be hidden (A1611, A1612). As will be described later, when the customer waiting demo flag indicating that the customer waiting demo state (the customer waiting demo state) is set (A3210 in FIG. 27), that is, the game control device 100 produces an effect. When a customer waiting demo command is transmitted to the control device 300, it can be determined that a customer waiting demo is in progress.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1613), further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire (A1614), and finally synthesizes them. Data is output to the external information / firing permission signal output port 137 (A1615). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test fire test apparatus, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output (A1618). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and synthesized to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70. The output data is output (A1621). The data of step A1621 is data on the payout rate. Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and synthesized to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70. Data is output (A1622) and the output process is terminated. The data of step A1622 is data on the ratio of items.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure of payout command transmission processing.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter for each number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, two winning balls, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). An area is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 receives a winning that is a check target among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers in all the winning number counter areas is completed (A1703).

  When all the checks are completed (the result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1704), and the winning number counter area 2 The payout number corresponding to the address is acquired (A1705). Then, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area as a new prize ball remaining number (A1707). Note that as the value of the remaining prize ball area before the processing of step A1707, a fraction that has not reached a predetermined number as a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not equal to or greater than 0 (the result of A1709 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by 1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (A1711). Further, the process returns to step A1708.

  Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A1712), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy state flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in an on state (busy state). It is said. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start payout control. Any one of a state, a busy state where the payout control cannot be started immediately, and an undefined state where the state is undefined is set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (the result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the payout command transmission process. When not busy, the idle state and the undefined state are included. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (the result of A1714 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether the winning number counter area 1 has a count, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When there is no count number (the result of A1715 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether or not the count number has been checked (A1717). If all checks are completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and the processes from step A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1718), and the target winning number counter A payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control apparatus 100 can start the payout control with a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) can start payout control. In this case, a prize ball command transmission means for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means is provided.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, leading to a problem of increasing costs. According to the present embodiment, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39). A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of the game balls, and a payout control means for performing payout control of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means ( And a game control means for receiving a prize ball command based on a status signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. When a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device, the award is immediately received. Ball command Sending a prize ball command to the payout control means in response to a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means without being sent to the payout control means. Will be doing.

  The game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning apparatus 39) having different numbers of winning balls, and game control means (game control apparatus). 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can specify whether or not a prize ball command has been transmitted for each prize ball number to instruct game ball payout control, and the status signal starts payout control. If there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates the payout Whether or not the control means can start payout control is determined before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter.

  In addition to performing game control in an integrated manner, based on the winning of a game ball in a predetermined winning area (first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command and payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means provides a prize ball command when the status signal indicating whether the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main prize) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area Ball signal) gaming machine External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting to the outside, and the external information output means determines whether or not the state signal output from the payout control means can start payout control by the payout control means. The prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 37, general winning port 35). , A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize winning device 39), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command is issued as the payout control means (payout) The winning ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the predetermined winning area is configured to transmit to the control device 200). Entering game balls into The number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to the area, and to output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. Can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and updates the game ball when winning in the predetermined winning area, and accumulates the number of winning balls by the external information output means By performing the update in correspondence with the processing, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

  When the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A1804. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the processing after step A1807 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “N”), the processing after step A1810 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the winning random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the winning initial value random number as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded hit random number is set in a register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1810). If the winning design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is “N”), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the winning design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the winning design initial value random number as the next initial value (A1811). Then, the next initial value of the loaded winning symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1812), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2, 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both. Target and update every time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number to be updated from among a plurality of random numbers to be updated (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as “masked value”) and set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

  In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte as “0” as the addition value and sets the lower 1 byte. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is to prevent the masked value from being “0” and to prevent the value from changing by adding “0”.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “Y”), the value of the random number area to be updated (2 bytes) is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random value, and whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

  If the new random number value is not greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 places the new random value in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (A1914). A random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “N”), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random value (or a value if a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number update process 2 ends.

  In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Accordingly, the CPU 111a, among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, changes the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 15A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process. The prize opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process. The winning port switch / status monitoring process constitutes monitoring means for monitoring a winning at each winning port and executing a predetermined process when a winning is received. As a predetermined process, the number of discharged balls is updated by +1 (added by 1), or an addition process is performed on the number of winning balls by winning the prize to calculate a payout rate (total number of winning balls) and an accessory ratio There are things.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2001). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described later.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2003). Then, the illegal winning / winning monitoring process for monitoring the illegal winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004). Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal power support state, that is, whether or not it is in the short-time state or the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state) (A2005).

  When the game control device 100 is in the normal power support state (the result of A2005 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2006). ). Then, an illegal & prize winning monitoring process for monitoring an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed (A2007). Next, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2008). In this embodiment, the winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35 and the start opening 1 switch 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2009).

  On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the normal power support state (the result of A2005 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for winning switch that does not require fraud monitoring (A2010). In this embodiment, the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is the winning opening switch (SW) 35a, 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35 and the starting opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2011). A winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 is prepared (A2012). Then, an illegal & prize winning monitoring process for monitoring an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed (A2013).

  FIG. 15B is a table showing the priority order regarding winning-port monitoring for each gaming state. This priority order is realized by the order of winning-port monitoring in the winning-port switch / status monitoring processing (FIG. 15A) and the winning-number counter updating processing (FIG. 17A) described later.

  Here, winning-port monitoring refers to counting the number of winnings, updating the number of discharged balls (calculation), and the winning rate in fraud & winning monitoring or winning counter updating (also executed in fraud & winning monitoring). It is to perform the calculation of, and the calculation of the ratio of objects. In particular, even when there is a winning at the same time, a winning rate and an accessory ratio are calculated based on a predetermined priority order as shown in FIG. Done. Note that in the normal gaming state and the ordinary power support state, the prize winning opening is not opened unless there is fraud, so it is not added to the priority table.

  As shown in FIG. 15B (I), the priority order for winning-port monitoring can be changed according to the gaming state (steps A2005 to A2013). That is, in accordance with the determination as to whether or not it is in the ordinary power support state (A2005), the winning counter updating process (also executed in the fraud & winning monitoring process) is performed with the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning port). It is possible to set (determine) which of the prize winning ports (general winning a prize port 35 and start winning prize port 36 (first starting prize winning port)) that does not require fraud monitoring first.

  In particular, when the normal power support state is in effect (the result of A2005 is “Y”), the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a) that does not require fraud monitoring to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 (second starting winning opening). ) Can be executed prior to the start winning opening 36 (the first starting winning opening) having (), such as counting the number of winning prizes, updating the number of discharged balls, and adding the number of acquired balls. As will be described later, among the winning ports having a winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring, the winning port monitoring of the general winning port 35 is prioritized before the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port). Shall be executed. In addition, when it is not in the ordinary power support state (the result of A2005 is “N”), that is, in the normal game state, the special game state, etc., the start prize having a prize port switch (start port 1 switch 36a) that does not require fraud monitoring. The winning opening can be monitored for the opening 36 (first starting winning opening) before the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37 (second starting winning opening).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15B (II), when the power transmission support is in progress (the result of A2005 is “Y”), among the start winning ports of the winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring, If only the winning mouth monitoring (winning number counter updating process) is executed before the winning mouth monitoring (A2006, A2007) of the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning mouth), the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting) is executed. It is possible to preferentially monitor the winning opening for the general winning opening 35 having a larger number of prize balls than the winning opening monitoring of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

  Also, in game states other than the general power support state (special game state, normal game state, etc.), winning hole monitoring is preferentially performed in the order of winning holes having the largest number of winning balls (number of winning balls). As a result, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially obtained, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

  Further, as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 15C, the processing of steps A2005 to A2009 of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of FIG. 15A may be deleted and the processing of steps A2010 to A2013 may be executed after step A2004. Good. In this case, in all gaming states (without depending on the gaming state), the winning prize order (the number of prize balls) obtained is the order of winning prizes (large winning entry → general winning entry → first start winning entry → In the order of the second start winning opening), winning opening monitoring can be prioritized and executed. In this case, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially obtained, and the player's sense of expectation for the game can be improved. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process of FIG. 15C monitors winnings at each winning opening in the order of the number of winning balls to be obtained, and if there are winnings, adds the number of winning balls to win the winning rate The monitoring means for calculating the (total number of prize balls) and the ratio of the items is configured.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 after step A2009 or A2013 (A2014). When there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 (the result of A2014 is “Y”), the value of the discharge ball number area for storing the discharge ball number is updated by 1 in order to add 1 to the discharge ball number (A2015), A ball performance monitoring process described later is executed (A2016). Then, an out ball detection command indicating that a ball has entered the out port 30b is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (A2017). Thereafter, a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored such as whether an error has occurred or which signal is to be monitored this time is updated ( A2018).

  In the present embodiment, the out-ball detection switch 65 and each winning hole switch detect the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32, so that the number of discharged balls is updated by 1 (A2015, A2210). . However, since the number of balls to be fired from the ball launcher is basically equal to the number of game balls to be discharged to the outside of the game area 32, a switch (sensor) that directly detects the ball launched from the ball launcher. ) May be provided to count the number of discharged balls. In addition, since there is a return to the ball launcher from the ball launcher, the number of discharged balls is more accurate when using the outball detection switch 65 and each prize opening switch as in this embodiment. Can count.

  When there is no input to the out ball detection switch 65 (result of A2014 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the state scan counter (A2018). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (A2019). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2020). Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball break error) based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the dispensing abnormality status signal (dispensing abnormality error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2021). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2022).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. When the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave improper signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2023). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2023 is “N”), the winning prize switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2023 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2024), and an error has occurred. A game machine state check process for determining the state of the game machine is executed (A2025).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (a payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2026). ), The winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated. Details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later.

  Note that the processing from step A2024 to A2026 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2024 to A2026 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, A2007, and A2013 in the prize opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The fraud & winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning apparatus 39 and the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning apparatus 37. For the 2nd starting prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) and large prize winning opening (special variable prize winning device 39), open the opening / closing member forcibly using a piano wire or illegal equipment, etc. and put the game ball into the prize ball Since it is easy for fraud to be paid out, fraud is monitored in addition to winning detection.

  First, the game control device 100 checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error (A2101), and determines whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the large winning port switch 39a.

  Then, when it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2103 is “N”), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the illegal winning number after addition is determined to be the fraudulent occurrence of the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number is more than 5 (for example, 5) (A2105).

  The reason why the number of judgments is five is that, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is won or a signal is noisy and not to be judged as illegal, and an error is not easily determined even though it is not illegal.

  If the number is not equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number (A2106), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as an effect command (A2108), and further prepares a fraudulent winning occurrence flag as the fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and the number of winnings for setting the winning ball Counter update processing is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), if the target notification timer is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is a winning port switch (start port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the notification timer is allowed to be updated when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one large winning port switch 39a, and is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the other large winning port switch 39a. Not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the special variation winning device 39, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancel command is prepared as an effect command (A2116). Then, an illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared as an illegal flag (A2117). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  The game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize winning monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

  In addition, the game control device 100 does not execute the processing of step A2119 or when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (the result of A2120 is “N”), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (A2121), and the production command is set. The process is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.

  Through the above process, a fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when a fraud occurs, and a fraud release command is transmitted to the production control device 300 along with a fraud release, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 17A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of winning number counter update processing. The winning number counter updating process is executed in steps A2009 and A2011 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A and in step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning port switches to be monitored from the winning port monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (more accurately, an input change) to the target winning port switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is “N”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2217). It should be noted that the table address is updated so that the target winning port switch changes in the order of the left winning port switch 35a, the right winning port switch 35b, and the start port 1 switch 36a, and the winning port of the general winning port 35 The monitoring is preferentially executed prior to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203) and sets the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). In the winning number counter area, the count number is updated by +1 (added by 1) for each winning at the target winning opening, and the winning number (number of winnings) at the target winning opening is stored. Further, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2205).

  If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). Next, the number of winning balls corresponding to the target winning number counter area 1 (target winning port) is set (A2207). Then, the set number of winning balls is added to the value of the acquired number of balls area (A2208), and the set number of winning balls is added to the value of the number of acquired balls for each object (A2209). The value is updated by +1 (A2210). After that, a ball performance monitoring process (to be described later) is executed for calculating the yield rate and the ratio of the bonuses, and controlling the display of the discharged ball number display unit 66, the yield rate display unit 67, and the bonus rate display unit 68. To do.

  In the processing of steps A2204 and A2209, if the change in the number of winnings to the general winning opening 35 or the starting winning openings 36, 37 in a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the number of winnings It may be configured such that (the value of the winning number counter area) is not updated by +1, and the number of winning balls is not added to the value of the winning ball area for each role. In other words, in such a case, regarding the winnings exceeding the predetermined number, the counting of the number of winning balls and the number of winnings may be stopped for calculating the bonus rate. With this configuration, for example, if a player has not been able to properly give a prize ball due to the occurrence of some trouble, the number of winnings has been extremely increased due to the replenishment processing of the staff in the hall (game shop) In addition, it is possible to appropriately calculate the ratio of the actors. In addition, it is possible to prevent an injustice that a malicious person causes a large number of game balls to be awarded to the general prize opening 35 or the like in a short time in order to manipulate the number of winnings to the general prize opening 35.

  In the present embodiment, the out-ball detection switch 65 and each prize opening switch detect a game ball discharged to the outside of the game area 32, and the game control device 100 updates and counts the number of discharged balls by +1 ( A2015, A2210), a discharge ball number counting means for counting the number of discharged balls is configured. However, since the number of game balls emitted from the ball launcher is basically equal to the number of game balls discharged outside the game area 32, a switch for detecting a shot ball from the ball launcher ( Sensor) and the game control apparatus 100 counts the number of shot balls, so that the discharged ball number counting means for counting the number of shot balls may be configured instead of the discharged ball count means. In addition, since there is a return to the ball launching device from the ball launching device, the number of discharged balls can be counted more accurately when the game ball is used by the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning port switch.

  The game control apparatus 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 2 after completion of the process of step A2211 or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”) (A2212). Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2213), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2214).

  When no overflow occurs (result of A2214 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 (A2215). After the process of step A2215 is completed or when an overflow occurs (result of A2214 is “Y”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216). Then, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2217).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2217 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch. If all the switches have been monitored (the result of A2217 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area, and winning information (winning number, winning number) is stored.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17B, the number of discharged balls area for storing the number of discharged balls, the number of acquired balls area for storing the number of acquired balls (total of the number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls, A description will be given of the earned ball number area for each role for storing the earned ball number for each role. The discharged ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the earned ball number area for each accessory are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control apparatus 100.

  The number of acquired balls is used to obtain a payout rate. The number of balls acquired by each role is used to calculate the rate of the role. The number of balls acquired for each winning combination is the number of acquired balls for each winning opening (the winning combination) (however, the big winning opening is distinguished between the big hit state and the small hit state). Further, when the total value (total number) of the number of acquired balls for each role is calculated, the total number of winning balls obtained by winning the winning award is obtained. The prize ratio is, for example, a ratio of the total number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening during the big hit with respect to the total number of winning balls for each winning.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (I), the discharge ball number area is a storage area having a size of 1 byte, and is used for storing values of 0 to 99 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17B (II), the acquired ball number area is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, and is used for storing values of 0 to 1500.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (III), each winning ball area for each role is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, and is used for storing a value of 0 to 65535. In addition, each acquired ball area for each accessory may be a storage area having a size of 3 bytes or more. Moreover, when exceeding an upper limit, it keeps at an upper limit (65535). The number-of-acquisition ball number area for each role is an area for storing the total number of winning balls for winning at the plurality of general winning holes 35, and the total number of winning balls for winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1). , An area for storing the total number of winning balls for winning in the normal variation winning device 37 (start port 2), an area for storing the total number of winning balls for winning the big winning opening during the big hit, Corresponds to an area for storing the total number of winning balls by winning in the big winning opening during winning (other than during big hit).

[Dead performance monitoring process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout performance monitoring process. The payout performance monitoring process is executed in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of discharged balls is 100 (predetermined number) or more (A2301). When the number of discharged balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2301 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2313. When the number of discharged balls is 100 or more (the result of A2301 is “Y”), in order to update the payout rate displayed on the payout rate display unit 67 to the latest payout rate, the acquired ball count area (RWM) The value of (inside) is loaded (A2302). In the acquired number of balls area, the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of winning balls), that is, the payout rate is stored. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (A2303).

  When the acquired number of balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2303 is “N”), the game control device 100 indicates the light emission color (red or green in the present embodiment) of the segment (light emission part) of the payout rate display part 67. The value of the segment color number area (within the RWM) for storing the color number is updated (A2304), and the segment data corresponding to the number of acquired balls (that is, the percentage of winning balls) is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2305). ). The segment area that does not correspond to the color number is cleared to zero. In this way, in the payout rate display section 67, it is possible to update and display the payout rate display by changing the emission color (for example, from red to green), and to inform the player that the payout rate has been updated. Can be recognized.

  In this way, by the processing of steps A2301 to A2305, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls) is updated and displayed on the output rate display unit 67. it can. In addition, when there are a plurality of winnings at the same time at the timing when the number of discharged balls reaches 100, a plurality of winnings are determined based on a priority order predetermined for each winning mouth as shown in FIG. 15B. Adopting a winning entry with a high priority among winnings, and adding the number of winning balls that were adopted to calculate the winning rate (total number of winning balls and winning balls) (priority calculation means) ). As a result, particularly in the normal game state and the special game state, the highest possible payout rate is obtained at the timing when the number of discharged balls is 100 (predetermined number), and the player's sense of expectation for the game can be improved. Further, in the specific gaming state (the general electric power support state), since there are many winnings in the normal variation winning device 37, the winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is preferentially adopted. Note that the number of winning balls that have not been adopted among a plurality of winnings is added to the payout rate (the total number of winning balls and winning balls) in the payout performance monitoring process in the next timer interruption process.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15C, the winning mouths are arranged in the order of winning mouths (the number of winning balls) obtained in the order of the winning mouths (general winning mouth → general winning mouth → first starting winning mouth → second starting winning mouth). When priority is given to the monitoring (calculation of the payout rate), the highest possible payout rate is obtained at the timing when the number of discharged balls reaches 100, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

  When the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (the result of A2303 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the value of the segment color number area to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A2306), and “99”. The blinking segment data is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2307). Since the payout rate display section 67 can display only the payout rate from 0 to 99, when the number of acquired balls (the payout rate) reaches 100 or more in this way, “99” blinks in only one color (for example, red). Let In particular, in the special game state (big hit), the payout rate becomes 100 or more, but when the payout rate display is updated, the color of the payout rate display is prevented from changing frequently. In addition, during the special game state (big hit), it is possible to turn off the appearance rate display part 67 and hide the appearance rate, but in this case, the number of acquired balls (outage rate) is When updating the output rate display at 100 or more, the color change of the output rate display may be performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 prepares a command corresponding to the acquired number of balls as an effect command (A2308), and executes an effect command setting process (A2309). Thereby, the production control device 300 can display the payout rate (number of acquired balls) on the display device 41. Note that the command here corresponds to a payout rate (acquired number of balls) of less than 100 displayed in the payout rate display unit 67 (range of 1 byte).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal data regarding the payout rate in the test signal output data area in the RWM (A2310). As a result, the signal data relating to the payout rate is output to the relay board 70 and further to the external test test device through the output process (A1621 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means. Then, it is possible to confirm whether or not an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the yield rate output to the test firing test device with the yield rate obtained by the test firing test device. The payout rate here may be a value of 100 or more using the value loaded from the acquired number of balls area as it is. In addition, as signal data regarding the payout rate, information indicating that there was a win at a specific winning opening and the data of the number of discharged balls are output to the external test test device as they are, and the output rate is calculated by the test test device. It is also possible to configure. In addition, when the payout rate is an abnormal value that is greater than or equal to a predetermined value or less, a signal data (on signal) for notifying an error is displayed in the test signal output data area instead of signal data (numerical value) relating to the payout rate. A configuration of saving and outputting to the test firing test apparatus is also possible (off signal when the value is normal). Next, the acquired ball number area is cleared to 0 (A2311), and the discharged ball number area is cleared to 0 (A2312).

  After step A2312, or when the number of discharged balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2301 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines the value of the number of acquired balls for each role shown in FIG. 17B (III). The total value (total number of winning balls) is calculated (A2313). Next, the number of winning balls (the big winning opening (for big hit)), which is the sum of the number of winning balls in the big winning opening during the big hit state, is loaded (A2314), and the number of winning balls (the big winning) Based on the mouth (big hit)), (the number of winning balls / total value) × 100 (%) is calculated as the winning ratio (A2315). Here, the total value is the sum of the number of acquired balls for each role, and corresponds to the total number of winning balls obtained by winning a winning opening. The accessory ratio is calculated to the first decimal place. However, since the decimal is difficult to handle, a value 10 times the accessory ratio may be calculated.

  It should be noted that the number of winning balls used to calculate the ratio of the winnings is not only the number of winning points (big winning award (big hit)), but also the number of winning points (big winning award (small hit)) And / or the number of winning balls (ordinary variable winning device) may be included. Note that the number of winning balls (big prize opening (for small hits)) is the total number of winning balls obtained by winning the big winning opening during the small hit state. The “variable winning device” is the total number of winning balls obtained by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the calculation result in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (A2316). Thus, the accessory ratio can be displayed on the accessory ratio display unit 68 through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). Next, a command corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio (A2315) is prepared as an effect command (A2317), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2318). Thereby, the production control device 300 can display the accessory ratio on the display device 41. In addition, you may make the command here respond | correspond to the value (0-1000) (2 byte range) of 10 times of an accessory ratio.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal data relating to the accessory ratio in the test signal output data area (A2319). As a result, signal data relating to the accessory ratio is output to the relay board 70 and further to the external test firing test device via the output process (A1622 in FIG. 11) as game information output means, and information relating to the accessory ratio is notified (displayed). )it can. Then, it is possible to confirm whether an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the accessory ratio output to the test firing test apparatus with the accessory ratio obtained by the test firing test apparatus. In addition, as the signal data relating to the accessory ratio, it is also possible to output data of each accessory acquisition ball number as it is to an external trial test apparatus and calculate the accessory ratio with the trial test apparatus.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the value of the number of discharged balls area (A2320), calculates the value of (100−number of discharged balls) (A2321), and sets the segment data corresponding to this calculation result as the discharged balls. The data is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the number display section 66 (A2322). Thus, the number of discharged balls is displayed in a countdown display on the discharged ball number display section 66 through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). In the case of counting up display, the segment data corresponding to the value of the discharge ball number area may be saved in the segment area as it is. Also, a command corresponding to the calculation result is prepared as an effect command (A2323), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2324). Thereby, the production control device 300 can display the number of discharged balls on the display device 41 by a countdown display. The command here corresponds to the number of discharged balls (range of 1 byte) of less than 100 displayed in the discharged ball number display section 66. Thereafter, the appearance performance monitoring process ends.

  As a modified example, the value of the number of discharged balls, the value of the number of acquired balls, and the value of the number of acquired balls for each accessory are transmitted as data to the effect control device 300. An object ratio may be calculated. Moreover, in step A2310 and A2319, the signal data regarding the payout rate and the accessory ratio, the signal data for notifying that the output rate and the accessory ratio are abnormal values (a value equal to or higher than a predetermined value) Is output as an external information signal to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in the amusement store, and it is information or an abnormal value regarding the game play rate or the ratio of the property May be notified (displayed).

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed in steps A2020, A2022, and A2025 in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The game control apparatus 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is the same as described in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the check target signal is ON (A2402). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2402 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2403), and a target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2404). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2405). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error signal, and indicates a non-touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the check target signal is on (result of A2402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires the target state on command, and prepares (A2407). Further, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2408). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they match (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2412. If they do not match (the result of A2409 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the updated state monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2414). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (A2415 result is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2415 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2026 in the winning a prize switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2501). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (result of A2501 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2502), and sets an off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2503). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2501 is “Y”), a busy state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2504), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2505). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (ON / OFF) of the current payout busy signal (A2506). If they match (the result of A2506 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2509. If they do not coincide (the result of A2506 is “N”), the current payout busy signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (A2507), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2508).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by 1 (A2509), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2510). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2510 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  When the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (result of A2510 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value by 1 smaller than the timer comparison value (A2511). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2512), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  In the payout busy signal check process, a payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the timer comparison value. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 that forms the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is made. Prior to the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A2603) if the special figure game processing timer is not 0. The special game process timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game process timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2619.

  If the special game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 corresponds to the special figure game process number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with a special figure game process number, and a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effect, A special figure routine process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2608). Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, special information for performing special figure display processing, and the like. The process during the figure change is executed (A2609). Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of jackpot or sets each jackpot if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot. A special chart display process is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process (A2610). Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, and processes information necessary for performing the big prize opening opening process. Processing during fanfare / interval for setting and the like is executed (A2611). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if the final round is, A process for opening a special winning opening is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball process (A2612). Details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is executed (A2613). Details of the winning prize remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “6” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (A2614). Details of the jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “7” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets the information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. Is executed during small hitting fanfare (A2615). Details of the small hitting fanfare process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game process number is “8” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hitting process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process (A2616). Details of the small hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “9” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end process (A2617). Details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (A2618). Details of the small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the special figure game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then displays the special figure 1 display. The symbol fluctuation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation control table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed (A2622). Details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning at the starting winning port 36. Is determined (A2703). If there is no winning at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is “N”), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the normal power support state) (A2704).

  When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing time reduction (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if it is in the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the normal power support state (short-time state), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and an effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, a winning is not made unless the start winning opening 36 is left-handed, and a winning is not made unless the right-handed winning device 37 is right-handed. If the player does not hit right, the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 34. Therefore, the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed in the power-powered support state (short-time state). However, when the start winning opening 36 is won during the power-powered support state (that is, in the power-powered support state) Left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to make a right-hand shot by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 36 (start port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure start port switch common process (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. Determine (A2711). If there is no winning at the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize at the second start prize opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). If the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not an ordinary electric power fraud has occurred (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the normal power fraud is occurring. The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Accordingly, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) when the ordinary electric power fraud has not occurred (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) Then, the special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the start port switch monitoring process is also terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710) in the start port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets start port no-win information indicating that there is no start port win (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802). If there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2710.

  When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) and determines whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register. Is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

  When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805). Information on the presence of a winning entry indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). The prepared jackpot random number is used in the special figure start port switch common processing.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The starting port signal output count is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the start signal output number area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by one. (A2906), and saves the target start opening winning flag (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of the RWM. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in the RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2914). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2915), and executes special figure hold information determination processing (A2916). Then, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared as an effect command (A2917), and an effect command setting process (A2918) is executed to share the special figure start port switch. The process ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. The random number value stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2916) in the start port common process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process. The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 checks the start opening prize flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) is a win (A3001). When it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, if the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the normal power support state) (A3002).

  The game control device 100 ends the special figure hold information determination process when it is in the special figure short time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, if the special drawing time is not short (the result of A3002 is “N”), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (A3003). When the big hit or the small hit is being made (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the big hit or the small hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), the big hit determination processing for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not Is executed (A3004). If the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is a prize (A3008). When it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the game control device 100 wins the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. A hit determination process is executed (A3009). If the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is set. Information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed (A3016), and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3017). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), An effect command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being opened (A3101). When the special winning opening is being opened (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being opened (the result of A3101 is “N”), whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed. Determine (A3102).

  The game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A3105 when the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3102 is “Y”). Also, if the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3105 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether or not the small hitting is being processed. (A3103). If small hitting is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the small hit process is not in progress (the result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring processing. If the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. Then, 0 is set in the winning counter (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 39a). (A3110). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “Y”), a special winning prize count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and an effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the prize counter is 0 (A3114). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), a special winning prize count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and an effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by 1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A3115). When the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (result of A3115 is “Y”), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is ended, and when the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (result of A3115 is “N”), small It is determined whether or not the hit remaining ball is being processed (A3116).

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3116 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is “ N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of winning prizes (A3117), and the number of winning prizes is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example," 9 " ) It is determined whether or not the above has been reached (A3118).

  The game control apparatus 100 ends the big prize opening switch monitoring process when the big prize mouth count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “N”). Also, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “Y”), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether small hitting is being processed (A3121).

  When the game control device 100 is not processing the small hits (the result of A3121 is “N”), the game winning device switch monitoring process is terminated and the small hits are being processed (the result of A3121 is “Y”). Then, the value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3205). If the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (A3209). If the result is "N"), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area to indicate that the customer waiting demo state is in effect (A3210) (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares the customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3211), performs an effect command setting process (A3212), and sets “0” related to the special figure normal process as the process number ( A3213). On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is “Y”), “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (A3213). Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

  Thus, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are 0, and the customer wait demo command is received. The produced effect control device 300 performs a setting for displaying the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the game control device 100 may be configured to transmit a customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 2 change start process (A3202), and the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is executed. A figure hold number command (decoration special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), an effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 change start process (A3206), and displays the special figure 1 hold number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. A figure hold number command (decoration special figure 1 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), an effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the special figure 1 hold number check, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 28 is performed on the second start memory. Is what you do.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507).

  Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the shift information in the small hit flag area (A3601), and saves the shift information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3603), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3604). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3605).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 1 in which the loss information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is “N”), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit A small hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not (A3608).

  When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 displays the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwriting and saving (A3610), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 is set while the information is lost in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. The process ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 30 is performed on the second start-up memory.

  The game control device 100 first saves the shift information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3703). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3704).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 2 in which the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination process (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a judgment result other than a jackpot (A3807) and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state). (A3803). If the state is a high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3803 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (A3805).

  When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A3807). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit is set as the determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (see FIG. 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3901). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the aforementioned big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being a small hit and a big hit. The range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) does not overlap. In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit. However, a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the judgment result (A3903), The determination process ends.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3901 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the big hit random number value of the target (see FIG. 1) is the lower hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the big hit is set as the determination result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

  Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the normal power support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). And the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure command corresponding to a stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode transition information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of jackpot (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and is used in the jackpot end process described later. In other words, the presentation mode can be shifted with the big hit as a trigger based on the presentation mode transition information. Also, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the big hit stop symbol pattern (whether it is a probable big hit symbol / normal big hit symbol, etc.), so the big hit ends with the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit) The transition destination of the production mode to be changed later is changed. In addition, since the production mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the transition destination of the production mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability variation state) is currently being performed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when the big hit flag is a small hit (result of A4011) Is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol small bonus symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted in response to the small hit. Then, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped as a stop symbol pattern. Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4019), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4020). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure one little hit The symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction judgment data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the normal power support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of jackpot (the result of A4101 is “Y”), and is used in the jackpot end process described later. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the special decoration figure command is saved in the special decoration figure command area (A4113), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4114). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116). The setting process ends.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time) does not directly affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the first-half variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first variation group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). .

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207), and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

  Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information setting. The process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

  The fluctuation pattern includes a first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and a second half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2, prepares it (A4302), and sets a target variation pattern random number. A fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from one storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (A4304), and when it is out of place (the result of A4304 is “Y”), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. On the other hand, if it is not out of place (the result of A4304 is “N”), a distribution process (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (reserved) Fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from (for Equation 1) and prepared (A4308). Then, a sorting process is executed (A4309), the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4310). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is stored from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). 3 is loaded and prepared (A4314). Thereafter, a sorting process (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte sorting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether the top data of the selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in A4302) is a code with no distribution (ie, “0”) (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach” is defined. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  When the first data in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the data address corresponding to the distribution result. (A4407) and the 2-byte sorting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “N”), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second-half variation group table) A value is acquired (A4403).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (A4405). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403. Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the new random value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A4405. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4405).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variation selection table defined in the selection table (the latter half variation group table). If it is determined in step A4405 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (result of A4405 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4407), 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  First, the game control device 100 first data of the target selection table (the latter-half variation group table prepared in A4302, the latter-half variation selection table prepared in Step A4307, or the first-half variation selection table prepared in Step A4313). Is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (A4501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is terminated. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is not an unsorted code (result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (second half fluctuation) One sort value first specified in the group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, or the variation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “N”), the address is updated to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4503. Perform the following processing.

  That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the disturbance determined in the previous step A4505. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number) or first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) specified in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the latter half variation selection table, the latter half variation pattern (the latter half variation number), or the first half variation pattern (the first half variation number) is selected from among the (variation numbers).

  If the game control apparatus 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4507), the distribution process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (A4605).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A4606), and saves the addition value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as a production command (A4609), and a production command setting process is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special symbol holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (a special symbol 1 symbol stop command or a special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the symbol being changed as an effect command (A4701), and executes an effect command setting process. (A4702). The changing symbol can be discriminated from the changing symbol discriminating flag (the special Fig. 1 fluctuation flag or the special Fig. 2 fluctuation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game or decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special-figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 800 msec is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set at 2000 msec.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure display process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal related to the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable display game control information on the special figure 1 display 51. (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure display processing. FIG. 42A shows the first half of the special figure display processing, and FIG. 42B shows the second half of the special figure display processing.

  The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process (A5101), and clears the RWM small hit flag area (A5102). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (A5103), the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (A5104).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A5105), and if it is a big hit (the result of A5105 is "Y"), the big hit of the second special figure variable display game Test signal related to the start of (Special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the accessory continuous actuator operating signal is on, the special symbol 2 signal is on) in the test signal output data area of the RWM Save (A5108) and set the round number upper limit table (A5109).

  On the other hand, if the result of the check of the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5105 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A5106). In some cases (the result of A5106 is “Y”), a test signal related to the start of a big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the accessory continuous operating device is operating) The signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5107), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table is executed (A5109).

  After that, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value (for example, 4, 16) corresponding to the round number upper limit information and saves it in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A5110). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5111).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepares it as an effect command (A5112), and executes an effect command setting process (A5113). ). After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A5114). A setting process is executed (A5115). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the round number upper limit value is prepared as an effect command (A5116), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5117).

  Next, the game control device 100 sends a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the special game variable display game and the special graphic variable display game to the outside of the RWM and the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number. Save in the information output data area (A5118). In the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Note that ON / OFF of the two jackpot signals and the three jackpot signals is determined by the winning prize opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is on when the jackpot with a ball is present (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), the jackpot without a ball (so-called sudden hit jack, etc.). When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is turned on when it is a big hit in the short time state, and is turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is turned on when a big hit with a ball is off and turned off when a big hit without a ball.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big winning fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponds to the winning opening information and the probability state of the winning result in the normal variation display game and the special variation display game. ) Is set (A5119), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (A5120). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (A5121). As a result, the information on the probability state of the special figure when the special result occurs, and the short-time state (general power support state) are stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening illegal number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) corresponding to the large winning opening information (A5122), and the large corresponding to the large winning opening information. A fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the winning opening (A5123). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5124), and the special figure display process is terminated. In other words, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 39 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special gaming state generating means for generating a state is provided.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A5106 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (A5125). When the small hit flag is a small hit (the result of A5125 is “Y”), a high probability variation number update process for updating the high probability variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the special figure high probability state is performed. Execute (A5126). Subsequently, an effect mode information check process related to the setting of the effect mode is executed (A5127), and whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the special probability (big hit) occurrence probability of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability state). It is determined whether or not (A5128).

  When the special control high probability is not in effect (the result of A5128 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the special display command from the special display command area, prepares it as a display command (A5129), and sets the display command. The process is executed (A5130). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5131), an effect command setting process is executed (A5132), and the process proceeds to step A5133.

  Further, the game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A5133 when the special figure high probability is in effect (the result of A5128 is “Y”). As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special figure has a high probability (in the probability variation state), the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is given to the player. In order not to be conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag saving area (A5133). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (A5134) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A5125 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a high probability variation number update process (A5135) and an effect mode information check process related to the setting of the effect mode ( A5136). Then, a switching preparation remaining rotation number (switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the effect mode number is set (A5137), and whether or not the effect remaining rotation number (effect remaining game number) matches the switching preparation remaining rotation number. Is determined (A5138). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.

  When the remaining effect rotation speed does not match the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (result of A5138 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” related to the special figure routine process as the process number (A5141).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 prepares an effect mode switching preparation command as an effect command (A5139) when the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switch preparation rotation speed (result of A5138 is “Y”). After the command setting process (A5140), “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (A5141). The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched (several games before). By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production across the modes.

  Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A5142), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A5143), and the special figure display in-process is terminated.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation number update process (A5126, A5135) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of high probability variation number update processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure has a high probability (during the probability variation state) (A5201). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A5201 is “N”), the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is in the special figure high probability (the result of A5201 is “Y”), the high probability variation count is updated by −1 (subtracted by 1) (A5202), and the high probability variation count is 0. It is determined whether or not (A5203). When the high probability variation number is not 0 (the result of A5203 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  When the number of times of high probability variation becomes 0 (the result of A5203 is “Y”), that is, when the high probability state ends in this special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 has a high probability notification flag. The area is cleared (A5204), and a signal related to the end of the high probability state (for example, two jackpot signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A5205).

  Next, the game control device 100 signals the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal Is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5206). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since the normal figure only changes the probability state, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off. After that, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (A5207), and the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (A5208).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & short timeless flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5209). Then, a signal related to the left hand instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5210), and the game state display number 2 area is turned off to turn off the first game state display unit 57. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A5211), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (A5127, A5136) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode information check process. The effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is other than the big hit (small hit or miss).

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5401). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5401 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  In addition, when the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of A5401 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 has an effect remaining rotation speed that is the number of times that the special figure variable display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed. Is updated by -1 (A5402), and it is determined whether the remaining number of rotations of the effect has become 0 (A5403). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (the result of A5403 is “N”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (the result of A5403 is “Y”), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5404). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (A5405).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A5406), and acquires the remaining effect rotation number (initial value) of the effect mode to be transferred. Then, it saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A5407), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5408). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (A5409), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5410). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (the result of A5410 is “Y”), that is, when the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

  If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (result of A5410 is “N”), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5411). ), Execution command setting processing is executed (A5412). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotational speed is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5414).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (A5417). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (the result of A5417 is “N”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If the mode is a left-handed mode (the result of A5417 is “Y”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5418), an effect command setting process is executed (A5419), and the effect mode The information check process ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (A5124) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process (A5501), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A5502).

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, one big hit signal is on (output with big hit + small hit) and four big hits are on (output with big hit)). Save in the output data area (A5503), signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state The signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A5504). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since the normal figure only changes the probability state, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (A5505), a number without time is saved in the game state display number area (A5506), and the normal game mode flag area is displayed. Save the usual low probability flag (A5507).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A5508), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The high probability notification flag area is cleared (A5509), and the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5510). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5511), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state The high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (A5512). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state (the ordinary power support state) are terminated.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (A5513), clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (A5514), and saves the no-update code in the next mode transition information area. (A5515). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5516), and the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5517), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the production mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special gaming state (big hit state).

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (A5134) in the special figure display mid-process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “7” relating to the small hit fanfare process as the process number (A5601), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the special game processing timer area (A5603), and turns on a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for the big hit) Is saved in the external information output data area (A5604), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area. (A5605).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the prize winning portion illegal winning number region (A5606), and saves the fraud monitoring out-of-period monitoring flag in the large winning mouth illegal monitoring period flag region (A5607). Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5608), and the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 57) is turned on. The right-handed state number is saved in the state display number 2 area (A5609), and the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is completed.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 updates the number of rounds (R) in the special gaming state by +1 (A5701), and prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state (big hit state) as an effect command (A5702). Then, an effect command setting process (A5703) is performed.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a special winning opening operation determination table (A5704), and acquires an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number (A5705). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (A5706). When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (the result of A5706 is “Y”), the large winning opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (A5707). When the number of rounds is less than or equal to the opening switching determination value (the result of A5706 is “N”), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening is saved in the special game processing timer area (A5708).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “4” related to the process for opening the big prize opening (A5709), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5710). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5711), and the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening is stored. The information in the mouth count number area is cleared (A5712). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5713), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as the big winning opening information indicating the big hit pattern, the big winning opening information 1 (4R: all short opening), the big winning opening information 2 (16R: all long opening), the big winning opening. Opening information 3 (16R: 1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), special prize opening information 4 (4R: all long open), big prize opening information 5 (16R: all long open), large Winning mouth opening information 6 (16R: 1 to 8R is long opening, 9 to 16R is short opening), big winning opening information 7 (16R: 1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening) is set. Yes.

  Accordingly, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are displayed. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special prize opening process (A2612) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process of the present embodiment.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM ( A5901). If it is not the final round (the result of A5901 is “N”), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (A5902), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (A5903). It is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (A5904).

  When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (the result of A5904 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) as the special game processing timer. The area is saved (A5905), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5907), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5910).

  When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value (the result of A5904 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special game processing timer area. (A5906), an interval command is prepared as an effect command (A5907), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5910).

  When the game control device 100 is in the final round (the result of A5901 is “Y”), the remaining ball processing time (for final use) (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A5908). An ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared as an effect command (A5909), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5910).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball process (A5911), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A5912). Thereafter, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5913), and the special winning opening opening process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (A2613) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the winning prize remaining ball processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM ( A6101).

  Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (result of A6101 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the big prize opening operation determination table (A6102) and corresponds to the big prize opening information. An open switching determination value to be acquired is acquired (A6103), and a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (A6104).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (A6105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (A6105) The result is “Y”), and the process proceeds to step A6109. If the number of rounds is less than or equal to the opening switching determination value (the result of A6105 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A6106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect in which a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues is executed, and that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. Specifically, the big prize opening information indicating the big hit pattern includes the big prize opening information 2 (16R: all long opening) and the big opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R are long opening, 5 to 16R are When one of “short open” is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round. If the big prize opening information is the big prize opening information 2, the round continuation informing effect is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened with the long opening in the rounds after the 5th round. If it is the big winning opening information 3, the round discontinuation notification is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is opened with a short opening in the rounds after the 5R.

  The game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A6109 when the special winning opening information is not the value of the rank down effect system (result of A6106 is “N”). If the winning prize opening information is a rank-down effect value (the result of A6106 is “Y”), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (A6107). If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A6109.

  Further, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “Y”), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the game control apparatus 100 has an interval time for rank-down effect (for example, 3. 6 seconds) is set (A6108), and the process proceeds to step A6109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 saves the interval time set in step A6104 or A6108 in the special game processing timer area (step A6109), and sets “3” which is the processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing. (A6110). Next, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A6111), and a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (for example, the signal for operating the special electric accessory 1 is turned off) is tested. The data is saved in the signal output data area (A6122), and the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (the result of A6101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the special-purpose game mode flag that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. The flag is loaded from the area (A6112), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening release information, and the stop symbol pattern is set (A6113), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is specified. The game is saved in the game process timer area (A6114).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 sets “6” as the process number related to the big hit end process (A6115), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6116). After that, the information on the number-of-winners count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (A6117), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (A6118). The information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the gaming state is cleared (A6119).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the information in the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds (A6120), and stores the big winning prize storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening. Clear the information in the mouth opening information area (A6121), and in the test signal output data area, signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is off) Save (A6122), and finish the winning ball remaining ball processing.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (A2614) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time reduction determination data includes time reduction operation data (A6201). When it is not the short-time operation data (result of A6201 is “N”), the big hit end setting process 1 is executed (A6202), and when it is the short-time operation data (result of A6201 is “Y”), the big hit end setting process 2 Is executed (A6203).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets an effect mode information address table (A6204), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (particularly A4009, A4109) at the start of fluctuation. (A6205), the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (big hit state) is acquired and saved (A6206).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the effect remaining rotation number (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6207), and the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The next mode transition information is acquired and saved (A6208).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command as an effect command in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A6210). ), Execution command setting processing is executed (A6211).

  Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the special gaming state (big hit state), the presence or absence of time reduction (general power support), and the production mode. As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in either “high probability / with time” or “high probability / without time”. In the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state is always obtained), so the probability information commands include “high probability / short time / effect mode A”, “high probability / short time / effect mode”. “B”, “High probability / with time reduction / direction mode C”, and “High probability / without time reduction / direction mode A”. Although not used in this process, there are “low probability / no time reduction / production mode A”, “low probability / no time reduction / production mode B”, and “low probability / no time reduction / production mode C”.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed as an effect command (A6212), and executes an effect command setting process (A6213). Then, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6215).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is a short time (general power support) after the end of the jackpot (A6216). When there is a short time (general power support) (the result of A6216 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A6219. When there is no time saving (normal power support) (result of A6216 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6217), an effect command setting process is executed (A6218), and the process of step A6219 is performed. Transition.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (A6219) and ends the jackpot end process.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6202) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the absence of the time-saving state (for example, two jackpot signals are turned off) in the external information output data area (A6301), and signals related to the start of the high-probability state and the absence of the time-shortening state (for example, Special symbol 1 high probability state signal on, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on, special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal off, special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal off, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal off OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302).

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (A6303), a low figure probability flag is saved in the usual game mode flag area (A6304), and a special figure is displayed in the special figure game mode flag area. Save high probability & no short time flag (A6305). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (A6306), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). In order to extinguish the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. .

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6203) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, two jackpot signals are turned on) in the external information output data area (A6401). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6402).

  Next, a number with a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (A6403), a common high probability flag is saved in the common game mode flag area (A6404), and a special figure is displayed in the special game mode flag area. Save the flag with high probability & short time (A6405). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (A6406), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2. The special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is executed in step A6219 in the jackpot end process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “0” as the process number related to the special figure routine process (A6501), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6502).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the big hit (for example, one signal for the big hit is OFF, three signals for the big hit are OFF, and four signals are OFF for the big hit) in the external information output data area (A6503). Signals related to termination (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous actuator operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A6504).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A6505), clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (A6506), and in the effect mode transition information area The information is cleared (A6507). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (A6508), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6509).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the RWM discharge ball count area to 0 (A6510), and saves the segment data of “00” display of the discharge ball count in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the discharge ball count display section 66. (A6511). Thus, the number of discharged balls can be displayed as “00” on the discharged ball number display section 66 when the big hit ends, via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11).

  In addition, the game control device 100 clears the RWM acquired ball number area to 0 (A6512), sets the segment color number area value to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A6513), 'Is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (for example, the red display area) (A6514). Note that segment areas that do not correspond to color numbers (for example, green display areas) are cleared to zero. As a result, through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11), the payout rate display unit 67 can display the output rate as “00” when the big hit ends. Thereafter, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

  In the big hit state (special game state), the number of acquired balls (that is, the payout rate) which is the sum of the number of winning balls per 100 discharged balls is very large. For this reason, at the end of the big hit state, the number of discharged balls (and thus the number of discharged balls) and the number of acquired balls (and thus the number of balls) are cleared to 0, and the number of balls acquired (that is, the number of balls played) is determined again. To start accurate measurement. Further, at the end of the big hit state, the discharge ball number display and the output rate display are reset to “00” display. However, since it is more accurate to measure the bonus rate continuously from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, the bonus-number-acquired ball number area (and thus the bonus rate) is not cleared to 0 even after the end of the big hit state. And the accessory ratio display is continuously displayed before and after the big hit without being reset.

  As described above, the processing of steps A6510 to A6514 is performed when the big hit ends (at the end of the big hit), the number of discharged balls, the number of balls to be played (the total number of winning balls), the number of balls to be discharged, and the number of balls to be displayed. Is configured to reset to an initial value (here, 0 or “00”).

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare processing (A2615) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit fanfare process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “8” for the small hitting process as the process number (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6702).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big prize opening in the small hit game in the special game processing timer area (A6703), and signals related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, The special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6704). Next, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the special variable prize winning device 39, on data for turning on the big prize opening solenoid 39b is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (A6705).

  After that, the game control device 100 clears the information of the big winning count count area storing the number of wins to the big winning opening (A6706), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) in the small hitting middle control pointer area. ) Is saved (A6707), and the small hitting fanfare processing is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, details of the middle hit process (A2616) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first loads the value of the control pointer during small hitting (A6801), and determines whether or not the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (eg, “6”) (A6802). . If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (result of A6802 is “N”), the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (A6803), and the small hitting operation transition setting process is executed (A6804). The hit processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting action end value (the result of A6802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special-purpose game mode flag save area (A6805). It is determined whether or not the flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure (A6806). Thereby, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In this case, it does not matter whether or not the time-short state is in effect.

  When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A6806 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “9” relating to the small hit remaining ball process as the process number (A6809). If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (the result of A6806 is “N”), the command on the small hit end screen is prepared as an effect command (A6807), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A6808), “9” relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (A6809).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6810). Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (A6811), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (A6812). The process ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting process (A6804) in the small hit middle process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting action transition setting process.

  The game control device 100 first executes a branch process according to the control pointer (the control pointer during small hits) (A6901). When the control pointer is 0, 2, or 4, the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special game processing timer area (A6902), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (A6903), the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the control pointer is 1, 3, or 5, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special game processing timer area (A6904), The ON data is saved in the mouth solenoid output data area (A6905), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the 300 msec small hit fanfare time, the 200 msec opening and the 1500 msec closing are alternately performed, and the small hitting control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. . Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hit midway control pointer is updated to 0, and the first 1500 msec closing is performed. At the end (that is, when switching from the first 1500 msec closing to the second 200 msec opening), the small hitting control pointer is updated to 1, and at the end of the second 200 msec opening, the small hitting control pointer is updated to 2. The small hitting control pointer is updated to 3 at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, the small hitting control pointer is updated to 4 at the end of the third 200 msec opening, and the small hit at the end of the third 1500 msec closing. The middle control pointer is updated to 5. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec release, the small hitting control pointer is updated to 6, and after the elapse of the 1900 msec small hitting remaining ball time and the subsequent 100 msec small hitting ending time, the small hitting state ends. Therefore, after the fourth 200 msec opening, it is closed for 2000 msec, so the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball process (A2617) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit remaining ball processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “10” for the small hit end process as the process number (A7201), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A7202).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A7203), and signals related to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7204). Next, the information of the big winning count number area is cleared (A7205), the information of the small hitting middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 is cleared) (A7206), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (A2618) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag saving area (A7301), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure (A7302). If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A7302 is “N”), the effect mode information address table is set (A7303) and set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set). The table address corresponding to the effect mode transition information is acquired (A7304).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A7305), acquires the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and stores it in the RAM. Is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (A7306), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and is saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A7307). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (A7308), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A7309). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (the result of A7309 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7319.

  In addition, when the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (the result of A7309 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sends the prepared probability information command to the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. (A7310), and the effect command setting process is executed (A7311). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A7312), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7313). Further, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared as an effect command (A7314), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7315).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (A7316), and when it is not a left-handed mode (the result of A7316 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A7319. To do. If the mode is left-handed (the result of A7316 is “Y”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A7317), and after performing the production command setting process (A7318), step The processing shifts to A7319.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A7319), and determines whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure short time (during the short time state) (A7320). If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (the result of A7320 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7323. In addition, when the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (result of A7320 is “N”), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( A7321) In order to turn off the right-handed display LED (the first game state display unit 57), the left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A7322), and the process proceeds to step A7323. To do.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets “0” for the special figure normal process as the process number (A7323), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7324). A signal relating to the end of a small hit (for example, one signal for big hit is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A7325), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, a special symbol one small hit signal is turned off) is a test signal. Save in the output data area (A7326).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the information in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A7327), clears the information in the effect mode transition information area (A7328), and clears the information in the special figure game mode flag save area. (A7329). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7330), and the small hit end processing is terminated.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. This effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the process executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7401). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7402).

  If the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7402 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7403).

  When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A7401.

  Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7404), and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7405). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7405 is “Y”), the process returns to step A7404.

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7405 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7406), and then sets an effect command. The process ends.

  As described above, the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, so that the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 60 shows a symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-described special symbol game process and a symbol variation control process in a later-described general game process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data for the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  The game control device 100 first checks and determines whether the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the normal diagram) is changing (A7501, A7502). In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

  The game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503) when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is changing (the result of A7502 is “Y”). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in Step A2619, Step A2621, and Step A7614.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by −1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and the updated blinking control timer is updated. If it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is “N”), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  If the flashing control timer after the update is 0 (the result of A7505 is “Y”), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target is changed. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506 is saved as a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer. This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the variation time in the collective display device 50.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the fluctuation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0, and the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0 (fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value-1). ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

  Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general power prize switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602). Details of the power receiving prize switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the usual game process timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become 0 (A7604).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the ordinary game process number. A general game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the usual game process number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the usual game process number (A7607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the normal map display game, sets the start of change of the base map display game, sets the effect, The usual figure usual process which performs the setting etc. of information required in order to perform the process during a usual figure change is performed (A7608). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A7609). Details of the process during normal map change will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current state of the time-variable display game is successful or not. The processing for displaying a normal map for setting the opening time, setting of information necessary for performing the processing for the normal map, etc. is executed (A7610). Details of the processing for displaying a normal map will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal drawing or to perform the remaining electric ball process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A7611). Details of the processing during the normal drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the general electric ball remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map (A7612). ). The details of the ordinary figure remaining sphere process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A7608). (A7613). The details of the end-of-game hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the normal game process timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes after step A7614.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the usual game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (A7702). The game state to be hit to the right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a short time state (general power support state). When the game state is a right-handed game (the result of A7702 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs a notification (warning) for instructing left-handed using the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 obtains the number of reserved drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). The game control apparatus 100, when the number of pending reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved drawings by +1 (A7706), and corresponds to the updated number of pending orders The address of the random number storage area per hit is calculated (A7707). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “N”), or the game control apparatus 100 determines that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal figure change display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. (A7801). If it is normal (the result of A7801 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). When there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is “Y”), the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated count of the general-purpose counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 6) (A7804). When the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is “Y”), the operation end value (for example, 4) is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (A7805).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the loaded pointer in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (A7805). Finally, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a public power winning that exceeds the upper limit during the normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal processing control pointer area at that time, and the normal variation winning device 37 is closed. So that the hit state of the usual figure ends in the middle.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting the normal map (the result of A7801 is “N”), when it is determined that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is “N”). ), Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (the result of A7804 is “N”), the general power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A7608) in the usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the routine of routine processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A7901). If the number of pending maps is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), “0” is set as the processing number for shifting to the routine processing of the usual diagram (A7921), and the processing number is set to the usual game processing. Save in the number area (A7922). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7923), and the normal processing is terminated.

  In addition, when the number of pending reservations is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads the winning random number from the random number storage area (for holding number 1) of the RWM, and the RWM The random symbol random number is loaded from the regular symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (A7902). Then, the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure and the symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a short time state (normal power support state) Is determined (A7904). The probability per ordinary figure during the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per ordinary figure during the low probability is 0/251.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251), which is a lower limit determination value during a normal map low probability, when the normal probability is not high (the result of A7904 is “N”) (A7905). If the normal probability is high (the result of A7904 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1), which is the lower limit determination value in the normal probability, is set (A7906). Transition to processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of ordinary figures and the low probability of ordinary figures. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “N”), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7908).

  When the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is “Y”), that is, in the case of a loss, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A7909). Further, the stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7910), the off symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

  When the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A7908 is “N”), that is, in the case of winning, the game control device 100 saves hit information in the hit flag area (A7912), The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7913), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol region (A7915), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data region (A7916), and shifts the random number storage region per universal symbol. (A7917) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A7918), the number of reserved drawings is updated by -1 (A7919).

  That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the normal-variation process transition setting process (A7920), and ends the normal chart normal process. In addition, the process transition setting process during normal map change will be described later.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a process transition setting process during normal map change. The normal change process transition setting process is executed in step A7920 in the normal figure normal process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the process number for shifting to the process for changing the usual figure (A8101), and saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A8102).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal time change time (for example, 500 msec) in the normal time game processing timer area (A8103). The normal map change time here is common between the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal map. A signal related to the start of the normal map change display game (normal signal 1 changing signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8104), and a changing flag indicating that the normal map change display game is changing is displayed. Save in the figure fluctuation control flag area (A8105). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the normal display, is saved in the normal flashing control timer area (A8106), and the initial value ( In this case, “0” indicating a blank symbol is saved (A8107), and thereafter, the process for setting the transition to the normal figure change process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (A7609) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during normal map change.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying a normal figure (A8301), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal time display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal time variable display game on the normal time display, in the normal time game processing timer area (A8303). .

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the normal change (normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the usual figure change display game is stopped is saved in the usual figure change control flag area (A8305), and the usual figure change process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for displaying a normal map (A7610) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map display process.

  First, the game control device 100 loads a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal processing (A8401), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A8402). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set for the loaded hit flag (A8403).

  When no hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the normal routine process (A8414). The process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A8415). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8416), and the normal display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the hit processing setting table (A8404), and corresponds to the normal figure stop symbol information. A hit start pointer value (in this case, 0, 2, or 4) is acquired and saved in the normal control pointer area per hit (A8405). Next, a time period for opening a normal telephone (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A8406). With the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open three times.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the process number for shifting to the middle game per process (A8407), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8408). Thereafter, a signal relating to the hit of the normal variation display game (ordinary signal per ordinary symbol is turned on) and a signal relating to the start of ordinary electric operation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A8409). Further, the ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the normal power solenoid (A8410).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the ordinary power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 (A8411), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period is obtained. The information stored in the area for the number of unauthorized power prizes to be stored is cleared (A8412). Finally, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8413), and the normal display processing is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal game hitting process (A7611) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal hit processing.

  First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal drawing (A8601), and the value of the loaded control pointer during the normal drawing is the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal drawing (the end of the hit). It is determined whether or not (A8602).

  When the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the upper limit value area of the control pointer during the normal map (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the control during the normal map. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Further, the ordinary power operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the process during the normal figure is terminated. The details of the ordinary power operation setting process will be described later.

  In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the normal figure reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A8602 is “Y”), Without executing the process for updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area in step A8603, the normal operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal process in normal map is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal map processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary power operation transition setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control apparatus 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A8701). If the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control blocking of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is blocked. The later wait time (for example, 200 msec) is saved in the usual game process timer area (A8702).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is any one of 1 and 3, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A8704 and controls the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that it corresponds to the control pointer. The normal power open time (for example, 1700 msec) that is the open time of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8704). Further, ON data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn ON the normal power solenoid 37c (A8705), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  Further, if the value of the control pointer is any one of 4, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8706 to end the release control of the normal variation winning device 37, and the ordinary power remaining ball processing (A7612) Is set as a process number (A8706), and the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A8707).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the ordinary power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the usual game processing timer area (A8708). Thereafter, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in order to set the general-purpose solenoid 37c to off (A8709), and the general-purpose operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (A7612) in the ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process number “5” related to the end process for the normal game (A8901), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8902). After that, the usual game ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the usual game process timer area (A8903).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the ordinary power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (A8905), and further, the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure is cleared (A8906). Thereafter, the ordinary electric power remaining ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (A7613) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the end-of-normal hit process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “0” related to the usual game routine process (A9101), and further saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A9102). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

  In addition, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation prize winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and thereafter the per-figure end processing. Exit.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  The game control device 100 first updates the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether it is the output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

  When it is the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the common figure hold number display table 1 (A9203), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”). Then, the general figure hold number display table 2 is set (A9204), the display data corresponding to the general figure hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the general figure hold indicator 56 (lamps D15 and D16) (A9205). If the number of holds is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both of the table hold number display tables 1 and 2, so the figure hold indicator 56 does not flash, but if the number of holds is 3 to 4, Since the display data in the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data in the general figure hold number display table 2 are different, the common figure hold display 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9206). When it is the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A 9207), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 hold is held The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display 54 (lamps D11 and D12) (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9210). When it is the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 is on hold. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (lamps D13 and D14) (A9213).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. And it saves in the segment area | region of the round display part 60 (A9215).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), etc. is defined ( A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display part (A9217).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61), that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A9301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (result of A9301 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 100 sets a magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. It is updated (A9302), and it is determined whether or not the timer has expired (A9303).

  The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (the result of A9303 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A9304), the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A9305).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command as an effect command (A9306), and prepares a magnet fraud occurrence flag indicating that a magnet fraud has occurred as a magnet fraud flag (A9307). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interruptions) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (the result of A9301 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected. (A9308). If the magnet fraud notification timer defining the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A9309). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A9310). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of A9303 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A9309.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9310 is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A9310 is “Y”), that is, the time has expired or has already expired, Is completed, or when the unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating the unauthorized magnet notification is prepared as an effect command (A9311).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (A9312), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag region (result of A9313 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region (A9314), and the production command is set. The process is executed (A9315). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121, that is, It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A9401). When the radio wave sensor is on (result of A9401 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A9402).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave fraud notification command as an effect command (A9403), and prepares a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag indicating that a board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9404). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A9401 is “N”), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 determines the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time. If it is not 0, -1 is updated (A9405). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A9406). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9406 is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (the result of A9406 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, When the notification is completed or when the unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating the unauthorized broadcast notification is prepared as an effect command (A9407). Further, a board radio wave fraud cancel flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9408), and it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A9409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A9409 is “N”), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A9411). Thereafter, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a procedure of external information editing processing. 75A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 75B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (A1305), the prize opening switch / status monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313), Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game hall internal management device, or a test firing test device, and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). When the body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is “N”), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information output data. Save in the area (A9504).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9501 is “Y”), or the body frame opening error is occurring (result of A9502 is “Y”), The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up). Judgment is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main process). The security signal control timer is counted from the RAM initialization time.

  When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the security data ON data in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the process of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). In addition, when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that a magnet fraud is occurring. If the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). If the board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio fraud is occurring.

  If the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the ordinary power fraud is occurring (A9513). When the power transmission fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the big prize winning fraud is occurring (A9514). It should be noted that if the illegal prize occurrence flag for the big prize opening is saved in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that the big prize opening fraud is occurring. If the winning prize fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9515).

  On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the fraud of the magnet is occurring (result of A9510 is “Y”), when the fraud of the board is occurring (result of A9511 is “Y”), the fraud of the frame is generated. Is in the middle (the result of A9512 is “Y”), the power transmission fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y”), or the prize winning fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is “ Y "), the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A9516), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (A9517). The security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) by setting the security signal on data.

  After steps A9515 and A9517, the game control apparatus 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9518). Details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later. Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the start port winning signal (A9519). Details of the start port signal editing process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0 (A9520). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9521). When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9521 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is output as external information output data. The area is saved (A9522), and the external information editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (the result of A9521 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 sends the on data of the symbol determination count signal to the external information. The output data area is saved (A9523), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A9518) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  First, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (A9601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0. (A9603).

  When the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A9603 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by −1 (A9604) and outputs the main prize ball signal output. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the control timer area (A9605).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9607), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. If the number of main prize ball signals output is 0 (the result of A9603 is “Y”), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9602 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A9606). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 msec).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (result of A9606 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of the RWM. Save to the data area (A9607). Further, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A9606 is “N”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A9608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (A9519) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port signal editing process. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  First, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

  When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9702 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the start port signal output count is 0 (A9703). If the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (the result of A9703 is “N”), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (A9704), and the start port signal output control is performed in the start port signal output control timer area. The timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved (A9705).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the start port signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9707), and ends the start port signal editing process.

  In addition, when the start port signal output count is 0 (the result of A9703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the external information output of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A9708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period. (A9706). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (result of A9706 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the ON data for setting the start port signal to the ON state in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9707), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (the result of A9706 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the RWM. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A9708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production | presentation control apparatus 300 performs with the program for production control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1003), and an interrupt is permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 and the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

  Subsequently, the effect control apparatus 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initial setting (B1002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, hall / player setting mode processing is executed to accept operations such as changes in the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystals (operations of operation means such as the production buttons 25) by players, game shop (hall) personnel, and the like. (B1010). In the hall / player setting mode, the player can customize the display and effects on the display device 41.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding or clearing effect points (B1011). For example, at the end of a game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game, the production points are added by performing the production or operation to which the production points are added. Can be displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B1012), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B1013). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates the various data in accordance with the content (effect) displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or sets the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The process is executed (B1014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation to the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1015).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is a frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is “N”), the process of B1016 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is “Y”), the display to the display device 41 is performed. The screen drawing is instructed (B1017). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice, the frame is switched. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1018).

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs or the like (B1019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1020). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute an accessory action effect.

  And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B1008, after finishing the process of B1020 mentioned above. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1020 is repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B1013) in the main process (FIG. 78) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the command reception number is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and the received command check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, the data is not overwritten.

  Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1 only) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command reading indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106). If the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N ]), The process from step B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception by always ensuring a free area without directly analyzing in the reception command buffer.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents in the analysis command area (B1107), and analyzes the received command to analyze the contents. The process is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to Fig. 80. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the process of step B1101 It is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is “N”), the processing from step B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 79) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control apparatus 300 first separates the received command as the MODE part and the lower byte as the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE section indicating the type of command. The Therefore, the upper and lower orders of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE portion indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE portion is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION portion is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the contents of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (value assigned as the command specification indicating the contents). If the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and includes variation commands (A4608 and A4609). If the MODE portion represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the big hit command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to the effect during the jackpot (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.). For example, a fanfare command (A5116), a round command (A5702), an interval command (A5907), An ending command (A5909) or the like. If the MODE portion represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the jackpot command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the big hit command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the design command range (B1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include decorative special symbol commands (A4018, A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE portion represents a single command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  The effect control device 300 includes a command related to the number of balls to be discharged (A2323 in FIG. 18), a command (A2308 in FIG. 18) corresponding to the payout rate (number of acquired balls), and a command (A A2317) in FIG. 18 may be received as an effect command (single-shot command), and display setting processing for displaying the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be performed in the single-shot command processing. The production control device 300 may back up (store) the number of balls to be discharged, the ball payout rate, and the accessory ratio in the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even during a power failure.

  In addition, in the single-shot command processing, the effect control device 300 executes, for example, the following processing. When the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command, a RAM initialization setting process for performing RAM initialization notification or the like is executed. When the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command or a customer waiting demo command, the power failure recovery setting processing for power failure recovery or the customer waiting demo setting processing for displaying the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like is executed. . When the MODE unit represents a special figure 1 hold number command or a special figure 2 hold number command, a special figure 1 hold information setting process or a special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed. When the MODE part represents a probability information command, a probability information setting process is executed. When the MODE unit represents an error / unauthorized command, an error / unauthorized setting process for performing an error / unauthorized notification or a notification release is executed. Examples of error / unauthorized commands include a fraud occurrence command (A2108), a fraud cancel command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). When the MODE section represents a command for effect mode switching, an effect mode switching setting process is executed.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a single command (the result of B1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (B1213). . The pre-read symbol commands include the above-mentioned pre-read symbol command (A3014). If the MODE portion represents a pre-read symbol system command (result of B1213 is “Y”), the pre-read symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the prefetched symbol system command (the result of B1213 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the prefetched variation command (B1215). ). The prefetch fluctuation command includes the above-described prefetch fluctuation pattern command (A3018). If the MODE portion represents a prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1215 is “N”), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is terminated.

[Display screen layout example]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a layout example of a display screen (display unit) of the display device 41.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a discharged ball number display unit 691 for displaying the number of discharged balls, a payout rate display unit 692 for displaying a payout rate, and an accessory ratio display unit 693 for displaying an accessory ratio. . In FIG. 81, 57, 36, and 59.3 are displayed as the number of balls to be discharged, the rate of appearance, and the ratio of bonuses, respectively.

  In addition, since even if it always displays on the display screen of the display device 41, the number of balls to be discharged, the amount of balls to be played, and the ratio of objects is in the way, for example, an error message (glass frame opening error, In addition to the display of the front frame opening error), the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be displayed.

  In addition, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010) for accepting operations by players, etc., the player can select whether to display / hide the number of balls to be discharged, the rate of play, and the ratio of bonuses, or the number of balls to be discharged It may be possible to select whether to display a payout rate or an accessory ratio. Further, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the number of discharged balls may be selected to be displayed on the display device 41 as a count-down display or a count-up display according to selection by the player or the like. The selection may be performed by displaying the menu on the display device 41 and operating the operation means such as the effect button 25 by the player.

  Furthermore, during the customer waiting demonstration, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio on the display device 41 may be hidden. In addition, during the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, the latest (latest) number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses may be displayed. In this case, the display size is only displayed during the customer waiting demonstration. If it is larger than the other cases, it can appeal to visitors of non-game amusement stores.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), the first special symbol in the left area 610a, the second special symbol in the right area 610b, In the middle region 610c, the third special symbol is variably displayed (in FIG. 81, the stop symbol is displayed). In addition, although the discharge ball number display part 691, the appearance rate display part 692, and the accessory ratio display part 693 are provided above the fluctuation display area 610, it is not limited to this.

  In addition, the number of discharged balls, the play rate, and the ratio of the accessory may be hidden or the display size may be reduced when disturbing the display of the change in the change display area 610 or other effects on the display device 41. It may be displayed only when the variable display is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed, or the display size may be increased.

  Similarly, in the plurality of variable display areas 615 at the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, three decorative reduced symbols (special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbols) are displayed in a variable manner. When a movie-type reach effect or the like is performed in the center of the display screen, the decorative reduced symbol may be displayed in a variable manner in the variable display area 615. In the variable display area 615, the decorative reduced symbols may be displayed in a variable manner at all times. The fluctuation display area 615 is commonly used in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The large decorative special symbol of the variable display area 610 and the small special symbol of the variable display area 615 may be similar or completely different.

  The hold display 633 (start-up storage display) displayed on the hold display unit 630 (start-up storage display unit) is based on the special figure 1 hold information set from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command and the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. Based on the set special figure 2 hold information, the screen is drawn (B1014-B1017). The hold display 633 indicates a hold (start-up memory) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. As the hold display 633, the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display are arranged and displayed on the hold display unit 630 in a winning order (holding occurrence order).

  On the hold display section 630, a spherical (circular) hold display 633 is displayed in a manner in which the left display is arranged in a tilted ridge 635 with the left side lowered. Further, a hold correspondence display 633a (pending display during change) corresponding to a hold (holding during digestion) related to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 simulating the frame of the globe (frame). As the earth inside). The hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 moves from the left side of the basket 635 to the hold digestion area 640 every time the special figure variation display game is started.

  Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 for displaying the special figure 1 hold number in numbers, and a special figure 2 hold number display for displaying the special figure 2 hold numbers in numbers. A portion 660 is provided.

  A navigation character 670 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the display device 41. The navigation character 670 is normally arranged so as to be adjacent to and adjacent to the hold correspondence display 633a (holding digestion region 640) indicating the suspension during digestion. The navigation character 670 includes a character name display portion 670b and a meter display section in addition to the main body 670a. In addition, a line (a line notice may be used) that is displayed so that the navigation character 670 emits is displayed on the line display unit 680 in association with the navigation character 670. Note that the lines may be output as audio as well as displayed. In addition, the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses may be displayed according to the operation of the Navi character 670 on the screen (the number of balls to be thrown, the rate of balls to be played, and the ratio of characters to be played) To produce a display effect).

[Operations and effects of the first embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the payout control means (the payout control device 200, etc.) is configured such that the game ball is a winning area (general winning port 35 or start winning port 36) or a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning award). When winning the device 39), it is possible to pay out the number of winning balls determined for the winning area and the variable winning device. The display means (the combination ratio display unit 68, the display device 41, etc.) is the ratio of the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the variable prize device out of the total number of prize balls that are paid out (the role Property ratio) can be displayed. Accordingly, the interest of the game is improved, and the player has an impression that the player can easily win the variable winning device (an impression that many open states are generated), which is a motivation (indicator) for the player to continue playing the game.

  The counting means (the game control device 100 or the like that executes the processes of steps A2015 and A2210) is the number of discharged balls that are the number of game balls discharged from the game area, or the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area. Count the number of shot balls. The display means (the payout rate display unit 67, the display device 41, etc.) can display the total ratio (the payout rate) of the number of winning balls obtained by winning with respect to the number of discharged balls or the number of shot balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have interest and interest in the general winning opening 35. And the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  When the gaming machine is waiting for a customer, the display means (discharged ball number display unit 66, output rate display unit 67, accessory ratio display unit 68, display device 41, etc.) The accessory ratio may be hidden. That is, only when the gaming machine is not in the waiting state for the customer, the display means may display the number of balls to be discharged, the ball payout rate, and the accessory ratio. This is a privilege for a player who is playing a game, and can increase the operation of the gaming machine 10.

  Each time the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the display means (the payout rate display unit 67, the display device 41, etc.) totals the number of prize balls obtained by the predetermined number of game balls. Can be displayed. Therefore, the payout rate can be simply displayed as the total number of prize balls. In addition, the player can be interested in the general winning opening 35 and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The calculation means (game control device 100 or the like that executes a prize opening switch / status monitoring process), when there is a prize in any one of a plurality of prize areas and variable prize machines at a predetermined number of times, Based on the priority order determined for the area and the variable winning device, the number of prize balls obtained by winning one of the plurality of prizes is added to calculate the total number of prize balls. Therefore, in particular, in the normal game state and the special game state other than the general electric power support state, the total of the number of winning balls as much as possible (the play rate) at the timing when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. ) And the player's sense of expectation for the game can be improved.

  The calculation means (game control device 100 or the like that executes the prize opening switch / status monitoring process) is the target winning area to which the number of prize balls is added depending on whether or not a specific gaming status (general power support status) has occurred. The priority order of each winning area or variable winning device can be changed. Therefore, in the specific gaming state (the general power support state), since there are many winnings to the normal variation winning device 37, the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 is preferentially adopted, and the total number of winning balls can be calculated.

  The reset means (such as the game control device 100 that executes the processing of steps A6510 to A6514) can reset the total number of winning balls (the play rate) and set it to the initial value when the special game state ends. . In the big hit state (special game state), the total number of winning balls is very large, but after the big hit state is finished, accurate measurement of the total number of winning balls (outtake rate) can be started. In addition, the reset means is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable prize winning device out of the total number of prize balls paid out at the end of the special gaming state (property ratio) Does not reset and remains as it is. Thereby, regardless of the big hit state (special game state), the accessory ratio can be accurately measured.

  The game information output means (such as the game control device 100 that executes the output process) can output information related to the total number of winning balls (outtake rate) and information related to the bonus rate to an external device. Therefore, whether there is a discrepancy between the total number of winning balls (outgoing rate) output to an external device such as a test firing test device and the total number of winning balls (outgoing rate) determined by an external device I can confirm.

  When the monitoring means (game control device 100 or the like that executes a winning opening switch / status monitoring process) monitors and monitors each winning area and winning to the variable winning device in the descending order of the number of winning balls obtained. If there is a win, the total number of winning balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls. Therefore, the largest possible number of winning balls (race rate) is preferentially obtained, and the player's expectation on the game can be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. In the second embodiment, display control is executed by the payout control device 200 in addition to the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 for which display control is executed by the game control device 100. A discharge ball number display portion 851, a payout rate display portion 852, and an accessory ratio display portion 853 are provided. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are provided in the collective display device 50 on the front surface of the gaming machine 10, as in the first embodiment. The discharged ball number display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the accessory ratio display portion 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the discharged ball number display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 that are display-controlled by the payout control device 200 may be provided in the upper dish unit. As described above, when the discharged ball number display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the accessory ratio display portion 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 or the upper plate unit, the game board 30 is exchanged with another game board. However, it can continue to be used without being discarded, leading to cost reduction.

  In addition, the number of discharged balls display portion 851, the number of appearance balls rate display portion 852, and the ratio of accessory items display portion 853 are the same as the number of balls of discharge ball display portion 66, the number of balls output display portion 67, and the amount of accessory ratio display portion 68 It is composed of (two or three) 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point portion) display (LED lamp, display device).

  FIG. 82 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10. On the back surface of the game board 30, a game control device 100 (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner via the switch base 738 is disposed, and the game control device 100 is provided via the control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 is provided for controlling the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command transmitted from. A protective cover 737 that covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper back surface of the game control device 100 is provided behind the effect control device 300. In a state where the gaming board 30 configured as described above is housed in the housing portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 disposed on the back surface of the gaming board 30 protrude rearward of the front frame 12. To do.

  A storage unit 750 that stores game balls replenished from a replenishing device (not shown) provided in the island facility and arranges and flows down the stored game balls is disposed on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12. . A payout unit 790 for paying out the game balls flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12.

  In addition, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the game control device 100 and a game ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24 are provided at the lower back of the front frame 12. A ball launching device 742 that launches, a connection terminal 743 that connects to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices are arranged.

  A discharge ball number display unit 851, a payout rate display unit 852, and an accessory ratio display unit 853 are arranged on the rear surface (rear surface) of the payout control device 200 (payout control board). Unlike the display unit 67 and the accessory ratio display unit 68, the display unit 67 can be viewed only from the back side of the gaming machine 10. The discharged ball number display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the accessory ratio display portion 853 are not visible to a general player, and are visible only to the related parties (employees, etc.) of the game store. Note that the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are visible only from the front side of the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, when it is not desired to show a general player the display of the number of discharged balls, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses, the number of balls to be displayed 66 on the front of the gaming machine 10, the yield rate display portion 67, The ratio display unit 68 can be omitted. In this case, only from the back side of the gaming machine 10, the display of the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of the items to be picked up is confirmed by the discharged ball number display unit 851, the output rate display unit 852 and the accessory ratio display unit 853 it can.

  Further, the payout control device 200 calculates the number of discharged balls, the payout rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls), and the ratio of the bonuses based on the payout command, and the discharge provided in the payout control device 200. Display control to be displayed on the ball number display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 is performed. Note that the payout command here includes both a payout command (A1719) and an out-ball detection command (A2017) in units of one winning in the winning opening (winning area). In addition, the payout control device 200 receives the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio calculated by the game control device 100, and the discharged ball number display unit 851 provided in the payout control device 200 displays the payout rate display. The structure displayed on the part 852 and the accessory ratio display part 853 is also possible.

  The payout control device 200 is composed of a memory such as a CPU (microcomputer) and a RAM, and, like the game control device 100, is a discharged ball number area for storing the number of discharged balls, and the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (award) The acquired ball number area for storing the total number of balls) and the earned ball number area for each accessory for storing the earned ball number for each accessory (see FIG. 17B). The calculation method of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of winning balls), and the ratio of bonuses is the same as in the first embodiment. The out ball detection command is used to update the number of discharged balls by one.

  FIG. 83 shows a configuration example of the payout command (payout number command). The payout command is composed of 1 byte (8 bits). In the payout command, the most significant bit (first bit) is an out ball flag indicating that a ball has been entered into the out port 30b, and the second to fourth bits have been awarded to the winning port. In this case, winning hole information for specifying the winning hole is indicated, and the fifth to eighth bits indicate the number of winning balls as it is. As for the winning opening information of the second bit to the fourth bit, “001” is the general winning opening 35, “010” is the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36), and “011” is the normal variation winning apparatus 37 (starting opening). 2), “100” indicates a big winning opening (winning during a big hit), and “101” indicates a big winning opening (winning other than during a big hit such as a small hit). When the out ball flag is set to 1 (on), that is, when there is a ball entering the out port 30b, the number of prize balls is zero. As in the first embodiment, the total number of winning balls is stored in the acquired number of balls area, and the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is stored in the acquired number of balls by function as the number of acquired balls by function. The

  For example, when the payout command is expressed in hexadecimal, 10 winning balls for winning the general winning opening 35 are “1AH”, and 3 winning balls for winning the starting slot 1 are “23H”. Two prize balls for winning 2 are "32H", 14 prize balls for winning the big prize (big hit) are "4EH", 14 prize balls for winning the big prize ( The “small hit” is “5EH”, and the notification (out ball detection command) by the out ball detection is “80H”.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
In said 2nd Embodiment, while there exist an effect similar to 1st Embodiment, the number-of-balls display part 851 arrange | positioned at the rear surface (back surface) of the payout control apparatus 200, the payout rate display part 852, and an accessory By the ratio display portion 853, the number of balls to be ejected, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses can be visually recognized even from the back side of the gaming machine 10.

[Other Modifications of First Embodiment and Second Embodiment]
An embodiment obtained by modifying the first embodiment and the second embodiment as follows is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the number-of-balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 controlled by the game control device 100 are not on the front surface of the gaming machine 10 but on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. It may be arranged. In FIG. 84, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are provided on the rear surface (rear surface) of the game control device 100 provided on the rear surface of the gaming machine 10. It is visible only from the back side. In this case, the number-of-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 can be shown only to the related parties (employees, etc.) of the amusement store without showing them to the general player. . In addition, if the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are arranged on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, there is a possibility that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 is not impaired for general players. is there. In addition, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are installed on the board (main board) of the game control device 100. Since the board (main board) of the game control device 100 is sealed so that it cannot be opened in the case (because it is crimped), the number-of-balls display section 66, the output rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section It is not possible to cheat on the display of 68.

  The number of balls to be ejected, the rate of appearance, and the ratio of items are displayed on the collective display device 50 on the front surface of the gaming machine 10 (the number of balls to be displayed 66, the output rate display portion 67, and the item ratio display 68). 1 of the display devices 41, not all of the display units provided on the payout control device 200 on the back side of the gaming machine 10 (the number of discharged balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, the accessory ratio display unit 853). One or only two may be displayed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one is displayed without displaying all of the number of balls to be discharged, a payout rate, and an accessory ratio. That is, any one of the discharged ball number display unit 66, the output ball rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is omitted, or the discharged ball number display unit 851, the output ball rate display unit 852, and the accessory rate display unit 853. Any of these may be omitted. In addition, the number of 7-segment type indicators (LED lamps) is increased, and as the accessory ratio display unit 68, a first display unit that displays a continuous accessory ratio, and a commonly used so-called accessory ratio ( It is also possible to provide a second display unit that displays the ratio of all the combinations), and to display both the continuous combination ratio and the so-called combination ratio (total combination ratio) at the same time. In addition, when the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) (A1016) is pressed and turned on, the combination display unit 853 can alternately switch the display of all the combination ratios and the continuous combination ratio. .

  In addition, a common indicator in which four 7-segment indicators are arranged in the horizontal direction without separately providing the discharge ball number display unit 66, the yield rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which only one is provided and the number of balls to be discharged, the rate at which the balls are played, and the percentage of items to be displayed. In such a common display, each time the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) is turned on, any one of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio is sequentially switched. In this case, the common indicator displays any one of the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses together with an identification symbol (such as an alphabet) indicating what is being displayed. For example, the number of discharged balls is displayed as “h55”, the payout rate is “d30”, the ratio of all winnings is “y50.8”, and the ratio of consecutive winnings is “r58.4”.

  In addition, the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses are held as information in the microcomputer (CPU) of the game control device 100 or the payout control device 200 of the gaming machine 10, and the display unit or display of the gaming machine 10 is displayed. The device 41 does not display the number of balls to be discharged, the rate at which the ball is played, and the ratio of the objects. (Of course, the number of balls to be ejected, the amount of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses may be output to an external device while being displayed on the display unit or display device 41 of the gaming machine 10).

  Further, as in the first and second embodiments, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the bonus rate are determined by the user program in the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300. In addition to the calculation, the CPU of the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 is provided with a calculation function (hardware calculation function), and a parameter is set in the internal register ( It is also possible to automatically calculate the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses by, for example, setting the information every time a game ball is fired (discharged) or winning is detected. Then, the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the production control device 300 sends an external device (such as the inspection device 500) with the number of discharged balls calculated by a hardware calculation function (calculation means). You may output a rate and an accessory ratio.

  As a privilege when the total number of balls discharged from power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5000) or when the number of executions of the variable display game since power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100) It is good also as a structure which displays a payout rate and an accessory ratio. In this way, there is a possibility that the operation of the gaming machine will increase immediately after the opening of the amusement store, etc., and it is possible to display an accurate bonus rate.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the accessory ratio is calculated with respect to the number of award balls (the total number of prize balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present time. It may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls acquired in a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) special figure variation display game. For example, the predetermined period is a period related to one jackpot (from the normal gaming state before the jackpot to the end of the jackpot), or a period related to one consecutive Chang (Ranso) (from the normal gaming state before the jackpot). -Time saving (until the electric support is completely completed), and the accessory ratio may be calculated separately for each predetermined period.

  The production control device 300 receives the payout command (A1719) and the out ball detection command (A2017), and calculates the number of discharged balls, the number of balls to be played (the total of the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls), and the ratio of bonuses. May be. In this case, the production control device 300 may back up (store) the calculation results of the number of balls to be discharged, the ball payout rate, and the accessory ratio in the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even during a power failure. If it does in this way, after a power failure restoration (after power-on), the number of discharged balls, a payout rate, and an accessory ratio can be displayed on the display device 41 immediately. Also, in this case, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the effect control device 300 is selected by switching the calculation method of the ratio of the actors to be displayed on the display device 41 by selection by the player or the like. According to the calculation method, the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed on the display device 41. As described above, the method for calculating the ratio of the prizes is only the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained as a result of winning the prize money during the big hit state with respect to the total number of prize balls. However, it differs depending on whether or not to include the percentage (%) of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the big winning opening in the small hit state.

  In addition, the number of acquired balls (the number of paid-out prize balls) is one set (one unit), and the number of acquired balls (the number of acquired bonus balls) for each set and the number of acquired balls for a winning opening other than the bonus A configuration is possible in which (the number of winning prize winning balls) is stored in a ring buffer and used for calculation of an accessory ratio, a payout ratio and the like. The prizes here are a special variable prize winning device 39 (large prize winning opening) and a normal variable winning prize winning device 37 (second starting prize winning opening). (First start winning opening). The ring buffer is not cleared to prevent fraud, and always accumulates the number of acquired balls regardless of the time and the number of special figure variation display games. Depending on the number of winning balls acquired and the number of winning winning balls stored in the ring buffer, it is possible to flexibly calculate the winning component ratio, the payout rate, etc. for each predetermined period or for each predetermined winning ball (paid winning ball).

  As a storage form, both the number of winning balls and the number of winning ball winning balls may be stored in a ring buffer in a set (block) of 2 bytes in total, for example, 1 byte each. In addition, if one of the number of winning points and the number of winning points is subtracted from 100, the other can be calculated. Therefore, only one of the winning points and winning points is saved in the ring buffer. Good. Further, as the number of winning characters acquired and the number of winning balls acquired, the number of acquired balls for each winning item (see winning port) (see FIG. 17B) may be stored in the ring buffer.

  The ring buffer may be provided in a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory mounted on any of the game control apparatus 100 (main board), the payout control apparatus 200 (payout board), and the effect control apparatus 300 (sub board). This eliminates the need for special backup of the number of winning characters and the number of winning points. The size of the ring buffer is, for example, 600 sets. Assuming that the number of balls launched per minute of the ball launcher is about 100 and the payout rate is 100%, there will be 100 (1 set) prize balls paid out per minute. It is possible to save the number of acquired balls for about 10 hours.

  If there is a free space in the ring buffer, this fact may be notified. The display device 41 for performance may give a notification indicating that there is an empty ring buffer on the screen. This notification may be performed only during the game (other than the customer waiting state), the customer waiting state, or the hall setting mode. In addition, a dedicated LED may be provided in the collective display device 50, the game control device 100, or the like to perform notification by lighting or blinking. Instead of providing a dedicated LED, the existing LED may be notified in a lighting manner (color or blinking) different from normal. Free information indicating that there is space in the ring buffer may be transmitted as a test fire test signal or an external information signal and displayed on the test fire test device or external device to notify that there is space in the ring buffer. In addition, notification may be performed by the sound of the upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 99. Note that configurations other than those described below can apply configurations common to the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and / or the short-time end timing, the display device 41 displays the ratio of all the objects (the ratio of all the objects (so-called object ratio) and the continuous object ratio). Is done. In addition, the bonus ratio information regarding the special game (the value measured by resetting at the end of each special game) divided into special games (big jackpots) consisting of a predetermined number of round games is stored in the bonus ratio information. It can be displayed on the display device 41 by including it in the jackpot history information.

[Tad performance monitoring process of the third embodiment]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment. The payout performance monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process (FIG. 17A). Note that the steps having the same contents as the ball performance monitoring process in FIG. 18 have the same step numbers and will not be described.

  In step A2313, the game control device 100 calculates the total value (total number of winning balls) of the value of the number of acquired balls for each role shown in FIG. Load from the number-of-acquisition-based acquired ball number area (A9801). Here, the number of winning balls for each role is the total number of winning balls for winning the big winning opening during the big hit, the total number of winning balls for winning the big winning opening during the small hit (other than during the big hit), normal This is the total number of winning balls by winning a prize winning device 37 (start opening 2).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates (a 9802) as an accessory ratio (number of winning characters / total value) × 100 (%) based on the number of winning characters. Here, the ratio of so-called consecutive actors (ratio of the number of winning balls (%) obtained by winning a winning prize in the big hit state) and the so-called accessory ratio generally used Both (the ratio of all winnings: the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big prize opening and the normal variable prize winning device 37) are calculated. When calculating the consecutive character ratio, the total number of winning balls won by winning the big winning opening during the big hit is used as the number of winning balls. When calculating the ratio of all winnings, the total number of winning balls for winning the winning prize during the big hit, the prize for winning the winning prize in the middle (except during the big hit) The sum (total) of the total number of balls and the total number of award balls obtained by winning in the normal variation winning device 37 (starting port 2) is used. It should be noted that here, in addition to the consecutive character ratio and the total character ratio, the prize winning ratio (the award obtained by winning the big prize winning slot during the big hit state and the small hit state out of the total number of winning balls) The ratio of other actors such as the ratio of the number of balls) may be calculated.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 displays segment data corresponding to one calculation result in order to display the calculation result of one of the calculation results of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the character ratio display unit 68. Then, it is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the accessory ratio display section 68 (A9803).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit end timing (A9804). Here, the jackpot end timing can be variously set as long as it can be recognized that the jackpot state (special game state) has ended. For example, the big hit end timing is determined to be the final round in the winning ball remaining ball processing (FIG. 49) when the remaining ball processing time (for final use) has elapsed (A5908) (the result of A6101 is “Y”) ), The timing at which the processing of steps A6112 to A6122 is executed (at the start of ending). The jackpot end timing may be during ending or at the end of the ending, that is, when the ending time (A6114) has elapsed.

  When the game control device 100 is currently in the big hit end timing (the result of A 9804 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the calculation result (A 9802) of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio as an effect command ( A2317), the effect command setting process is executed (A2318).

  As a result, at the timing when the special gaming state ends (big hit end timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (so-called character ratio) on the display device 41. In addition, during the special game state (big win state), the continuous bonus rate and the total bonus rate change more greatly than the normal game status due to the opening of the special variable prize device 39 (big prize opening). Even if the ratio is displayed, the player is only confused and wasteful. Therefore, the continuous combination ratio and the total combination ratio are displayed at the big hit end timing immediately after the large change.

  If it is not the big hit end timing (the result of A9804 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether it is currently the high probability end timing or the short time end timing (A9805). Here, the high-probability end timing or the short-time end timing (specific game state end timing) can be variously set as long as it can be recognized that the high-probability state or the short-time state (general power support state) has ended. When the big hit ends as in the first embodiment, the probability variation state is always obtained (so-called ST state is always satisfied), and the high probability end timing and the short time end timing are the same timing. 0 (the result of A5203 is “Y”), which is the timing when the processing from step A5204 to A5211 is executed. Unlike the first embodiment, a model having a low-probability time-short state (general power support state) has a short-time end timing different from the high-probability end timing.

  When the game control device 100 is currently at the high probability end timing or the short time end timing (the result of A 9805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a command corresponding to the calculation result (A 9802) of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio. A command is prepared (A2317), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2318).

  As a result, at the timing when the specific gaming state ends (high probability end timing or short time end timing), the production control device 300 can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (so-called character ratio) on the display device 41. . It should be noted that, during the specific gaming state, the change in the consecutive character ratio and the total character ratio becomes larger than that in the normal gaming state due to the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting prize opening) by the ordinary electric power support. Even if the ratio is displayed, the player is only confused and wasteful. Therefore, the continuous combination ratio and the total combination ratio are displayed at the specific game state end timing immediately after the change.

  If the game control apparatus 100 is not currently at the high probability end timing or the short time end timing (the result of A9805 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to step A2319 without executing the processing of step A2317 and step A2318.

  With the above process, when the payout performance monitoring process is executed (when a prize is generated), the consecutive character ratio and the total character ratio are always calculated, the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and The production control device 300 can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the display device 41 at the time-short end timing (timing immediately after the character ratio changes significantly). In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the continuous character ratio and all the character ratios are displayed on the display apparatus 41 only in any one of the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short time end timing.

  When the jackpot end setting process 1 (FIG. 51) is executed, a latent probability change state with a high probability and no time reduction (no support for ordinary electric power) is entered, but after the big hit is finished, the latent probability change state is entered and a special number fluctuation display is displayed a predetermined number of times. When the game is executed, a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the consecutive character ratio and the total character ratio is prepared as an effect command (A2317), and the effect command setting process may be executed ( A2318).

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the appearance performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment.

  In FIG. 86, the order of steps A9804, A9805, and steps A2313, A9801-A9803 has been switched, and the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are changed only at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short-time end timing. Calculation (A9802), a command corresponding to the calculation result is prepared as an effect command (A2317), and an effect command setting process is executed. In FIG. 86, when the ball performance monitoring process is executed, the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are not always calculated, and the calculation load is reduced.

  As described above, at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short-time end timing (timing immediately after the major component ratio has changed significantly), the continuous feature ratio and the total bonus ratio are calculated, and the production control device 300 Can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the display device 41. It should be noted that it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are calculated and displayed on the display device 41 only at any one of the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short time end timing.

[Third embodiment special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 according to the third embodiment. The special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is executed by the game control device 100 in step A6219 of the big hit end process (FIG. 50). Note that the steps having the same contents as those in the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 in FIG.

  At the end of the big hit, in steps A6510 to A6514, the game control device 100 clears (resets) the discharged ball number area and the acquired ball number area to 0, and initially displays the display of the discharged ball number and the payout rate (“00 )).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears (resets) all the number-of-acquisition balls by region (A6515), and displays the segment data of the initial display “00.0” of the component ratio as the component ratio display unit 68. Is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment (A6516). As a result, through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11), the accessory ratio can be displayed as “00.0” on the accessory ratio display unit 68 when the big hit ends.

  In addition, every special game (big hit) is completed, all the earned ball number area for each role is cleared to 0, so each earned ball number area for each role is set at the end of the last special game (the first special game) Before the end, the number of prize balls from when the gaming machine 10 is turned on is stored. Accordingly, the ratio of the actors calculated at step A9802 (continuous actor ratio and all the actor ratios) and the ratio of actors (continuous actor ratio and all the actors ratio) transmitted to the production control device 300 at step A2318 are determined. Then, the ratio of the bonuses determined for each special game consisting of round games of a predetermined number of rounds (the bonus rate measured after resetting for each special game). That is, the ratio of the bonuses divided for each special game (big hit) is from the end of one special game (before the first special game ends from the time of turning on the gaming machine 10), and at the end of the next special game. Alternatively, it is an accessory ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls in the period until the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or short time state).

  Regulations and the like require that the ratio of the constituents (the ratio of the continuous constituents and the ratio of all the constituents) be below the standard value (for example, the continuous constituent ratio is 60% and the total constituent ratio is 70%). The ratio of the bonus to the number of prize balls in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present is not stable unless the operating time of the gaming machine 10 is increased. For example, if a special game (big hit) occurs during a short operating time and the bonus rate exceeds the reference value, the player will be told that the bonus rate for the total number of prizes shows an abnormal value. May be misjudged.

  On the other hand, it is known in advance that the ratio of the bonuses divided for each special game is an unstable value and can be a value far from the reference value. Therefore, by calculating, from the beginning, the proportions for each special game, rather than the proportions for the entire period, and displaying them on the display device 41, the player or the like can obtain his own value other than the reference value. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the ratio of the accessory is an abnormal value on the basis of the knowledge and information, and erroneous determination is reduced.

  Similarly to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the special control routine process transition setting process 2 (without steps A6515 and A6516) of FIG. It is good also as a structure which calculates an accessory ratio with respect to the number of prize balls (acquired number of balls) in the whole period from throwing in to the present. In addition, in the RWM, an area for accumulating and storing the number of winning balls in each of the winning balls for each bonus is provided corresponding to each of the winning balls for each of the bonuses. It is good also as a structure which calculates the bonus ratio with respect to the number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls) in the whole period from the power-on of the machine 10 to the present together with the bonus ratio divided for each special game (big hit).

[Single command processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment. The single-shot command process is executed by the effect control apparatus 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80).

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE portion represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “Y”), a RAM initialization setting process for informing the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the single command processing is performed. finish.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). If the MODE unit represents a command for restoration from a power failure (the result of B1305 is “Y”), a power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “Y”), a customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

  In the case where the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A3207). Is determined (B1309). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command processing ends.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then sends the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A3203). It is determined whether or not to represent (B1311). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), a special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent the probability information command (the result of B1313 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion represents an error / unauthorized command ( B1315). Examples of error / unauthorized commands include a fraud occurrence command (A2108), a fraud cancel command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). If the MODE part represents an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / unauthorization setting process is executed to notify or cancel the error or the unauthorized (B1316). End single-shot command processing.

  When the MODE unit does not represent an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1315 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then displays a command for effect mode switching (for example, the effect of A5139). It is determined whether or not (mode switching preparation command) is represented (B1317). If the MODE portion represents a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “Y”), the effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then counts the command of the MODE unit (A3107, A3111 big prize mouth count) Command) is determined (B1319). If the MODE part represents a count command (the result of B1319 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1320), and the one-shot command process is terminated. Details of the count information setting process will be described later.

  In the case where the MODE section does not represent the count command (the result of B1319 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then responds to the information related to the prize ball (the result of calculation of the accessory ratio in A2317). (Command to be executed) is determined (B1321). If the MODE section represents information relating to a prize ball (the result of B1321 is “Y”), an accessory ratio setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot command process is terminated. Details of the accessory ratio setting process will be described later.

  When the MODE unit does not represent information relating to the prize ball (the result of B1321 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command (B1323). ). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command shown in FIG. 1 and the symbol stop command shown in FIG. If the MODE portion represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1323 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE portion is a normal command ( B1324).

  When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1324 is “Y”), the production control device 300 sets the corresponding special figure stop mode (B1325), and after all the symbols are stopped, the game The status flag is set to the normal status (B1326), and the single command processing is terminated. In the process of B1326, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state. However, depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of “Fluctuating”, “Big hit”, “Low hit” Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1323 is “N”), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (result of B1324 is “N”), the production control device 300 finishes the single command processing.

[Count information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, details of the count information setting process (B1320) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 88) described above will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the count information setting process executed by the effect control device 300. The count information setting process is for counting the number of winning balls in the special game state, and is executed when the MODE portion represents a count among commands received as a single-shot command.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received count command (big prize opening count command) is a normal command (B1401). If the command is normal (the result of B1401 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the current gaming machine 10 is in a big hit operation (in a big hit state) ( B1402).

  When the big hitting operation is being performed (the result of B1402 is “Y”), the production control device 300 updates the count number in the current round by +1, and the number of winning balls for the big winning mouth ( Here, 14) is added (B1403, B1404). At the time when the big hit ending ends, the number of earned balls is cleared to zero. The obtained number of balls is stored in the number of balls in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322).

  Next, the production control device 300 performs update setting for the number of balls to be displayed (B1405), and ends the count information setting process. As the number of balls to be displayed, the number of acquired balls is displayed on the display device 41 or the like.

  On the other hand, when the received command is not normal (result of B1401 is “N”), or when the current gaming machine 1 is not in a big hit operation (result of B1402 is “N”), the count information setting process is performed. finish.

[Property ratio setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the accessory ratio setting process (B1322) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 88) described above will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process executed by the effect control device 300. The bonus ratio setting process is to save all the bonus ratios (so-called bonus ratios) and the continuous bonus ratios, and to display and set them. This command is executed when a command corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio of A2317 is received.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received information command regarding the prize ball is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (the result of B1501 is “N”), the accessory ratio setting process is terminated.

  When the command is normal (the result of B1501 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the all combination ratio (B1502). If the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of all the proportions (the result of B1502 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B1505. When the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the total combination ratio (result of B1502 is “Y”), the total combination ratio is stored in the RAM (B1503), and the total combination ratio is displayed on the display device 41. Display setting is executed (B1504).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous character ratio (B1505). When the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the continuous character ratio (the result of B1505 is “N”), the character ratio setting process is terminated. When the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous character ratio (the result of B1505 is “Y”), the continuous character ratio is stored in the RAM (B1506), and the continuous character ratio is displayed on the display device 41. Display setting is executed (B1507), and the accessory ratio setting process is terminated.

  It should be noted that the ratio of all winnings and the consecutive winnings received at the jackpot end timing are stored in the RAM (as a single set) together with the number of winning balls at the jackpot end timing (final winning ball number during the jackpot). For example, it is stored in the big hit history area of the RAM 322 (B1503, B1506). In the jackpot history area, jackpot history 1, jackpot history 2, jackpot history 3,... Are stored in the order of jackpot generated from power-on of the gaming machine 10, and for each jackpot history, all items are stored. The ratio, the consecutive character ratio, and the number of winnings are saved as a set. Further, the ratio of all winnings and the ratio of consecutive winninges are displayed on the display device 41 as a big hit history at the big hit end timing by the display setting (B1504, B1507). The bonus rate displayed at the jackpot end timing is from the end of one special game (before the first special game ends when the game machine 10 is turned on) to the end of the next special game (bonus). This is a bonus ratio calculated for the number of prize balls obtained during the period.

  Also, in the RAM, the ratios of all combinations and consecutive combinations received at approximately the same timing at the high probability end timing and the short time end timing are stored in association as one set (pair). In addition, the total combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are simultaneously displayed on the display device 41 at the high-probability end timing and the short-time end timing by the display setting (B1504, B1507). The bonus rate displayed at the high-probability end timing or short-term end timing is the number of prize balls obtained from the end of the previous special game until the end of the specific game state (high probability state or short-time state). It is the ratio of the bonuses calculated for this.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the details of the symbol system command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The symbol system command process is executed in step B1210 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets a special figure type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol-related command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE portion and the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area in the RAM (B1802). Here, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, since the symbol distribution ratio changes, a symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol types include a missing symbol, a 4R probability variation big hit symbol, a 16R probability variation big hit symbol, and the like.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, details of the variable command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The variable command processing is executed in step B1206 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable command (variable command) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether or not the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the term “inconsistency” means that there is a contradiction in performing an effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variation command of a deviation is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1903 is “Y”), the variation command processing is terminated.

  When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904), and the effect during the variation A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, a special state change is set to the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-read effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907). Then, the number of special figure fluctuations is updated by +1 (B1908), and the fluctuation command process is terminated. The special figure fluctuation count is the number of executions (start number) of the special figure fluctuation display game since the game machine 10 is turned on. The updated special figure fluctuation count is a special figure in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322). It is stored in the fluctuation count area.

[Big hit command processing]
Next, details of the jackpot command processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot command processing is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE portion of the received jackpot command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, if the jackpot command is a fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2102). . The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for the current jackpot. Subsequently, “Fanfare” is set in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2103), and the big hit command processing is terminated. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decorative symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

  When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE portion represents a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, and the game of the current gaming machine 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to “round” (B2105, B2106), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is “N”), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE portion represents an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game of the current gaming machine 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to “interval” (B2108, B2109), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is “N”), the presentation control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents ending ( B2110). When the MODE portion represents an ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is an ending command, the rendering control device 300 performs the rendering corresponding to the bonus rate and the number of winning balls in the jackpot Point addition effect display is set as an effect display when points are added (B2111). In the point addition effect display, for example, a character appears on the display device 41.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect corresponding to the accessory ratio (both or any of the consecutive accessory ratios) (B2112) Ending is set in the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2113), and the big hit command processing is terminated. Note that the ending effect may be set in correspondence with the final number of winning balls.

  If the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent an ending (the result of B2110 is “N”), the production control device 300 ends the jackpot command processing without executing any processing. To do.

[Direction point control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, details of the effect point control process according to the third embodiment will be described. The effect point control process is executed in step B1011 in the main process (FIG. 78). FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of effect point control processing executed by the effect control device 300. The production points include an owned point that is a cumulative number of points acquired from past games to the present, and an in-game acquired point that is acquired during the current game (predetermined period).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not a pre-read effect of an effect point target (target to which an effect point is given) has been executed (B2501). Note that the pre-reading effect is an effect that is executed based on the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command, such as a continuous performance (continuous notice), a pending change notice, and a look-ahead zone notice. When the prefetch effect for the effect point target is not executed (the result of B2501 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2504. When the pre-reading effect for the effect point is executed (result of B2501 is “Y”), the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of owned points (B2502), and the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of points acquired during the game. (B2503).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a change effect for the effect point target has been executed (B2504). Here, the variation effect is an effect (notice effect or the like) related to the result of the special figure variation display game currently being executed. When the variation effect for the effect point target is not executed (result of B2504 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2507. When the variation effect for the effect point is executed (result of B2504 is “Y”), the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of owned points (B2505), and the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of points acquired during the game. (B2506).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not an input condition as an effect point target is satisfied (B2507). When there is an effect button operation for an effect point to which an effect point is given, it is determined that this input condition is satisfied. If the input condition that is the target of the production point is not satisfied (the result of B2507 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2510. When the input condition for the production point is satisfied (result of B2507 is “Y”), the point corresponding to the input (production button operation) is added to the number of owned points (B2508), and the number of points acquired during the game is added. Points corresponding to the input (the production button operation here) are added (B2509).

  Thereafter, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the addition timing at the big hit ending (B2510). When it is not the addition timing at the big hit ending (the result of B2510 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2513. If it is the timing of addition at the jackpot ending (the result of B2510 is “Y”), the number of possessed points will be the ratio of all the features (both all proportions and / or the consecutive proportions) and the current winning win Points corresponding to the number of balls are added (B2511), and the number of points earned in the game corresponds to the number of winning points in the jackpot (all and / or continuous character ratio) Points are added (B2512).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the character level up condition is satisfied with respect to the number of points acquired during the game (B2513). For example, it can be determined that the character level-up condition is satisfied when the number of points acquired during the game is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. If the character level-up condition is not satisfied (the result of B2513 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2516. When the character level-up condition is established for the number of points acquired during the game (the result of B2513 is “Y”), the character level (Lv) corresponding to the character mode (for example, costume) is updated (B2514). The drawing setting of the character level up effect related to the level up (mode change) is performed (B2515). It should be noted that the character level-up effect may be a level-up of the above-mentioned navigation character 670 or may be used for level-up of character aspects other than the navigation character 670.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the point restoration condition by the password input is satisfied (B2516). The password input is, for example, input by operating the effect button 25, and the password can be acquired by a mobile terminal (such as a mobile phone) by a mobile terminal link service. The point restoration condition is, for example, that the password is correct. If the point restoration condition is not satisfied (the result of B2516 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2519. When the point restoration condition is satisfied (the result of B2516 is “Y”), the number of owned points is set to a value corresponding to the password content (B2517), and the character level (Lv) corresponding to the password content and the production customization information are set. Is restored (B2518). The production customization information is information for each model.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation for drawing the two-dimensional code on the display device 41 (B2519). For example, the two-dimensional code drawing operation is a predetermined operation (such as an operation on the touch panel or a pressing operation) of the effect button 25. When there is no two-dimensional code drawing operation (the result of B2519 is “N”), the effect point control process is terminated. If there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation (the result of B2520 is “Y”), a password is generated based on the number of owned points, character Lv, and effect customization information (B2520), and the two-dimensional code corresponding to the generated password is generated. Drawing settings are made (B2521). Thereafter, the effect point control process ends.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the hall / player setting mode process (B1010) according to the third embodiment in the main process (FIG. 78) described above will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode process executed by the effect control device 300. The hall / player setting mode process activates a hall setting mode in which hall (game shop) staff or the like can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10, or a player setting mode in which a player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10. be able to.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hall setting mode (B2701). When a hole setting mode flag to be described later is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When in the hall setting mode (the result of B2701 is “Y”), the processing of B2706-B2716 is performed, and the operation of the effect button 25 (the effect button switch 25a, the touch panel 25b) by the staff of the hall (game shop) or the like Various settings and adjustments are made based on the above.

  When the hall control mode 300 is not in effect (the result of B2701 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode is in effect (B2702). When a player setting mode flag to be described later is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is being set. When in the player setting mode (the result of B2702 is “Y”), the processing of B2720-B2725 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

  When the player setting mode is not in effect (the result of B2702 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2703). For example, it is possible to determine that the hall setting mode start condition has been satisfied, for example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B1009) while waiting for a customer. Note that “waiting for a customer” means, for example, the above-described waiting state for a customer, and includes a waiting state for a customer in which a video for waiting for a customer (a customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2703 is “N”), the process of B2717 is executed.

  When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2703 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode. Start setting is performed (B2704). Then, a flag in the hole setting mode is set (B2705).

  Next, the production control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the production button 25 by a hall attendant or the like (B2706), the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration. Hall LED luminance adjustment processing (B2707) for adjusting the luminance of the LED of the device 46, liquid crystal luminance adjustment processing (B2708) for adjusting the luminance of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, and power saving for setting power saving A setting process (B2709) is executed.

  Next, the production control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting an issuance color or the like of the logo accessory (B2710). Then, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B2711). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected by the effect button input process (B1009), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2711 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.

  When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B2711 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed with the factory default setting (B2712). If there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting at the time of factory shipment has been confirmed. If the setting at the time of factory shipment is not confirmed (the result of B2712 is “N”), the process proceeds to B2714. When the factory setting is confirmed (the result of B2712 is “Y”), the factory setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments with the factory setting is executed (B2713). The factory default setting is a default setting stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, hole setting data (or hole adjustment data) such as sound volume and various luminances determined in B2706-B2710 and B2713 is written in a backup memory (for example, FeRAM 323) (B2714).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B2715). Then, the hall setting mode flag is cleared (B2716).

  When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2703 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2717). While waiting for a customer, it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied, for example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B1009). Note that “waiting for a customer” means, for example, the above-described waiting state for a customer, and includes a waiting state for a customer in which a video for waiting for a customer (a customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2717 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.

  When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2717 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B2718). In addition, by this screen drawing, the menu display for making various selections and the accessory ratios (continuous accessory ratio and total accessory ratio), volume adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for volume adjustment, LED brightness adjustment Is displayed on the display device 41 together with a brightness adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for Then, a player setting mode flag is set (B2719).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the sound volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B2720), the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED brightness adjustment process (B2721) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

  Next, the production control device 300 executes production customization processing for customizing (individual setting) the production based on the operation of the production button 25 and the like by the player (B2722). Then, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B2723). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2723 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2723 is “Y”), a screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B2724). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B2725). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as volume and brightness determined in B2720-B2721 may be erased and is not written to the backup memory.

  In the above description, the drawing update setting (such as updating the highlight item in the menu display) after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (B1009).

[Screen transition]
FIG. 96A and FIG. 96B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the third embodiment, and are examples of screen transition of the entire game.

  (A) of FIG. 96A is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure variation display game. In the plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), the stoppage symbol for the previous special figure variable display game is displayed. In addition, a square frame holding digestion area 640 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen.

  In the third embodiment, the hold display unit 630 (starting memory display unit) includes a first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as a first hold display (first start memory display), and a second start memory. It comprises a second hold display section 630b that displays as a second hold display (second start-up storage display). Three hold displays 633 are displayed as the first hold display on the first hold display section 630a. At the present time, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b. The hold display 633b (black) is a hold display whose color has changed from the normal mode due to the hold change notice.

  In the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a number “3” indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are respectively displayed. The number “0” is displayed.

  (A) is a display screen at the timing of starting the special figure variation display game. An effect is provided in which the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display portion 630a moves to the hold digestion region 640. Thereafter, a hold correspondence display 633a (a hold display during change) indicating a hold related to the special figure change display game being executed (starting memory that has been the right to execute this special figure change display game) is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Will be. Then, the variation of the decoration special symbol (↓↓↓) starts in the variation display area 610, and at the same time, the variation of the decoration reduced symbol (↓↓↓) starts in the variation display area 615. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650, the number indicating the special figure 1 hold number decreases to “2”. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the stop result (stop symbol) of the fluctuation display area 615 and the fluctuation display area 610 becomes a common mode (a common number). It may not be a common mode.

  Thereafter, in (c), in the left region 610a and the right region 610b, the same decorative special symbol (identification information) is stopped, and reach has occurred. Then, after various reach effects are executed, in (D), a big win stop symbol is displayed, and thereafter, in the special gaming state (big hit state), a special variable winning device for a predetermined number of rounds (here 16 times). By repeating 39 times of opening and closing, a round game for a predetermined number of rounds is executed.

  (E) shows the display screen of 8R in the middle of the big hit state (special game state). Here, a big hit round effect is performed, and the number of winning balls (B1404, B1405 in FIG. 89) acquired during the big hit state is updated and displayed every time a big prize is won. (F) shows the screen of the final round (16R).

  (B) in FIG. 96B shows the display screen of the display device 41 during the ending at the end of the big hit state. During the ending, as the jackpot history, the number of winnings acquired during the jackpot, and the ratios of all winnings and the continuous winnings received by the production control device 300 at the jackpot end timing are displayed on the jackpot history display unit 760. Yes. The jackpot history display unit 760 includes an accessory ratio display area 800 for displaying an accessory ratio. It should be noted that the all-instant-equity ratio is a so-called “actual-object ratio” that is generally used, and is therefore displayed as “actual-object ratio”. The character ratio displayed here was obtained during the period from the end of one special game (before the first special game was completed, when the gaming machine 10 was turned on) to the end of the next special game (big hit). The bonus rate calculated with respect to the number of prize balls may be a bonus rate calculated with respect to the prize balls obtained over the entire period from turning on the gaming machine 10 to the end of each special game.

  Also, the last three jackpot histories (history information) (here, jackpot history 1, jackpot history 2, and jackpot history 3) are displayed. How many jackpot histories are displayed on the jackpot history display unit 760. This can be set by the player in the player setting mode. The big hit history (the number of winning items, the ratio of all winnings, the ratio of consecutive winnings) is displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or is displayed preferentially on the front side even if overlapping. In addition, it is also possible to display the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio as a pie chart or a bar graph instead of numbers.

  Further, as a point addition effect at the time of adding effect points according to the number of winning lots and winning characters in the big hit, for example, a display of a character 770 appears on the display device 41 and a line display of the character 770 is displayed. In the part 770a, the added number of winning balls and the added value of the production points (here, 100 points) are displayed. The character 770 and its form may be set in accordance with the added value of the production points (as a result, the number of earned balls and the ratio of bonus items).

  Furthermore, an effect (decoration) in which a shooting star flows is displayed as an ending effect (B2112 in FIG. 93) executed during the ending. The ending effect (including the background) may be set in accordance with information related to award balls such as the number of winning balls and the ratio of the items. The effect according to the ratio of the actors makes it possible to determine the ratio of the actors and the state of the gaming machine and improve the fun of the game. In the ending effect, LEDs (board decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the center case 40 of the game board 30 are displayed in colors (for example, “green”, “yellow”, “blue”) according to the ratio of the actors. It may include a decoration effect that emits light in order that the ratio of the actors decreases in order. In addition, since the number of special figure variation display games that have been exhausted until the big hit is likely to be greater as the ratio of actors is lower, an ending effect that gives a good impression to the player is set in order to avoid labor. Good. In addition, an ending effect may be set that gives a better impression to the player in order to win the game as the number of earned balls increases. In addition, the structure which sets effects (for example, fluctuation effects) other than an ending effect according to an accessory ratio is also possible.

  (C) shows a display screen when a specific gaming state (high probability state or short time state) “RUSH” occurs after the big hit state ends. In (K), the special figure 1 special figure fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 special figure fluctuation display game is executed in the specific gaming state. One hold display 633 is displayed as the first hold display on the first hold display section 630a. Two hold displays 633 are displayed as the second hold display on the second hold display section 630b.

  (G) shows a display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or short time state) “RUSH”. In the special game state end timing (high probability end timing or short-time end timing), the all winning combinations ratio and the continuous winning ratio received by the effect control device 300 are displayed in the winning combination ratio display area 800. The specific game state end timing is, for example, a timing at which the high probability variation count becomes zero. The bonus rate displayed here is the bonus rate calculated for the number of prize balls obtained during the period from the end of one special game to the end of the specific game state. It may be an accessory ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained during the entire period from when the power is turned on until the specific gaming state ends. In addition, at the end timing of the specific gaming state, an effect corresponding to the accessory ratio may be executed.

  It should be noted that the all-instant-equity ratio is a so-called “actual-object ratio” that is generally used, and is therefore displayed as “actual-object ratio”. The total combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or are displayed with priority on the front side even if they overlap. In addition, it is also possible to display the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio as a pie chart or a bar graph instead of numbers. After that, the normal game state is entered.

  FIG. 97 corresponds to (G) of FIG. 96B and shows another example of the display screen of the display device 41 in the ending at the end of the big hit state. In FIG. 97, in addition to the number of winning appearances, the ratio of all winnings, and the ratio of continuous winnings, the number of starts (the special number of B1908 in FIG. The number of changes in the figure is displayed on the big hit history display section 760. As a result, the player or the like determines whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on the start number other than the reference value, thereby reducing erroneous determination. For example, if a big hit occurs when the number of starts is small (for example, 10 in FIG. 97), the ratio of the bonuses exceeds the reference value (eg, 60% for the continuous bonus ratio and 70% for the total bonus ratio). However, it can be determined that it is not abnormal.

  In this case, the ratio of all winnings and the consecutive winnings received at the jackpot end timing are stored in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322) as one set together with the number of balls to be played and the number of starts at the jackpot end timing. It is stored in the big hit history area (B1503, B1506).

  In FIG. 97, since there is a possibility that the ratio of all the actors and the ratio of consecutive actors are unfamiliar with the player, a navigation character 670 appears, and the ratio of all the actors is continuously displayed on the serif display portion 680. The explanation and definition of the ratio of items are displayed. As a result, the player becomes interested in the ratio of the items.

  Also in FIG. 96B (co), in the display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or short time state) “RUSH”, it is added to the all-instant-equity ratio and the continuous-object ratio. The start number may be displayed in the accessory ratio display area 800.

[Display screen waiting for customers]
FIG. 98 shows an example of a display screen in the player setting mode (B2718 in FIG. 95) waiting for customers. The big hit history is displayed on the big hit history display section 760. The consecutive character ratio and the total character ratio (displayed as “character ratio”) are displayed in the character ratio display area 800 in the jackpot history display unit 760. A volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) for volume adjustment and a luminance adjustment display 815 (gauge) for LED luminance adjustment are displayed on the display screen.

  The production control device 300 displays the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for a customer (while waiting for a customer), and in a state other than waiting for a customer, that is, waiting for a customer. In a state where the demonstration is not being performed or a state in which a game ball is being launched, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the continuous combination ratio and the total combination ratio are not displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. That is, a configuration in which B1504 and B1507 in the accessory ratio setting process (FIG. 90) are omitted is also possible.

  Furthermore, on the display screen of the display device 41, a first selection unit 820 for selecting the number of displayed jackpot histories and a second selection unit 825 for selecting the display contents (display mode) of the accessory ratio are displayed as menu displays. ing. The number of jackpot histories (the number of winning prizes, the ratio of all winnings (the ratio of all winnings), the ratio of consecutive winnings, the start number) stored in the jackpot history area in the RAM by the first selection unit 820. Whether or not to display the big hit history (three in FIG. 96B, FIG. 97, and FIG. 98) can be selected. The second selection unit 825 can select whether or not to display either or both of the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

  The player selects a target to be set by performing a touch operation by moving the finger in the vertical direction on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 (movement of the touch location). By this touch operation, a setting target item (setting item) displayed in a specific display mode such as highlight display (see the black frame of the volume adjustment display 810) is selected. That is, items displayed in a specific display mode such as highlight display are changed by a touch operation. It should be noted that the update of the highlight item in the first selection unit 820 and the second selection unit 825 as the menu display is executed by an effect button input process (B1009). Note that the sound volume and brightness values are selected (B2720 and B2721 in FIG. 95) by a touch operation based on the movement of the finger in the left-right direction (movement of the touch location). In addition, the displayed value or the selection of the character may be confirmed by touching the center of the touch panel 25b (B2723 in FIG. 95, etc.). Further, the LED 690 portion of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to promote the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  As described above, in the player setting mode waiting for customers, the player can select the display contents (display mode) of the number of jackpot histories displayed and the ratio of bonuses by the menu display. Further, in the player setting mode waiting for the customer, a volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) and a brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) are displayed, and the player can adjust to the player's preferred volume and brightness.

[Sub display device]
FIG. 99 shows a game board 30 provided with a sub display device 830. In the above, an example is shown in which the display of the display device 41 displays the ratio of all winnings, the ratio of consecutive winninges, and the like. However, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to display a feature ratio and a continuous feature ratio. The operation of the sub display device 830 (movable accessory) is controlled by the effect control device 300 as the board effect device 44.

  In the normal position, the sub display device 830 is accommodated in the space on the back side of the upper effect unit 40c, and most of the sub display device 830 cannot be seen in front view. However, in the operating position, the sub display device 830 moves to the front side of the display device 41 and entirely in front view. Visible. Then, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short time end timing, the effect control device 300 moves the sub display device 830 to the operating position, and the sub display device 830 sets the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio. indicate. Therefore, at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short-time end timing, the player pays attention to the consecutive character ratio and the total character ratio displayed on the sub display device 830.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
In said 3rd Embodiment, a game control means (game control apparatus 100) transmits the information relevant to a prize ball to an effect control means (effect control apparatus 300). The effect control means (effect control device 300) is the number of prize balls that have been paid out by winning the variable prize device out of the total number of prize balls that have been paid out by the payout control means (such as the payout control device 200). Can be displayed on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). The information related to the prize ball includes the calculation result of the accessory ratio itself, information for calculating the accessory ratio (the number of prize balls as the basis of the accessory ratio), and the like.

  Therefore, it is possible to determine the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win a variable winning device or whether it is easy to win the general winning slot 35, etc.) by the display related to the bonus rate. In addition, the interest of the game is improved, and the player has an impression that it is easy to win a variable winning device (an impression that many open states are generated), which is a motivation (indicator) for the player to continue playing the game. Furthermore, when the ratio of the bonuses is low, there are relatively many prizes at the general prize opening 35 and the like, so that the player is interested in the general prize opening 35 by displaying the prize ratio on the display means. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display history information (hit history) related to special games for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). In this case, it is possible to display the history information including the ratio of the bonuses divided for each special game consisting of a predetermined number of rounds. In this case, the bonus rate divided for each special game includes the bonus rate measured after resetting at the end of the special game.

  Therefore, by calculating and displaying on the display means the proportions of the features divided for each special game (which is known in advance to be unstable), not the proportions for the entire period. A player or the like is prompted to determine whether or not the ratio of an accessory is an abnormal value based on his / her knowledge and information other than the reference value, and erroneous determination is reduced.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) may cause a specific game (high probability state or short time state) to occur during a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) the special figure variation display game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. . Further, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) calculates the bonus rate, and uses the calculated bonus rate as information related to the prize ball when the special game or the specific game is ended. It may be transmitted to the control device 300). In this case, the accessory ratio can be displayed at the timing (the timing at which the special game or the specific game is finished) immediately after the change of the accessory ratio. Further, when the calculated accessory ratio is transmitted as it is to the effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) and displayed on the display means, the number of transmissions from the game control means (game control apparatus 100) to the effect control apparatus 300 is minimized. The transmission load is reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106. Note that configurations other than those described below can be applied to configurations common to any of the first to third embodiments.

  The fourth embodiment is based on the third embodiment. However, unlike the third embodiment, the effect control device 300 uses a payout command (FIG. 101) (a payout command (A1719) and an out-ball detection command (A2017). ), And calculate the ratio of the actors (the ratio of consecutive actors and the ratio of all the actors). Further, the effect control apparatus 300 may calculate (count) the total number of winning balls and the number of winnings of the general winning opening 35 or calculate the general winning opening ratio. The general winning opening ratio is a ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the general winning opening 35 out of the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls). 85, the processing (steps A9804, A9805, A2317, A2318) for transmitting the calculation result of the accessory ratio to the effect control device 300 is not executed in the appearance performance monitoring process of FIG. 85 and is not executed in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining a discharge ball number area, an acquired ball number area, and an earned ball number area for each accessory according to the fourth embodiment. The discharged ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the earned ball number area for each accessory are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control apparatus 100. The discharged ball number area and the acquired ball number area are the same as those in FIG. 17B of the first embodiment, but with respect to the general-purpose winning hole 35, there are two areas, that is, the left general winning prize. An area for storing the total number of winning balls for winning in the mouth 35 and an area for storing the total number of winning balls for winning in the right general winning opening 35 are provided. Thereby, the game control apparatus 100 can calculate (count) the total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 separately on the left and right.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a payout command according to the fourth embodiment. The payout command (FIG. 101) according to the fourth embodiment is different from the payout command of FIG. 83 of the second embodiment, and there are two types of payout commands corresponding to the left and right general winning mouths. is there. For example, in the prize opening information, “000” indicates the left general prize opening 35, “001” indicates the right general prize opening 35, and the payout command is expressed in hexadecimal notation by winning to the left general prize opening 35. The ten award balls are “0AH”, and the ten award balls by winning the right general winning opening 35 are “1AH”.

  In the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits the payout command of FIG. 101 not only to the payout control device 200 but also to the effect control device 300. In step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), the game control device 100 prepares not only a payout command to be sent to the payout control device 200 but also a payout command to be sent to the effect control device 300 as an effect command. The effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed in the payout command transmission process. Similarly, the game control device 100 detects not only the out ball detection command to be transmitted to the payout control device 200 but also the out ball detection to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in step A2017 of the prize opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 15A). A command is prepared as an effect command, and thereafter, an effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. Note that the payout command and the out-ball detection command transmitted to the effect control device 300 are provided with a MODE portion indicating information relating to a prize ball.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 stores the number-of-use-acquisition ball number area for storing the number of winning characters acquired from the payout command (FIG. 101) in the RAM (FIG. 100 (III)). For example, in the RAM 322).

[Single command processing]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the single command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The single-shot command process is executed by the effect control apparatus 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the same process as the single shot system command process (FIG. 88) which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Note that the information regarding the prize ball of FIG. 102 according to the fourth embodiment is the payout command of FIG. 101 transmitted from the game control device 100, and the information regarding the prize ball of FIG. This is different from the command corresponding to the ratio calculation result.

  When the MODE portion does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1323 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion represents a high probability variation count command corresponding to the high probability variation count. Is determined (B1327). When the MODE portion represents a high probability variation count command (the result of B1327 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes a high probability (short time) end process (B1328) and ends the single-shot command process. When the MODE unit does not represent the high probability variation number command (result of B1327 is “N”), the production control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing as it is.

[Property ratio setting process]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the accessory ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment. The accessory ratio setting process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1322 of the single-shot command process (FIG. 103).

  In the accessory ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 uses the number of prize balls indicated in the payout command as an accessory in the earned ball number area for each accessory in the RAM of the effect control device 300. Add and accumulate the number of balls acquired. Then, in addition to the ratio of all winnings and the ratio of consecutive winnings, the right / left general winning award ratio is calculated and stored. The accessory ratio setting process is executed when the effect control device 300 receives a payout command (FIG. 101) as information relating to a prize ball.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received payout command (FIG. 101) is a normal command (B3001). If the payout command is not normal (the result of B3001 is “N”), the accessory ratio setting process is terminated. When the payout command is normal (the result of B3001 is “Y”), the number of acquired balls for each role corresponding to the payout command (that is, winning prize information indicated in the payout command) in the RAM of the effect control device 300 The number of prize balls indicated in the payout command is added to the area value (B3002). Next, the ratio of all winnings and the consecutive winning ratio are calculated from the value of the number of balls acquired for each winning combination, and are stored in the all winning ratio ratio area and the consecutive winning ratio ratio area in the RAM (B3003).

  In addition, when adding and accumulating the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls for each role) in the winning ball area for each winning feature during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, It is possible to calculate the ratio of the bonus to the number of winning balls (the number of acquired balls) over the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When the special game (big hit) is finished, if all the acquired ball count areas (in the RAM of the production control device 300) are cleared to 0 (reset), the production control device 300 will display the previous special game. It is possible to calculate an accessory ratio in a period from the end to the present time (from the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 before the end of the first special game).

  Subsequently, the production control device 300 calculates the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio from the values of the acquired number of balls for each of the left and right general winning openings, and the left general winning opening ratio in the RAM. The area and the right general winning opening ratio area are stored (B3004). Here, the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio are ratios of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the left and right general winning opening 35 out of the total number of winning balls, respectively. Note that the total number of winning balls is the sum of the values of all the number of acquired balls by category.

  The effect control device 300 can calculate the general winning award ratio for the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When the special game (big hit) is finished, if all the acquired ball count areas (in the RAM of the production control device 300) are cleared to 0, the production control device 300 starts from the end of the previous special game. It is possible to calculate the general winning award ratio in the period up to the present (before the first special game is over from the time when the gaming machine 10 is turned on).

  In step B3004, the general winning award ratio may be calculated by adding the left general winning award ratio and the right general winning award ratio. Further, in addition to the left and right general winning opening ratios, the winning opening ratio of each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening is calculated and stored in the corresponding area in the RAM. May be. Here, the winning mouth ratio is a ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the corresponding winning mouth out of the total number of winning balls.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the winning ball-by-function area to which the number of winning balls is added in step B3002 is for the winning ball of the left or right general winning opening 35 (B3005). ). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the left or right general winning opening 35. In the case where the added number-of-acquisition ball number area is not for the winning ball of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is “N”), that is, when there is no winning in the left or right general winning opening 35, The property ratio setting process is terminated.

  In the case where the added number-of-acquisition-by-function area is for the winning ball of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 has the left or right general winning opening 35. If there is a win, the value of the number-of-acquisition-based acquired ball number area added in step B3002 is displayed and set (B3006). In this case, the added number-of-acquisition-by-function area is the area for the number of winning balls for each of the winning balls in the left general winning opening 35 when the left general winning opening 35 wins, and the right general winning area. This is the number-of-acquisition ball number area for the winning ball of the right general winning opening 35 when there is a winning in the mouth 35. The added value of the number-of-acquisition-by-function ball number area is the total number of winning balls by winning the left or right general winning opening 35. In addition, even when only one general winning opening 35 is won, the value of the number of acquired balls for each of the general winning openings 35 may be displayed and set. Here, not only the total number of winning balls in the left or right general winning opening 35 but also the number of winning prizes in the left or right general winning opening 35 or the number of winning prizes in all the general winning openings 35 are counted. A configuration for display setting is also possible.

  As described above, when there is a prize at the general prize opening 35 and the number of prize balls is added to the value of the number of acquired balls for each role for the general prize opening, at least the number of prize balls at the general prize opening 35 where the current prize has been won The total (the number of acquired balls) can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub display device 830 in FIG. 99).

  The effect control device 300 can display the total number of winning balls in the general winning opening 35 over the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When the special game (big hit) is finished, if all the acquired ball count areas (in the RAM of the production control device 300) are cleared to 0, the production control device 300 starts from the end of the previous special game. It is possible to display the total number of winning balls in the general winning opening 35 during the period up to the present (before the first special game is finished, from when the gaming machine 10 is turned on).

  Subsequently, effect setting for effecting in response to winning in the general winning opening 35 is executed (B3007), and the accessory ratio setting process is ended. As an effect corresponding to winning in the general winning opening 35, an LED (panel decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35 emits light, a sound is output from a speaker, or a movable accessory (board directing apparatus 44). ) Works. This effect can enhance the interest of the game and increase the player's interest in the general winning opening 35.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 also adds the added role in the case where the number-of-acquisition balls area of each winning prize other than the general winning prize opening 35 (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) is added. The value of the number of balls acquired by object may be displayed and set. Thereby, the total number of winning balls (the number of acquired balls) of each winning opening can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub display device 830 in FIG. 99).

  Furthermore, in the accessory ratio setting process, the effect control device 300 may calculate the number of balls to be discharged and the ball payout rate based on the payout command. In this case, the effect control device 300 has a discharge ball number area for storing the number of discharged balls and an acquired ball number area for storing the total number of winning balls (number of acquired balls) in the RAM. Note that the number of discharged balls corresponds to the number of times a payout command (FIG. 101) is received, and the payout rate is a ratio (ratio)% of the number of winning balls to the number of discharged balls.

  In addition, the effect control apparatus 300 may back up the calculation results (the value of the number-of-balls area obtained by each accessory, the accessory ratio, the general winning opening ratio, etc.) in the accessory ratio setting process in the FeRAM 323.

[High probability (short time) end processing]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a procedure of high probability (short time) end processing according to the fourth embodiment. The high probability (short time) end process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1328 of the single-shot command process (FIG. 103).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received high probability variation number command is a normal command (B3201). If the high probability variation number command is not normal (the result of B3201 is “N”), the high probability (short time) termination process is terminated. If the high probability variation count command is normal (result of B3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether the high probability variation count is 0 (B3202). In the present embodiment, the high probability variation number is also the short-time variation number.

  The effect control device 300 ends the high probability (short time) end process as it is, when the high probability change number (the short time change number) is not 0 (the result of B3202 is “N”). On the other hand, when the number of high-probability fluctuations (number of short-time fluctuations) is 0 (the result of B3202 is “Y”), the display setting of the ratio of the actors (the ratio of the consecutive actors and the ratio of all the actors) and the right and left general winning opening ratios To finish the high probability (short time) termination process. Note that the sum of the left and right general winning opening ratios may be displayed and set as the general winning opening ratio.

  In this way, the production control device 300 always calculates the character ratio (continuous character ratio and all character ratio) and the left and right general winning award ratio every time a payout command is received, and the high probability end timing, In addition, at the time-saving end timing, the display device 41 and the sub-display device 830 can display the accessory ratio and the left / right general winning opening ratio.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The jackpot command processing is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). Note that the steps having the same contents as the jackpot command processing (FIG. 93) of the third embodiment have the same step numbers and will not be described.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates ending (B2110). When the MODE portion represents an ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is an ending command, the rendering control device 300 performs the rendering corresponding to the bonus rate and the number of winning balls in the jackpot Point addition effect display is set as an effect display when points are added (B2111).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines the final winning number in the RAM as a set of big hit history as a set of big hits history together with the ratio of the bonuses (continuous bonus rate and total bonus rate) and the right and left general winning award ratio. Save in the history area (B3401). Then, an ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect is executed (B3402). In the ending effect setting process, as part of the ending effect, the setting of the display of the character ratio (the consecutive character ratio and the total character ratio) and the left and right general winning opening ratio is also executed. Note that the sum of the left and right general winning opening ratios may be displayed and set as the general winning opening ratio. The ending effect may be set in correspondence with the final number of items to be earned, the ratio of bonuses, and the ratio of left and right general winning awards.

  In this way, each time the presentation control device 300 receives a payout command, the effect control device 300 always calculates the bonus rate (continuous bonus rate and total bonus rate) and the left / right general winning prize rate, and the jackpot end timing (ending) ), The display device 41 and the sub display device 830 can display the accessory ratio and the left / right general winning opening ratio.

  The effect control device 300 calculates the accessory ratio and the left / right general winning opening ratio only at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short time end timing, and the display device 41 and the sub display device 830 perform the accessory. It is also possible to display the ratio and the left / right general winning opening ratio.

[Screen transition]
106A and 106B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fourth embodiment, and are examples of screen transitions of the entire game. 106A (A)-(F) and FIG. 106B (K)-(CO) correspond to FIGS. 96A (A)-(F) and FIG. 96B (K)-(CO), respectively, and will be described below. Except for the configuration to be performed, it is the same as FIG. 106A and FIG. 106B.

  In (C) of FIG. 106A, since there is a winning at the left general winning opening 35, the value of the number of winning balls for each of the winning balls in the left general winning opening 35 (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total number of winning balls won by winning the left general winning opening 35 is displayed by the total number of winning balls displayed “122 left general winning mouth winning balls in total”. Here, a configuration in which the number of winnings in the left general winning opening 35 is displayed is also possible. In addition, the total number of prize balls is displayed so as not to overlap with other effects (here, reach effects), but when the display range overlaps with other effects and gets in the way, the total number of prize balls is displayed. It does not have to be done.

  In addition, even when there is a prize at each prize opening other than the general prize opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2), the total number of winning balls won by winning at each winning opening and the number of winning prizes are displayed. Also good.

  In FIG. 106B (ki), the big hit history display section 760 of (ki) in FIG. 96B is provided with a general winning opening ratio display area 842 for displaying the left and right general winning opening ratios, and is generally displayed at the big hit end timing (ending). The left and right general winning mouth ratios are displayed in the winning mouth ratio display area 842. One jackpot history is stored including the number of winning prizes, the ratio of bonuses (the ratio of consecutive bonuses and the ratio of all bonuses), and the right / left general winning prize ratio (B3401 in FIG. 106). Moreover, although the display of the continuous character ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. Further, in the player setting mode waiting for customers (FIG. 98), it may be configured to select whether or not to display the general winning a prize ratio by the menu display (second selection unit 825).

  The general winning award ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of winning balls obtained by winning the general winning opening during the entire period from turning on the gaming machine 10 to the end of each special game, or one special game. From the end of the game (before the end of the first special game, from the time the game machine 10 is turned on) until the end of the next special game. It may be a thing.

  In (B) of FIG. 106B, since there is a winning in the right general winning opening 35, the value of the winning ball-by-function area for the winning ball of the right general winning opening 35 (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). In other words, the total number of winning balls won by winning the right general winning opening 35 is displayed by a total winning ball number display “152 total right winning holes for right general winning opening”. Here, a configuration for displaying the number of winnings in the right general winning opening 35 is also possible.

  In (B) of FIG. 106B, at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or short time state), in addition to the accessory ratio, the left and right general winning mouth ratios are displayed in the general winning mouth ratio display area 842. The In addition, although the display of the continuous character ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. The general winning opening ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of winning balls obtained by winning the general winning opening during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the specific gaming state, or the end of the special game It may be calculated with respect to the number of winning balls obtained by winning the general winning opening during the period from the time until the end of the specific gaming state (from the time when the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game).

[Operations and effects of the fourth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) transmits a payout command (FIG. 101) to the effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) as information related to the prize ball. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can receive the payout command (FIG. 101), calculate the accessory ratio by itself, and display it on the display means (display device 41 or sub display device 830). Therefore, it is possible to determine the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win a variable winning device or whether it is easy to win the general winning slot 35, etc.) by the display related to the bonus rate. In addition, when the bonus rate is low, there are relatively many prizes in the general prize opening 35 and the like, so that the player is interested in the general prize slot 35 by displaying the bonus rate on the display means. Become.

  Furthermore, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can calculate the general winning award ratio from the received payout command and display it on the display means. For this reason, the player is also interested in the general winning opening 35. Further, when the general winning opening 35 is won, the total number of winning balls and the number of winning prizes of the general winning opening 35 can be calculated from the received payout command and displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player's interest in the general winning award 35 increases.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 107, with respect to the game board of FIG. 2A, the number-of-balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 of the collective display device 50 are deleted. A first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 (first display) and a second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 (second display) are provided.

  In addition, the production control device 300 displays specific numerical values of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and / or the accessory ratio on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 81 and 96-98. In this case, the effect control device 300 displays the accessory ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for a customer (while waiting for a customer), and in a state other than waiting for a customer, that is, a state where a customer waiting demonstration is not in progress. In the state where the game ball is being fired, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the accessory ratio is not displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. That is, it is possible to omit the steps B1504 and B1507 in FIG. 90, the high probability (short time) end process in FIG. 104, the display of the ratio of the actors in step B3402 in FIG. 105, and the like.

  The 1st character ratio warning display part 844 as a 1st warning alerting | reporting part is comprised from one LED (light emission part), and it lights when all the ratios exceed a reference value (predetermined value 70%). Then, a warning display indicating that the ratio of all items has exceeded the reference value is executed. The 2nd character ratio warning display part 846 as a 2nd warning alerting | reporting part is comprised from one LED (light emission part), and it lights when a continuous character ratio exceeds a reference value (predetermined value 60%). Then, a warning display indicating that the continuous feature ratio has exceeded the reference value is executed.

  The discharge ball number display unit 66, the output ball rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are configured with a seven-segment display for displaying numerical values and are expensive. Since the ball percentage display part 67 and the accessory ratio display part 68 are eliminated and the first accessory ratio warning display part 844 (LED) and the second accessory ratio warning display part 846 (LED) are provided, the cost is reduced. Further, the first character ratio warning display unit 844 and the second character ratio warning display unit 846 of the collective display device 50 are controlled by the game control device 100 (main board) to be inspected by the test firing test engine. Therefore, display reliability is ensured.

  The first character ratio warning display unit 844 and the second character ratio warning display unit 846 are provided on the rear surface (rear surface) of the game control device 100 provided on the rear surface of the gaming machine 10, and the rear surface side of the gaming machine 10. It may be visible only from. And the 1st character ratio warning display part 844 and the 2nd character ratio warning display part 846 may be installed on the board (main board) of game control device 100. In this case, since the board (main board) of the game control device 100 is sealed so that it cannot be opened in the case (because it is crimped), the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio The display of the warning display unit 846 cannot be performed illegally.

  In addition, without displaying the warning message of the ratio of an accessory at all times, for example, when the glass frame or the front frame is opened, an error message (display of an error of opening the glass frame or an error of opening the front frame) is displayed together with a warning of the ratio of the accessory. You may make it do.

[Dead performance monitoring process]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout performance monitoring process according to the fifth embodiment. The payout performance monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process (FIG. 17A). FIG. 108 is obtained by replacing step A9803 in FIG. 85 with steps A9803a and A9803b. Note that the steps having the same contents as the appearance performance monitoring process in FIG. 85 have the same step numbers and description thereof is omitted.

  The game control device 100 sets both the total winning ratio and the consecutive winning ratio based on the number of winning winning balls (A9801, A9802), and then sets a warning display when the calculation result exceeds the reference value. (A9803a). When the calculation result of the total combination ratio exceeds the reference value (70%), a warning display for turning on the first combination ratio warning display section 844 (LED) is set. When the calculation result of the continuous character ratio exceeds the reference value (60%), a warning display for turning on the second character ratio warning display portion 846 (LED) is set. When the calculation results of the total combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio exceed the respective reference values, the first combination ratio warning display section 844 (LED) and the second combination ratio warning display section 846 (LED) Set warning display to light both.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the warning display in the segment area. Accordingly, when warning display is performed, the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and / or the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 is turned on.

  In addition, in addition to the 1st character ratio warning display part 844 and the 2nd character ratio warning display part 846, similarly to 2nd Embodiment, the 1st character ratio by which display control is performed by the payout control apparatus 200 A warning display unit and a second accessory ratio warning display unit may also be provided in the payout control device 200. The payout control apparatus 200 calculates an accessory ratio based on the payout command, and displays a first accessory ratio warning display unit and a second accessory ratio warning display when the calculation result of the accessory ratio exceeds a reference value. Turn on the part. You may provide a 1st character ratio warning display part and a 2nd character ratio warning display part in an upper plate unit.

  In addition, a warning notification unit (first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and / or second accessory ratio warning display unit 846) is provided on the display screen of the display device 41 so that the accessory ratio has a reference value (predetermined value). When it exceeds, you may display the warning display which shows that the accessory ratio exceeded the reference value on the warning alerting | reporting part of the display apparatus 41. FIG. In this case, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the accessory ratio calculated by itself based on the payout command (FIG. 101) or the accessory ratio received from the game control device 100 exceeds the reference value. When the object ratio exceeds the reference value, a warning display is displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41. Furthermore, the upper speaker 19a and / or the lower speaker 19b is used as a warning notification unit, and the production control device 300 can be configured to notify by voice from the warning notification unit when the ratio of the accessory exceeds a reference value. is there. Further, when the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value, an external device (such as a hall computer) may be notified via the external information terminal 71 that the accessory ratio has exceeded the reference value.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
In said 5th Embodiment, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can alert | report that the accessory ratio exceeded the predetermined value, when the accessory ratio exceeded the predetermined value. In this way, when it is notified (displayed) that the bonus rate has exceeded a predetermined value, the status of the gaming machine (easy to win the variable prize winning device or the general prize will be displayed) It is possible to determine whether it is easy to win a prize in the mouth 35 or the like. In addition, when it is informed that the ratio of the bonus has exceeded the predetermined value, there is a possibility that the winnings in the general winning opening 35 etc. may be small, so the player will be interested in the general winning opening 35, The fun of gaming is improved.

  The warning display means (the first accessory ratio warning display portion 844 and / or the second accessory ratio warning display portion 846) is controlled by the game control means (game control device 100), and the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined value. Can be displayed. The warning display means can be composed of, for example, a single LED, but a display (director ratio display unit 68) for directly displaying the numerical value of the accessory ratio is not necessary, and the cost can be reduced. The game control means (game control device 100) transmits information related to the prize ball to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the accessory ratio. Can also be displayed. Therefore, the player or the like can confirm the ratio of the actors by numerical values, but the display means controlled by the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is provided in a normal gaming machine, and there is a great increase in cost. Absent.

  The effect control means (the effect control device 300) may display the accessory ratio on the display screen of the display means (the display device 41 or the sub display device 830) only while waiting for a customer (while waiting for a customer). In this case, only the player or the like who is selecting the gaming machine (game table) to be used shows the bonus rate, and the bonus rate is not displayed during the game. Therefore, the display of the accessory ratio does not interfere with the effect of the display device 41 during the game. Further, the control of the effect control means (effect control device 300) is simple.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can display history information (hit history) related to special games for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). is there. In this case, it is possible to display the history information including the ratio of the bonuses divided for each special game consisting of a predetermined number of rounds. In this case, the bonus rate divided for each special game includes the bonus rate measured after resetting at the end of the special game.

  Therefore, by calculating and displaying on the display means the proportions of the features divided for each special game (which is known in advance to be unstable), not the proportions for the entire period. The player or the like tries to determine whether or not the ratio of the accessory is an abnormal value based on his / her knowledge and information other than the reference value, and the erroneous determination is reduced.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fifth embodiments.

  In the sixth embodiment, the number of big winning mouth counts, which is the number of winnings in one big hit round to the big winning mouth of the special variable prize winning device 39, exceeds the upper limit (for example, 9) and exceeds the first threshold (for example, 10 to 10). 11) A first over-winning notification for notifying that an overwinning (so-called over-winning) has occurred is performed. Further, a second for warning an abnormal overwinning when the number of winning prizes exceeds the first threshold and reaches the second threshold (for example, 12 is acceptable even if the first threshold is 10). An over-winning notice is given. The second over-winning notification is a notification different from the first over-winning notification. That is, in the sixth embodiment, over-winning notification is executed in two stages according to the number of large winning mouth counts.

[Over winning notification process]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a procedure of over-winning notification processing according to the sixth embodiment.

  The over-winning notification process is executed by the effect control device 300 every time a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening of the special variable winning device 39. The over-winning notification process is performed when a counting command (big winning mouth count command) is received as information related to winning in the big winning mouth in step B1319 of the single-shot command processing (FIG. 88, FIG. 102). In the information setting process (B1320: FIG. 89), it may be executed after the number of counts in the current round (the number of winning prize counts) is updated by +1 (after step B1403). In addition, the number of counts for winning a prize means the number of winning a prize winning opening in one open state (open state, round). In addition, the number of winning a prize mouth count is equal to the number of receptions of information related to winning a prize winning in the effect control device 300 or the number of transmissions from the game control device 100 in one big hit round.

  The over-winning notification process is performed when a payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) is received as information relating to a winning ball (game ball winning information) in step B1321 of the single-shot command processing (FIG. 102). It may be executed within the ratio setting process (B1322: FIG. 103). That is, instead of the count number in the count information setting process (FIG. 89), the number of payout command receptions corresponding to winning in the current winning prize in the current round can be used as the winning prize count.

  In the sixth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits a payout command (FIG. 101) not only to the payout control device 200 but also to the effect control device 300. That is, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a payout command to be transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 in step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), and executes the effect command setting process (FIG. 59).

  In the over-winning notification process, the production control device 300 first determines whether or not there has been a +1 update of the number of counts (count) in the big prize, that is, whether or not there has been a prize in the big prize (B3801). If there is no +1 update of the number of winning prizes, that is, if there is no winning at the winning prize (the result of B3801 is “N”), the over-winning notification process is terminated. Every time one big hit round is completed, the number of winning prizes is cleared to zero.

  In the case where there is a +1 update of the winning prize count, that is, when there is a winning at the winning prize (the result of B3801 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has the winning prize count equal to or greater than the first threshold value. It is determined whether or not (B3802). Note that the first threshold is a value (for example, 10 to 11) that is larger than the upper limit (for example, 9) of the number of winning prizes. When the number of the big winning count is not equal to or greater than the first threshold (the result of B3802 is “N”), the over winning notification process is terminated.

  The production control device 300 determines that the number of over-winning prizes (the number of excess winning prizes) indicating the number of winnings due to an over-winning is obtained when the number of big winning mouth counts is equal to or greater than the first threshold (the result of B3802 is “Y”). The number of winning balls (14 here) is added (B3803). The over-winning number of payouts is the total number of winning balls paid out by over-winning during one big hit (during a predetermined gaming state). When the big hit ending ends, the number of over-winning winnings is cleared to zero.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of winning prize counts is greater than or equal to the second threshold (B3804). The second threshold value is larger than the first threshold value of the number of winning prizes (for example, 12 is acceptable if the first threshold value is 10). Persons involved in halls such as (game store) staff can be changed.

  If the winning prize count is not greater than or equal to the second threshold (the result of B3804 is “N”), that is, if the winning prize count is greater than or equal to the first threshold and less than the second threshold, the extra prize count is the upper limit. A first over-winning notification for notifying that (for example, 9) has been exceeded (that is, occurrence of over-winning) is executed (B3805). In addition, the process of step B3805 comprises a 1st alerting | reporting means. Further, the upper limit value is the number of the big prize winning counts at which the special variable prize winning device 39 (big winning prize opening) starts to close.

  On the other hand, the production control device 300, when the number of winning prize count is greater than or equal to the second threshold (the result of B3804 is "Y"), that is, the number of winning prize count exceeds the first threshold, and further the second threshold ( For example, when 12) is reached, the second over winning notification for notifying that an abnormal over winning (excess winning) is informed is executed (B3806). Note that the processing in step B3806 constitutes second notification means.

  Even if the player is playing a normal game, the number of winning prizes may accidentally reach the first threshold value. In addition, as an effect during the big hit round, the game ball is allowed to stay for a predetermined period in the stay portion arranged at the upper part of the special variable winning device 39, and then the stay portion is opened to drop the game ball to the special variable winning device 39 all at once. There is a gaming machine configured as described above, but in the case of having such a configuration, the winning prize count number reaches the first threshold value relatively easily. However, in the second threshold, the player performs irregular hitting as a special hitting method, or the game ball with a thread is allowed to enter the special variable winning device 39 and repeatedly put in and out of the big prize opening. It is difficult to reach without fraud.

[Over winning notification mode]
FIG. 110A is a table showing an example of notification modes of the first over-winning notification and the second over-winning notification. For example, the first over-winning notification and the second over-winning notification are executed using sound and / or image display as a notification method.

  In the first over-winning notification, the production control device 300 plays the sound of the character A (for example, “Wow!”) From the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the character A and its lines (for example, “Wow! ! ”) Is displayed. In the second over winning notification, the effect control device 300 plays the voice of the character B (for example, “Koller!”) From the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the character B and its lines (for example, “Koller!”) Are displayed on the display device 41. ) Is displayed as an image. The character A and the character B are different characters. For example, the characters A and B may be the main character and its enemy character in the motif (theme) of the production.

  Thus, the second over-winning notification is a different form of the first over-winning notification, and the first over-winning notification gives the player a comfortable impression, whereas the second over-winning notification is: An unpleasant impression is given to the player as a warning.

  Note that simple sounds or music may be used instead of voice. For example, even if a blessing sound (a sound that generates a pleasant feeling for the player) is notified as the first over winning notification, and a warning sound (a sound that causes an unpleasant emotion to the player) is notified as the second over winning notification. Good.

  FIG. 110B is a table showing a light emission mode of the LED that illuminates the inside of the special winning opening as another example of the notification mode of the first over winning notification and the second over winning notification. The first over-winning notification and the second over-winning notification may be performed by using the light emission of the LED that illuminates the inside of the special winning opening in addition to the sound and the image display as the notification method, or in addition to the sound and the image display. . The LED for illuminating the inside of the special winning opening is provided in the special variable winning device 39 as one of the panel decoration devices 46.

  In the first over winning notification, the production control device 300 emits a yellow LED that illuminates the inside of the big winning mouth in the sense of celebrating the over winning, and in the second over winning notification, in the meaning of warning the over winning. The LED that illuminates the mouth emits red light. In addition, LED which illuminates the inside of a special winning opening normally light-emits white. In another light emitting mode, the LEDs can be blinked in different modes as the first over winning notification or the second over winning notification.

[Screen transition]
FIG. 111 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the sixth embodiment, and is an example of screen transition from the big hit round to the big hit end (end time).

  (S) in FIG. 111 is the same as (e) in FIG. 96A, and shows a screen for the eighth round (8R) of the big hit.

  In (i), in the eighth round (8R), the first winning prize notification is executed because the number of the winning prize count exceeds the upper limit value at which the closing of the winning prize opening starts and reaches the first threshold (for example, 10). Has been. In the first over winning notification, the display device 41 displays the character A (蛙) and its speech (for example, “Wow!”). At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character A (for example, “Wow!”). In addition, as a display or a sound in the first over winning notification, it may be notified more directly that the number of large winning mouth counts has reached the first threshold (for example, “Awesome! Achieved 10!”).

  In (S), the second over-winning notification is executed in the eighth round because the number of the big winning count exceeds the first threshold and reaches the second threshold (for example, 11). In the second over winning notification, the display device 41 displays the character B (snake) and its speech (for example, “Koller!”). At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character B (for example, “collar!”). In addition, as a display or a sound in the second over-winning notification, it may be notified more directly that the number of large winning mouth counts has reached the second threshold (for example, “11 is too much. Coller!”). ).

  (C) in FIG. 111 is the same as (F) in FIG. 96A and shows a screen for the final round (16R) of the big hit.

  (S) in FIG. 111 corresponds to (K) in FIG. 96B. However, in the display device 41 during ending at the end of the special game state (big hit), over winning in the big winning opening during one big hit is made. The number of appearances (number of winning balls) obtained by the above is displayed as “224 cars” as the number of outstanding appearances. Here, “both” means the number, but “both” does not necessarily correspond to the number as long as it reflects the number. For example, “112” can be displayed with “both” as two units.

  In addition, by displaying the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) acquired by over winning, the player can have a superior feeling that a large number of over winnings can be generated, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, hall officials such as hall attendants may confirm that the number of appearances earned by over winning a prize is extremely large, and that the player may be irregularly playing or cheating. Therefore, the player can be marked as an attention target person.

  In addition, on the ending screen of (So), the number of issued balls is displayed as “2016 cars”, which corresponds to 14 prize balls × 9 counts (count number upper limit value) × 16 rounds = 2016. is there. In other words, the acquired number of balls is obtained by subtracting the number of balls (the number of outstanding balls) acquired by over winning a prize from the number of balls (2240) that was finally acquired in one big hit. Further, the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) obtained by winning the general winning opening 35 during the big hit is displayed as “bonus”. Here, 10 winning balls × 3R winnings per 3 times × 16R = 480 are exemplified as the number of balls that have been won by winning the general winning opening 35.

  In FIG. 111 (So), a right-handed display (“right-handed! →”), which is a notification for instructing the player to make a right-hand shot, is omitted in FIG. 96B (ki). Even running. Here, the right-handed display is information related to the player's operation on the operation unit (increasing the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 24), and therefore is displayed on the front side in preference to other displays. Yes. Here, the right-handed display as information related to the player's operation may be displayed darkly, the other displays may be displayed lightly, and other displays may be displayed when the display range of the right-handed display overlaps with other displays. May not be displayed. Moreover, when the display range of another display and right-handed display overlaps, you may make it display those displays alternately. That is, by displaying information to be displayed when various displays are mixed based on a preset priority order, it is possible to prevent a player from misidentifying display contents. Further, the other display is an effect image display in which a shooting star flows or a display in the speech display unit 770a, but may include a display in the character 770 or the big hit history display unit 760.

  (T) in FIG. 111 corresponds to (c) in FIG. 96B and shows a display screen when a specific gaming state (high probability state or short time state) “RUSH” occurs after the end of the big hit state. Right-handed display is executed following (So).

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hole / player setting mode processing (B1010 in FIG. 78) according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 112, an over-winning setting process (B4001) is added to the hole / player setting mode process (FIG. 95) of the third embodiment, but the other steps are the same and are assigned the same step numbers. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  For example, when a predetermined operation of the effect button 25 is performed at a predetermined timing or a predetermined switch on the back side of the gaming machine 10 is operated, the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2703 is “Y ”), The hall setting mode (B2704-B2716) can be entered.

  The effect control device 300 executes an over winning setting process (B4001) following the hall LED brightness adjustment process (B2707), and then executes a liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B2708). In the over-winning setting process, a second threshold value for informing and warning that an abnormal over-winning (excess winning) is set.

[Hall setting mode display screen]
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 in the hall setting mode. By screen drawing based on the screen drawing start setting (B2704), various adjustment displays (meters, gauges, etc.) for performing various adjustments, menu displays for various selections, and the like are displayed on the display device 41.

  The various adjustment displays include a volume setting display 861 for selecting and setting the volume, a brightness setting display 863 for selecting and setting the LED brightness, an over-winning warning setting display 865 for selecting and setting the second threshold, and the liquid crystal brightness ( There is a liquid crystal brightness setting display 867 for selecting and setting the brightness of the display device 41. The menu display includes a power saving setting display 869 for selecting and setting power saving, a logo color setting display 871 for selecting and setting a color of a logo character, etc., and an operation selected to confirm the selection setting. A setting confirmation operation display 873 for confirming the setting when there is a user's setting confirmation operation (an operation for pressing the effect button 25), and a factory default setting display 875 for performing selection setting of whether or not to set to the factory default setting. is there.

  In addition, on the display screen in the hall setting mode, an operation method display 877 suggesting an operation method of the effect button 25 and a fourth symbol setting display 879 for setting the fourth symbol of the special symbol variation display game are displayed. Note that the 4th symbol (the 4th special symbol) is the left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) on the display device 41 in the decorative special symbol variation display game. As a decorative special symbol (identification information) other than symbols, it varies depending on repetition (flashing) of the lit display and the unlit display, indicating that the special-figure display game is being executed. The variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed by the display device 41, other sub display devices, or LED lamps.

  The over-winning warning setting display 865 displays the default value of the second threshold value by displaying only one scale (one step) of the meter by default. Since the first threshold varies depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10, the default value of the second threshold also varies depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10. The effect control device 300 can set the default value and the first threshold value of the second threshold value in the model setting process (B1302 in FIG. 88 or FIG. 102) according to the received model designation command (model information). Thus, since the default value of the second threshold value is a value corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, selection and setting of the second threshold value can be simplified.

  For example, if the first threshold value of over winning is 10, the default value of the second threshold value is 11. The operator (especially a game store staff) displays the over-winning warning setting display 865 in a specific display mode (highlight display (see black frame)) by touching the effect button 25 in the vertical direction. The value of the second threshold is increased or decreased by a direction touch operation. When the effect button 25 is touched in the right direction, the meter displayed is increased to two scales (two steps) in the over-winning warning setting display 865, and the second threshold value is displayed next to the meter. The meter can be adjusted in 1 to 5 scales (1 to 5 steps). When the setting confirmation operation display 873 is selected by a touch operation in the vertical direction of the effect button 25 and the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 (operation of pressing the effect button 25) is performed, the selected second threshold value is confirmed. In this way, the second threshold value can be flexibly set (changed) according to the intention on the game store (hall) side.

  As a modification of the sixth embodiment described above, the following configuration is also possible.

  An over-winning notification (first over-winning notification or second over-winning notification) is executed every time an over-winning occurs. However, when the number of large winning mouth counts reaches the first threshold or the second threshold ( It may be configured that the over-winning notification is executed only (immediately after) and the over-winning notification is not executed when the number of large winning mouth counts is other than the first threshold and the second threshold.

  In a special game state composed of a predetermined number of round games, the first over winning notification or the second over winning notification may be executed only in a specific round (specific round game). In particular, since the time until the ending is short in the final round, it is not necessary to execute the first over winning notification or the second over winning notification so as not to overlap with the ending.

  Also, a payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) can be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the game hall internal management device (hall computer) as an external device, and the over-winning notification process of FIG. 109 can be executed in the external device. . In this case, the first over-winning notification is not necessarily executed in the external device, but the second over-winning notification is executed.

  Furthermore, the over-winning notification of the sixth embodiment can be applied not only to the over-winning of the large winning opening but also to the over-winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening). For example, in a predetermined gaming state (a specific gaming state, a general electric power support state, etc.), the production control device 300 determines that the number of winnings at the second start winning opening is a reference value (during a single opening of the normal variable winning device 37). For example, when the first threshold value (for example, 3) larger than 2) is reached, the first over winning notification is executed, and when the second threshold value (for example, 4) is reached, the second over winning notification is executed. It's okay. The production control device 300 receives the payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) from the game control device 100, and thereby counts the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning port) as a count number. The over-winning notification process shown in FIG. 109 can be applied. As a result, even with the normal variation winning device 37, the over-winning notification that is different in two stages can be executed, and the game can be enhanced, and an abnormal over-winning (over-winning) can be warned.

[Operation and Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 has a predetermined game state (special game state) that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure fluctuation display game or general figure fluctuation display game) is a predetermined result. And a specific gaming state (normal power support state). The variable winning device (the special variable winning device 39 or the normal variable winning device 37) is in an open state (open state, operating state) in a predetermined gaming state, and in the open state is more than a closed state (non-open state, non-operating state). It becomes easier to win game balls. The detecting means (count switch 39a (big prize opening switch) and start opening 2 switch 37a) detects the winning of the game ball to the variable prize winning device.

  Furthermore, the game control means (game control device 100) produces information related to the winning of the game ball (a big winning mouth count command or a payout command) when the detection means detects the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device. It transmits to a control means (effect control apparatus 300). The first notification means (B3805 in FIG. 109) of the effect control means (the effect control device 300) has one game ball winning number (or the number of times the information related to winning the game ball is transmitted) to the variable winning device. When the first threshold value is reached in the open state, a first excess winning notification (first over winning notification) is executed. The second notification means (B3806 in FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300) reaches the second threshold value where the number of winning of the game ball to the variable winning device is larger than the first threshold value in one open state. In such a case, the second excess winning notification (second over winning notification) is executed. For example, the notification mode of the second over-winning notification may be a warning, unlike the notification mode of the first over-winning notification.

  When the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device exceeds the upper limit (specified number, reference value) or the first threshold and exceeds the second threshold, the number of winning is abnormally large and the chance of chance is low . However, with such a configuration, when such an abnormal excess winning (over winning) occurs, a warning can be given by the second excessive winning notification (second over winning notification).

  In the sixth embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) can change the second threshold value according to an operation (such as a touch operation) on the operation means (production button 25) that can be operated by the player. It is. Therefore, the second threshold value for warning can be easily changed according to the intention of the game shop (hall).

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has the number of winnings for the variable winning device equal to or greater than the first threshold value in one predetermined game state (special game state or specific game state). In this case, the number of prize balls paid out is totaled (B3803 in FIG. 109), and the total number of prize balls is displayed on the display means (display device 41) at the timing when the predetermined gaming state ends. Therefore, the player can know how much the over winning can be generated in the predetermined gaming state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, hall officials such as hall attendants may be playing irregularities or cheating if the total number indicating the number of balls earned by over winning is extremely large. Can recognize gender.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control device 300 changes the effect mode of the decoration special figure change display game as the effect during change (change effect) by the above-described change effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92). Set to include (sway fluctuation). The variation effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) executed by the effect control device 300 constitutes a temporary stop execution unit.

  FIG. 114 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol (identification information: left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) in the special symbol variation display game according to the seventh embodiment. At the start of the decorative special symbol variation display game, the left symbol 891 (first special symbol), the right symbol 892 (second special symbol), and the middle symbol 893 (third special symbol) all start to vary. Then, after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the left symbol 891 temporarily stops, and the temporarily stopped left symbol (first stop symbol) undergoes fluctuation fluctuation that is shaken by the vibration operation. Thereafter, the fluctuation fluctuation is a notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state when the right symbol 892 stops. For example, the reach is generated by increasing the fluctuation width (motion width) of the fluctuation after the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped compared with the case where the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is stopped without the reach. The player is informed that there is a possibility of doing so.

  Next, after elapse of a predetermined time Tb from the start of fluctuation, the right symbol 892 temporarily stops and reaches a reach state, and both the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 (second stop symbol) are shaken by the vibration operation. Perform shaking fluctuations. Thereafter, after a predetermined time Tc has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the middle symbol 893 temporarily stops and enters a symbol determination waiting state, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 (first (3 stop symbols) are shaken by the vibration action. Then, after a predetermined time Td elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the swing fluctuation is finished, the three stop symbols are completely stopped and the symbol is fixed, and the result of the special special symbol variation display game (stop symbol) is the jackpot result (special result mode) ) Or the final result.

  When the symbol is not fixed, re-variation may be started before the predetermined time Td elapses to be a pseudo continuous notice. In particular, in the pseudo continuous notice, the re-variation symbol may be temporarily stopped as the middle symbol 893. In the pseudo-continuous notice (pseudo-continuous production), the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stopped) in a stop mode other than the special result mode, and then pseudo-variation (re-variation) is repeated, resulting in multiple variations. The effect is as if the display game is being played continuously.

  After the symbol determination timing Td when the symbol is fixed, the time (period) for displaying the determined decorative special symbol is the symbol stop display time (for example, the time from Td until the next decorative special symbol variation display game is started, etc.) For example, 600 msec). In the present embodiment, the time (Td−Tc) in the symbol determination waiting state from the middle symbol stop timing Tc at which the middle symbol 893 temporarily stops to the symbol determination timing Td is set longer than the symbol stop display time. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have enough expectation to change again in the symbol determination waiting state.

  FIG. 115 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the seventh embodiment, from the temporary stop (reach notice state) of one symbol of (na) to the occurrence of reach (d). It is an example of the screen transition which shows the mode of the decoration special figure change display game to the temporary stop (symbol decision waiting state) of three symbols of (nu) through.

  115 (na) corresponds to immediately after the elapse of the predetermined time Ta, and in the first temporary stop state, only the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped due to fluctuations and the reach notice is started. At the time of this reach notice, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 undergoes fluctuation fluctuation (vibration operation) with a large operation width V1 (first operation width). Since the movement width (amplitude) of the left symbol 891 is large, the player can pay attention and know enough what symbol the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped to reach.

  Note that the left symbol 891 fluctuates only in the vertical direction (vertical direction) around the reference position, but instead has a large operating width (amplitude) W1 only in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). You may also perform fluctuations of shaking. The operation width W1 in the left-right direction may be the same as or different from the operation width V1 in the up-down direction. Further, when the left symbol 891 vibrates in both the up-down direction and the left-right direction, the vibration may be changed in an oblique direction with the phases of vibration in the up-down direction and the left-right direction being the same phase or opposite phases. Further, the left symbol 891 can also move in a circular or elliptical shape by shifting the phase of vibration in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction from the same phase or opposite phase.

  115 (d) corresponds to immediately after the elapse of the predetermined time Tb, and in the second temporary stop state, the right symbol 892 temporarily stops following the left symbol 891, and reach occurs. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 vibrate with the second operating width (V2 or W2) to cause fluctuation. Since the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 are operating with fluctuations in shaking, the player can be notified that the temporary symbol is not completely stopped.

  The mode of fluctuation fluctuation (the direction of fluctuation fluctuation and the movement width of each symbol) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 may be the same or different. If they are the same, the interest of the game is enhanced by the sense of cooperation between the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892, and if they are different, the player can be surprised.

  The movement width V2 in the vertical direction of the symbol (or the movement width W2 in the horizontal direction) when the reach occurs is the movement width V1 in the vertical direction of the symbol (or the movement width W1 in the horizontal direction at the time of the reach notice of (na)). ) (V1> V2, W1> W2). Therefore, the fluctuation fluctuation in (d) does not disturb the reach production of movies and the like.

  115 (n) corresponds to immediately after the elapse of the predetermined time Tc, and as a third temporary stop state, the middle symbol 893 also temporarily stops following the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892, and the three symbols are displayed. Start shaking fluctuation. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 vibrate with a third movement width (V3 or W3) to cause fluctuations. The mode of fluctuation fluctuations of all the temporarily stopped symbols (the direction of fluctuation fluctuation of each symbol, the operation width, etc.) may be the same or different. The third action width may be set according to whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit). For example, the third action width may be set to be larger when the result of the decorative special figure variation display game is out of the game than when the big hit. That is, in this case, even in the event of a loss, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation that re-variation will be performed and improve the interest of the game.

  The movement width V3 in the vertical direction (or movement width W3 in the horizontal direction) of the symbol in the symbol determination waiting state is the movement width V1 in the vertical direction of the symbol (or the movement width in the horizontal direction) at the time of (na) reach notice. W1) is smaller than (V1> V3, W1> W3), and is equal to or smaller than the movement width V2 in the vertical direction of the symbol (or the movement width W2 in the horizontal direction) when the reach of (D) occurs (V2 ≧ V3). , W2 ≧ W3).

  As described above, the temporary stop execution means (variable effect setting process or the like) has a second temporary stop in which the number of pieces of identification information to be temporarily stopped is larger than that of the first temporary stop after the first temporary stop (previous temporary stop). A stop (later temporary stop) is executed, and the width of the identification information in the first temporary stop can be set larger than the width of the identification information in the second temporary stop. The first temporary stop (previous temporary stop) is a temporary stop executed first. If the second temporary stop (subsequent temporary stop) is the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 115), 1 is used. This corresponds to the temporary stop ((N) in FIG. 115). The first temporary stop corresponds to the first temporary stop or the second temporary stop ((n) (d) of FIG. 115) if the second temporary stop is the third temporary stop ((n) of FIG. 115).

  As described above, the seventh embodiment embodies the following invention.

(1) A display device that can display a variable display game (decorative special symbol variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) in a variable manner, and an effect that can control the display of the variable display game on the display device In a gaming machine equipped with a control means,
The effect control means includes temporary stop execution means capable of executing a temporary stop in which at least one identification information is vibrated and displayed on the display device a plurality of times in one variation display game (see FIG. 92). B1905, FIG. 114, FIG. 115),
The temporary stop execution means performs a second temporary stop (for example, FIG. 115 (FIG. 115)) after the first temporary stop (for example, (N) in FIG. 115), the number of identification information to be temporarily stopped is larger than the first temporary stop. (D) or (nu)) is executed, and the width (amplitude V1) of the identification information in the first temporary stop is set larger than the width (amplitude V2 or V3) of the identification information in the second temporary stop. A gaming machine characterized by being capable.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a pseudo continuous effect that repeats a temporary stop and a pseudo change after the temporary stop in the display device.

  (3) The production control means sets the vibration width of the identification information in the temporary stop according to whether or not the variable display game has a special result (big hit) (1) or ( A gaming machine according to 2).

[Operations and effects of the seventh embodiment]
In said 7th Embodiment, the width | variety to which the identification information vibrates is the 2nd temporary stop performed after a 1st temporary stop rather than the 1st temporary stop (for example, (n) of FIG. 115) performed previously. It becomes smaller (for example, (D) or (N) in FIG. 115). Therefore, toward the end (decision of the identification information) to the decoration special figure variation display game, the width of the oscillation of the identification information in the temporary stop state can be reduced step by step, and an unprecedented production can be performed, The fun of gaming is improved. In the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the interest of the game without considering the oscillation width of the identification information in the temporarily stopped state.

[Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment]
With reference to FIG. 116 and FIG. 117, the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 116 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special map fluctuation display game according to the first modification. FIG. 117 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the first modification. 117 (d) and (nu) in FIG. 117 are the same as (d) and (nu) in FIG.

  In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, an example in which the reach expands to the SP reach is shown. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), at the time Tba from the start of fluctuation, the right symbol 892 temporarily stops and enters a reach state. Thereafter, at time Tbb, the reach develops to SP reach. After SP reach development, in order to display the SP reach effect (movie etc.) at the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 are respectively shown in the upper left and upper right as shown in FIG. Move to the corner. Then, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 moved to the corner are changed from the normal mode to the special mode so as to erase the other parts while leaving only the numerical part, and swing fluctuation is performed in the temporary stop state. In other words, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 positioned in the corner are displayed in a reduced size special mode smaller than the normal size normal mode (FIG. 117D) and temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (N), at the intermediate symbol temporary stop timing Tc, the three symbols temporarily stopped after the SP reach is finished to oscillate and swing. Here, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 have returned to the normal size.

  Here, the variable effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) executed by the effect control device 300 constitutes identification information changing means capable of changing the identification information (decoration special symbol) from the normal mode to the special mode. . Then, the identification information changing means (variation effect setting process or the like) executes the first temporary stop (previous temporary stop) before the identification information is changed to the special mode, and after the identification information is changed to the special mode. A second temporary stop (subsequent temporary stop) is executed. Therefore, in the time between the first temporary stop and the second temporary stop, the interest of the game can be enhanced by changing the identification information (decoration special symbol), and a special effect (SP reach effect, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Space to display can be made free.

  By the way, in this modification, the first temporary stop (the previous temporary stop) corresponds to the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 117), and the second temporary stop (the subsequent temporary stop) is the third temporary stop. This corresponds to the stop ((nu) in FIG. 117). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first temporary stop (previous temporary stop) is made to correspond to the first temporary stop ((n) in FIG. 115), and the second temporary stop (subsequent temporary stop) is set to the second or third time. You may make it respond | correspond to the temporary stop of the 1st time ((d) (nu) of FIG. 117).

  Note that the time (Td−Tc) in the symbol determination waiting state is set longer than the time (Tbb−Tba) from time Tba to time Tbb. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have enough expectation to change again in the symbol determination waiting state.

  Also, in FIG. 116, the operation width (V1, V2, W1, W2, V3, W3) in the fluctuation fluctuation of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and / or the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 is set. The larger the value, the shorter the time (period) during which the fluctuations continue may be set. On the contrary, the time (period) during which the fluctuation fluctuation continues may be set longer as the movement width in the fluctuation fluctuation is smaller. For example, the duration of the fluctuation fluctuation is lengthened in inverse proportion to the movement width in the fluctuation fluctuation. That is, when the fluctuation movement of the fluctuation is large, the player's expectation that the fluctuation of the decorative special symbol will continue is high, so that the fluctuation fluctuation time is set short. When the fluctuation movement of the fluctuation is small, the expectation that the fluctuation will continue is lowered. Therefore, the fluctuation fluctuation time is set longer. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the jackpot while adjusting the symbol determination timing as appropriate so that the jackpot player expects the jackpot.

[Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment]
With reference to FIG. 118 and FIG. 119, the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 118 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game according to the second modification. FIG. 118A shows a case where the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit. (B) shows the case of out-of-range fluctuation in which the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of place. FIG. 119 is a display screen of the display device 41 in the symbol determination waiting state in the modified example 2, and (N-1) shows a case where the result of the special display variation display game is a big hit, (N-2) Indicates a case where the result of the decoration special figure variation display game is out of place. Note that (nu-1) and (nu-2) in FIG. 119 correspond to (nu) in FIG.

  When the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game is out of the big hit, the movement time of fluctuation fluctuation from the temporary stop of the middle symbol until the symbol decision timing (period of symbol decision waiting state) May be lengthened and / or the operating width of the fluctuation in the operating time may be increased. Therefore, even in the case of a loss, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that re-variation will be performed and to improve the interest of the game.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 118, when the symbol determination timing when the result of the special symbol variation display game is a big hit is different from the time Tda and Tdb, respectively, (Tdb-Tc) may be longer than the period (Tda-Tc) in the symbol determination waiting state in the case of a big hit. As shown in (nu-1) and (nu-2) of FIG. 119, in the symbol determination waiting state, the operation width of the fluctuation fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol is the operation width V4, W4 when it is out of place. It may be larger than the operation widths V3 and W3 for the big hit (V4> V3, W4> W3). Note that the operating widths V4 and W4 in the case of the detachment may be larger than the operating widths V2 and W2 in the reach state (V4> V2, W4> W2), or may be less than or equal to the operating widths V2 and W2 in the reach state ( V4 ≦ V2, W4 ≦ W2).

  In addition, as shown in (nu-3) and (nu-4) in FIG. 120, the modified example 2 may be applied to a big win without re-lottery and a big win with re-lottery. That is, even if the case of (nu-1) (nu-2) in FIG. 119 that is out of the big win is replaced with the big win without re-lottery and the big win with re-lottery, Good. In addition, the re-lottery is, for example, to change the temporary jackpot symbol (or probability variable big hit symbol) temporarily suspended once to change the probability big hit symbol (or normal big hit symbol) by re-variation when winning the re-lottery. Say.

  In FIG. 120 (No. 3), the probability variation jackpot symbol is displayed as, for example, “7, 7, 7”, and in FIG. 120 (No. 4), the normal jackpot symbol is displayed as, for example, “2, 2, 2”. Has been. In the symbol determination waiting state, the movement width of the fluctuation fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol is larger in the operation widths V4 and W4 in the case of big win with re-lottery than in the case of big hit without re-lottery. It may be increased (V4> V3, W4> W3). Thereby, in the case of a big hit with re-lottery, the player can be notified of the possibility of re-variation due to re-lottery.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 133. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment.

  FIG. 121A is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 according to the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, the CPU 111 a is shown as the CPU core 102. The CPU core 102 is configured as a Z80 CPU. In the eighth embodiment, the CPU core 102 has a register configuration different from that of the related art (for example, JP2013-233285A).

  121A has a W register 1201A, an A register 1202A, a B register 1204A, a C register 1205A, a D register 1207A, an E register 1208A, an H register 1210A, and an L register each having an 8-bit width. 1211A is provided.

  These general-purpose registers can be used as a WA register 1203A (pair register, register pair) having a 16-bit width by combining the W register 1201A and the A register 1202A. Similarly, a BC register 1206A (pair register, register pair) that combines the B register 1204A and C register 1205A, a DE register 1209A (pair register, register pair) that combines the D register 1207A and E register 1208A, and an H register 1210A It is also possible to use an HL register 1212A (pair register, register pair) that combines the L register 1211A and the L register 1211A.

  Further, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) includes an IX register 1231a and an IY register 1232a each having a width of 16 bits. The IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a are used as indexes when an instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 described later accesses data. As will be described later, the IY register 1232a can be used as a head address specifying register for setting the head address of the RAM 111c (working area storage means) in the address space (or memory space).

  These general-purpose registers form one general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 0) 1220A. On the other hand, the CPU core 102 includes another general-purpose register group (register group in register bank 1) 1220B having the same (or similar) configuration as the general-purpose registers included in the register group 1220A in register bank 0.

  The register group 1220B of the register bank 1 includes W registers 1201B to 1211B having the same functions as the W registers 1201A to L1112A of the register bank 0. These registers can also be used as 16-bit registers as the WA register 1203B to HL register 1212B, like the register bank 0. The register group 1220B of the register bank 1 includes an IX register 1231b and an IY register 1232b having the same functions as those of the IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a.

  Further, the CPU core 102 includes a flag register 1200 having a width of 8 bits.

  The flag register 1200 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 121B, but stores the calculation result using the register. Further, a register bank selector (RBS) 1301 (described later with reference to FIG. 121B) of the flag register 1200 selects which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is to be used as an operation target.

  Each register belonging to the register group selected by the register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is used for calculation by an instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 described later. On the other hand, each register belonging to the unselected register group holds a value until the value of the register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is changed and becomes a selection target.

  The CPU core 102 includes a DP register 1230. The DP register 1230 can be used, for example, to store the head address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in the address space (or memory space). In the data area, various tables and data are stored.

  Further, the CPU core 102 includes an SP register 1233 that functions as a stack pointer and a PC register 1234 that functions as a program counter, each having a width of 16 bits.

  The stack pointer 1233 indicates the position of an area when data is stored (or taken out) in the stack area. The program counter 1234 indicates an address where an instruction executed by an instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 described later is stored.

  The instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 executes a game control program and performs arithmetic processing using each register in the CPU core 102. Specifically, the ROM 111b reads out data stored at the address indicated by the program counter 1234, and regards the read data as a code, and executes an instruction corresponding to the code. The instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 interprets and executes instructions included in a predetermined instruction set.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) itself is exemplified as the arithmetic processing means. However, in the CPU core 102, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 mainly serves as the arithmetic processing means. Yes. The RAM 111c serves as update information storage means for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means (CPU 111a, CPU core 102), and can store stored information even if a power failure occurs due to a backup power source. It becomes a proper holding storage means.

  Note that the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 corresponds to the instruction of the game control program (game control program) via the access circuit 1243, the address bus 721, and the data bus 722, and the ROM 111b (user program) outside the CPU core 102. (ROM), RAM 111c (user work RAM), and other circuits may be exchanged. The address bus 721 is configured by a 16-bit signal line, and the CPU core 102 outputs an address designated by the address bus 721 and is stored at an address designated by the data bus 722 (an address of the ROM 111b, RAM 111c, etc.). Input and output data.

  Further, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 stores the address where the next instruction is stored in the program counter 1234 every time one instruction of the ROM 111b is executed one by one. In this way, the game control program is sequentially executed by repeatedly executing the instruction and updating the program counter 1234. When an interrupt signal from an interrupt control circuit 724 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is received, the value of the program counter 1234 is switched to a preset interrupt processing address value.

  Data is transmitted to and received from the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 and the registers included in the CPU core 102 through the internal bus 1235.

  The initial value setting circuit 1241 is a circuit that sets an initial value in each register included in the CPU core 102 in hardware.

  When the built-in reset circuit 1240 receives a reset signal from the security circuit 725 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, the built-in reset circuit 1240 activates the initial value setting circuit 1241, and sets the initial value in each register included in the CPU core 102. Then, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 is activated.

  FIG. 121B is a view for explaining the configuration of the flag register 1200 according to the eighth embodiment. The value of each bit of the flag register 1200 is set by the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 121B.

  The interrupt master permission flag (IMF) 1300 is a flag for setting permission / inhibition of interrupt processing by an interrupt signal, and is permitted when set (value is “1”) and prohibited when cleared (value is “0”). .

  The register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is a flag for selecting which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is used when the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 121A performs arithmetic processing. Is "1"), the register group 1220B of the register bank 1 is selected, and the register group 1220A of the register bank 0 is selected by clearing (value is "0").

  The overflow flag (VF) 1302 is set (value is “1”) when a digit overflow (overflow) occurs in a general-purpose register to be calculated by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value is “0”) in other cases. .

  The sign flag (SF) 1303 is set (value is “1”) when the most significant bit of the calculation target general-purpose register is “1” by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value is “0”) in other cases. The

  The half carry flag (HF) 1304 is set (value is “1”) when carry (carry) or borrow (borrow) occurs in the 4th bit of the general-purpose register to be calculated as a result of 8-bit operation. In other cases, it is cleared (value is “0”).

  The carry flag (CF) 1305 is set (value is “1”) when a carry (carry) or borrow (borrow) is generated by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value is “0”) in other cases. .

  The zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set (value is “1”) when a predetermined calculation result is “0”, and is cleared (value is “0”) in other cases.

  The jump status flag (JF) 1307 is set (value is “1”) when at least one of the carry flag (CF) 1305 or the zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set. Alternatively, even when the arithmetic processing is not performed, when the value of the general-purpose register becomes “00h”, it is set (value is “1”). When none of these conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared (value is “0”).

  When the CPU core 102 is reset, all the bits of the flag register are set to 0.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating a power-on process performed by each device (game control device 100, payout control device 200, and effect control device 300) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on in the eighth embodiment. .

  Specifically, FIG. 122 (A) is a flowchart of the power-on process of the game control apparatus 100, and FIG. 122 (B) is a flowchart of the power-on process of the payout control apparatus 200. C) is a flowchart of power-on processing of the effect control device 300.

  First, the processing when the game control device 100 is turned on (FIG. 122A) will be described. This power-on process is not executed by the game control program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3), but executed by various hardware (hardware around the CPU core 102) provided in the game control device 100. It is processing.

  First, the game control device 100 receives the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 (A10101).

  This reset signal is sent from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 125 to a security circuit 725 (see FIG. 121A) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and a RAM access restriction circuit (see FIG. 121) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111. (Not shown) and a reset terminal of a serial communication circuit (not shown) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111. Note that the gaming microcomputer 111 transmits data to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication using a serial communication circuit. Specifically, when the power is turned on, a reset signal is input to these reset terminals by applying a voltage equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) for a predetermined time. As a result, the reset signal is not input.

  When a reset signal is input from the power supply apparatus 400, the security circuit 725 continues to output the reset signal to the reset terminal of the CPU core 102 until the security check process described later is completed, and waits for the CPU core 102 to start up. Let

  In addition, the reset signal is sent from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 125 to various input ports (first input port 122 and the like) and various output ports (second output port 134, third output port 135-1, 135-2, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137).

  When a reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit, the voltage levels of the input terminal and the output terminal of the serial communication circuit are controlled to be low, and the serial communication circuit is initialized by hardware ( A10102). When reset signals are input to the reset terminals of the various output ports, all are set to 0, and the various output ports are initialized by hardware (A10102).

  Next, a RAM write prohibition state in which writing to the RAM 111c is restricted by the RAM access restriction circuit provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 (A10103). By generating the RAM write prohibition state when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the RAM 111c from being updated at an incorrect timing.

  Next, the security circuit 725 (FIG. 121A) to which the reset signal is input executes a self-diagnosis process (A10104). The self-diagnosis process is a process for determining whether or not the security circuit 725 has been initialized.

  If it is determined by the self-diagnosis process that the security circuit 725 has been initialized, the security circuit 725 executes a security check process (A10105). The security check process is a process of determining the validity of the program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3) using the validity confirmation information stored in the HW parameter ROM (not shown) of the gaming microcomputer 111. is there.

  When the security check process is executed in the process of step A10105, the process proceeds to the game control apparatus program start preparation process. At this time, the security circuit 725 stops the reset signal output to the reset terminal of the CPU core 102, thereby starting the CPU core 102. Therefore, the game control device program start preparation process is executed by the CPU core 102. The game control device program start preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the power-on process (FIG. 122 (B)) of the payout control apparatus 200 will be described. The payout control apparatus 200 includes various input ports, various output ports, and the like in addition to the microcomputer having the same configuration as the game microcomputer 111.

  First, the payout control apparatus 200 receives the reset signal output from the power supply apparatus 400 via the Schmitt buffer 132 (A10111). Note that the process of step A10111 is the same as the process of step A10101.

  When a reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit of the payout control device 200, the voltage levels of the input terminal and output terminal of the serial communication circuit are controlled to be low, and the serial communication circuit is initialized by hardware. (A10112). When reset signals are input to the reset terminals of the various output ports of the payout control device 200, all are set to 0, and the various output ports are initialized by hardware (A10112).

  Next, a RAM write prohibition state in which writing to the RAM 214 is restricted by the RAM access restriction circuit 640 of the payout control device 200 occurs (A10113). Note that the specific description of the process of step A10113 is the same as the process of step A10103.

  Next, the security circuit 725 of the payout control apparatus 200 to which the reset signal is input executes self-diagnosis processing (A10114). Note that the specific description of the process of step A10114 is the same as the process of step A10104.

  When it is determined by the self-diagnosis process that the security circuit 725 has been initialized, the security circuit 725 executes a security check process (A10115). Note that the specific description of the process of step A10115 is the same as the process of step A10105.

  Then, the payout control device 200 executes an initialization process at power-on (A10116). The initialization process when the power is turned on is a process for initializing the RAM and the like, and is executed by the CPU of the microcomputer of the payout control device 200. Further, before the RAM is initialized, the RAM write prohibition state generated in the processing of step A10113 is canceled, and the RAM becomes a RAM writable state.

  Next, the payout control device 200 generates a state in which a command from the game control device 100 can be received (A10117). Then, the CPU of the payout control device 200 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (A10118). If it is determined in step A10118 that the command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 is not an initialization command (the result of A10118 is “N”), the process waits until the initialization command is fetched.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (the result of A10118 is “Y”), the payout control device 200 executes an initialization process at the start of communication ( A10119), the process proceeds to the payout control apparatus main process.

  Next, the power-on process (FIG. 122C) of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) will be described.

  First, the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) receives the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 (A10121). Note that the process of step A10121 is the same as the process of step A10101.

  When the reset signal is input to the effect control device 300, the output port and the serial communication circuit (interface chip (command I / F) 331) of the effect control device 300 are initialized by hardware (A10122).

  Then, the effect control device 300 executes an initialization process when the power is turned on (A10123). The initialization process at power-on is a process for initializing the RAM 322 and the like, and is executed by the CPU 311.

  Next, the production control device 300 generates a state in which a command from the game control device 100 can be received (A10124). And it is determined whether the instruction | command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 is an initialization instruction | command (A10125).

  When it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is not the initialization command (the result of A10125 is “N”), the effect control device 300 waits until the initialization command is fetched.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (the result of A10125 is “Y”), the performance control device 300 performs initialization processing at the start of communication. Is executed (A10126), and the flow shifts to the production control device main process.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating the game control device program start preparation process of the eighth embodiment. The first half of the game control device program start preparation process (until the reset address is set in the program counter 1234) is not a process executed by the game control program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3), but a CPU core. 102 is a process executed by the initial value setting circuit 1241 (see FIG. 121A) included in 102.

  When the CPU core 102 receives the reset signal from the security circuit 725, the internal value reset circuit 1240 operates the initial value setting circuit 1241. At this time, the built-in reset circuit 1240 causes the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 to wait until the initial value setting circuit 1241 sets initial values in the respective registers.

  When the initial value setting circuit 1241 starts operation, the initial value “29FFh” is set in the stack pointer 1233, the initial value “2800h” (the start address of the RAM 111c) is set in the IY registers 1232a and 1232b, and the initial value is set in the DP register 1230. The value “5000h” (the start address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b) is set, the reset address “4000h” is set in the HL register 1212A, and the value “00h” (16 bits) is set in the other registers. A value of “0000h” is set in the register (A10201). The reset address may be “0000h”.

  Next, the initial value setting circuit 1241 sets a value of “4000h”, which is a reset address, in the program counter 1234 (A10202). As a result, an initial value is set in each register. Next, when the built-in reset circuit 1240 operates the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 that has been waiting, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 indicates the address indicated by the program counter 1234 (corresponding to the reset address of the ROM 111b in which the game control program is stored). Start program execution from Processing after the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 starts executing the program will be described in the game control device main processing of FIG. 124A.

  124A and 124B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main process according to the eighth embodiment. The main process is executed by the game control device 100. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the same process as the main process (FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) based on 1st Embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  124A and 124B, steps A1004, A1013, A1015, A1034, A1038, A1039, and A1045 of FIGS. 5A and 5B are deleted, and steps A10301-A10304, A10401-A10405 are newly provided.

  In step A10301, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address (here, “2800h”) of the RAM 111c in a predetermined register (IY register 1232a). In step A 10302, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address (here, “5000h”) of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111 b in a predetermined register (DP register 1230).

  In this way, by setting the start address of the RAM 111c or the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b as a reference address in a predetermined register, address designation in subsequent codes (instructions) can be made relative to the reference address or offset address. (Difference with respect to the reference address) may be sufficient. In this case, if the relative address or offset address is limited to a range that can be expressed by 1 byte (corresponding to the lower address of the 2-byte address “xxxxh”), the number of bytes of the code (machine language instruction) decreases (for example, As a result, the entire program becomes compact and the storage capacity required for storing in the ROM 111b is also reduced.

  Note that the processing from step A1001 to A10302 can be omitted because it is executed by the hardware (initial value setting circuit 1241) in the game control device program start preparation processing (FIG. 123), but software ( By executing the setting process even in the program), it becomes possible to operate the CPU 111a normally even in a noisy environment.

  In step A10303, the game control apparatus 100 sets a write-enabled state of a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM. In the eighth embodiment, the RWM may always be in a read permission state.

  In step A10304, the game control device 100 sets a serial communication circuit (used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) of the game microcomputer 111.

  The game control device 100 executes the initial value random number update process (A1035) and the random number update process 2 (A10402) after prohibiting the interruption in step A10401. The random number update process 2 (FIG. 126) of the eighth embodiment is a process of updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game, but is different from the random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. It will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. (A1037 result is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036 (A10404). . If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A10404 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, the game control device 100 outputs all outputs when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A10404 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Off data is output to the port (A1040).

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1037 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns to the processing of step A10401 after prohibiting the interrupt (A10403) and prohibits the interrupt. That is, if no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing, the random number update processing 2, and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeatedly performed during the interrupt prohibition period from step A10401 to A10403.

  During the interrupt-prohibited period when interrupts are prohibited, there is no change or destruction of information in the register (data stored in the register) due to interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 125), and initial value random number update processing And the random number update process 2 and the power failure monitoring signal can be checked normally. On the other hand, the transition period from step A10403 to A10401 is the interrupt permission period during which interrupts are permitted. However, no processing other than interrupt processing is executed during this interrupt permission period, so the information in the register is changed by interrupt processing. There is no problem even if there is.

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 5B), when the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check are executed during the interrupt permission period (steps A1034 to A1039), the interrupt process causes the contents of the register to be updated. In order to prevent the information from being changed or destroyed, the register bank 0 used in the main process is switched to the register bank 1 used in the interrupt process (A1003, A1301). Information on registers used in the processing is saved (PUSH) in the stack area of the RAM 111c. However, in the eighth embodiment, it is not necessary to switch register banks or save register information during interrupt processing. That is, in the eighth embodiment, there is basically no problem using only the register bank 0.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the eighth embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed by the game control device 100. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the same process as the timer interruption process (FIG. 8) based on 1st Embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 125, A1301 and A1302 in FIG. 8 are deleted, and steps A10501 and A10502 are newly provided.

  In step A10501, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address “2800h” of the RAM 111c in a predetermined register (IY register) in the same manner as in step A10301. In step A10502, the game control apparatus 100 sets the head address “5000h” of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register (DP register) in the same manner as in step A10302. Thus, by setting the start address of the RAM 111c in the address space (or memory space) or the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b as a reference address in a predetermined register, address designation in the subsequent code (instruction) can be performed. In some cases, the relative address or the offset address (difference with respect to the reference address) from the reference address can be used, and the number of bytes (storage capacity) of the code (machine language instruction) decreases.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number update processing 2 according to the eighth embodiment. The random number update process 2 is executed by the game control device 100. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3. The random number update process 2 according to the eighth embodiment is executed by an unprecedented instruction (code) (see FIG. 141 described later) included in an instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242. This is simplified from the random number update processing 2 of the embodiment (FIG. 14).

  First, the game control apparatus 100 increments the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (increases by 1) and updates it (A10601). Here, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 has a data size of 2 bytes and circulates in the range of 0 to 65535.

  Next, the game control device 100 increments (updates by 1) the variable pattern random number 2 and updates it (A10602), and then updates the variable pattern random number 3 by decrementing (decrease by 1) (A10603). The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is 1 byte, circulates in the range from 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching 240. The fluctuation pattern random number 3 is 1 byte, circulates in the range from 238 to 0, and returns to 238 after reaching 0.

  Since all of the variation pattern random number 1 to the variation pattern random number 3 of the seventh embodiment are not provided with an upper limit value, they are random numbers whose values circulate.

  In this specification, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are stored in a storage area (random number generation area) of the RAM 111c, which is an information storage unit for storing various types of information. It may be stored in the information storage unit.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing according to the eighth embodiment. The hard random number acquisition process is executed by the game control device 100. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the same process as the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 23) based on 1st Embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 127, step A10701 is newly provided instead of step A2805 in FIG. In step A10701, the address of the target hard random number latch register is prepared. The hard random number latch register is provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and holds a hard random number (a big hit random number here) generated by a random number generation circuit. The address of the hard random number latch register is used to extract a big hit random number in the special figure start port switch common processing (FIG. 128) described later.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process according to the eighth embodiment. The special figure start port switch common process is executed by the game control device 100. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the same process as the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 24) which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  128, step A 10801 is provided instead of steps A 2901 to A 2904 in FIG. 24, step A 10802 is provided instead of A 2909 in FIG. 24, and step A 10803 is provided instead of A 2910 and A 2911 in FIG. Step A10804 is provided instead of A2913 and A2914.

  In step A 10801, the game control apparatus 100 updates the start port signal output count by +1 (increases by 1) with a predetermined value (255 in this case) as an upper limit. As will be described later, the process of step A 10801 is executed using only one instruction (an instruction that has not been heretofore) provided in the instruction set interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242. In this embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area by +1 update. When the start port signal output count is “255”, the updated value is “0”.

  In step A10802, the game control apparatus 100 extracts a big hit random number from the area of the hard random number latch register address (A10701) prepared in the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127), and saves it in the big hit random number storage area of the RAM 111c.

  In step A10803, the game control device 100 extracts a jackpot symbol random number and saves it in the jackpot symbol random number storage area.

  In step A10804, the game control apparatus 100 extracts a small hit symbol random number and saves it in the small symbol random number storage area.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure hold information determination processing according to the eighth embodiment. The special figure hold information determination process is executed by the game control device 100. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the same process as the special figure reservation information determination process (FIG. 25) which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 129, step A10901 is added to FIG. 25, steps A10902 and A10903 are provided instead of A3007 in FIG. 25, and steps A10904 and A10905 are provided instead of A3012 in FIG.

  In step A10901, the game control device 100 loads a big hit random number from the target area for use in the big hit determination process (A3004). Here, the target area is a random number storage area (special figure 1 reservation storage area or special figure 2 reservation storage area) related to the special figure 1 hold (first start memory) or the special figure 2 hold (second start memory). ) Is the latest pending area.

  In step A10902, the game control device 100 loads a jackpot symbol random number from the target area. Here, the target area is the latest reserved area in the random number storage area related to the hold in FIG. 1 (first start memory) or the hold in FIG. 2 (second start memory). Then, stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A10903).

  In step A10904, the game control apparatus 100 loads a small hit symbol random number from the target area. Here, since there is no small hit in the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the target area is the latest hold in the random number storage area (the special figure 1 hold storage area) related to the hold of the special figure 1 (first start memory). It becomes the area of. Then, stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (A10905).

  130 to 133 are program lists showing a part of the program structure of the game control program executed by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) of the game control apparatus 100 according to the eighth embodiment. Each program list is a list of instructions in an assembly language (source code) corresponding to Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and is stored in the ROM 111b (game control program storage means) except for pseudo instructions (instructions for the assembler). Corresponds one-to-one with machine language instructions (machine codes). Any instruction is included in the instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 as a machine language instruction.

  Instructions (codes) in each program list are described on the left from the “line number” for convenience, “mnemonic” indicating the operation content (operation content) of the instruction, “operand” of the instruction target, and convenience of explanation. It is divided into “comments” attached for the purpose. The instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (from the smallest to the largest) unless there are instructions for calling subroutines, jump instructions (branch instructions), and the like.

  FIG. 130 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the main process (FIG. 124A) according to the eighth embodiment.

  Line number 0510 is an instruction (code) corresponding to A1001 of the main process (FIG. 124A), and interrupts are prohibited (code “DI”).

  Line number 0520 corresponds to A1002 of the main process, and loads the value “29FFh” as a stack pointer into the SP register (code “LD SP, 29FFH”).

  Line number 0530 corresponds to A1003 of the main process, and 0 is loaded to the register bank selector (RBS) (code “LD RBS, 0”). Thereby, register bank 0 is set.

  The line number 0540 corresponds to A10301 of the main process, and “2800h” is loaded as the head address of the RAM 111c into the IY register (code “LD IY, 2800H”).

  The line number 0550 corresponds to A10302 of the main process, and “5000h” is loaded to the DP register as the head address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b (code “LD DP, 5000h”).

  Line numbers 0560 and 0570 correspond to A1005 of the main process. In line number 0560, a numerical value corresponding to the label C_SHOT_NG (numerical value indicating firing stop) is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, C_SHOT_NG”).

  In the row number 0570, the numerical value of the A register is output to the port C_OUT01 (that is, the numerical port corresponding to the label C_OUT01) (code “OUT (C_OUT01), A”).

  The line number 0580 corresponds to A1006 of the main process, and a numerical value is input to the A register from the port C_INPUT1 (that is, the numerically numbered port corresponding to the label C_INPUT1) (code “IN A, (C_INPUT1)”).

  Line number 0610 and line number 0620 correspond to A1031 of the main process (FIG. 124B). In line number 0610, the address (numerical value corresponding to label D_CTCTBL) of the data table (CTCTBL) necessary for starting or using the CTC circuit is set as a relative address (D_CTCTBL-5000H) and loaded into the HL register (code). “LQDD HL, D_CTCTBL-5000H”). The relative address is an address based on the head address “5000h” of the data area for the user program.

  Since the “LQDD” instruction uses a relative address (substantially 1 byte) instead of an absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space as an operand, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction is 1 than that of a normal LD instruction. Decrease by bytes (decrease from 3 bytes to 2 bytes). The relative address is originally 2 bytes, but the mnemonic (machine language instruction part) is made different according to the value of the upper byte of the relative address, so the relative address is actually the lower byte (1 byte). I can show.

  In line number 0620, a subroutine (label P_DEVSET) for setting a device (here, a CTC circuit) is called (code “CALLR P_DEVSET”). The “CALLR” instruction is an instruction that can reduce the number of bytes required from the conventional CALL instruction. Note that the “CALLR” instruction is converted into a 2-byte machine language instruction when calling a process before a predetermined address value (for example, 4C00h), and 3 bytes when calling a process after the predetermined address value. Converted to machine language instruction.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes an “LQDD” instruction or a “CALLR” instruction.

  Line number 0630 and line number 0640 correspond to A 1032 in the main process (FIG. 124B). At line number 0630, the address (numerical value corresponding to label D_RNDSET) of the data table (RNDSET) necessary for starting or using the random number generation circuit is set as a relative address (D_RNDSET-5000H) and loaded into the HL register ( Code "LQDD HL, D_RNDSET-5000H"). The relative address is an address based on the head address “5000h” of the data area for the user program.

  In line number 0640, a subroutine (label P_DEVSET) for setting a device (here, a random number generation circuit) is called (code “CALLR P_DEVSET”).

  Line numbers 0650 to 0730 correspond to A1033 of the main process, and store various initial value random numbers (here, initial values at power-on) in order while updating addresses in a predetermined area of the RAM 111c.

  At line number 0650, a numerical value corresponding to the label R_RNDZINI is loaded into the HL register. The label R_RNDZINI indicates the numerical value of the start address of a predetermined area that stores various initial value random numbers in the RAM 111c.

  In line number 0660, the value (here, the lower byte) of a predetermined register “C_SRND0_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND0_L)”). The predetermined register is the soft random number register 0.

  At line number 0670, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) at the head address of a predetermined area in the RAM as a big hit symbol initial value random number, and then the address in the HL register is updated from the head address to the next address (code “ LQD (HL +), A "). “HL +” means that the address in the HL register is updated to the next address after loading. Since the big hit symbol initial value random number is 1 byte and the A register to be loaded (stored) is also 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  In this “LQD” instruction, a value is stored in an area (in RAM) corresponding to an address (numerical value) set in an HL register (may be another register), and then the value of the HL register is updated (here, +1 update). As a result, values can be continuously stored in a continuous area (in the RAM), and it is not necessary to calculate the storage destination address as in the prior art. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing this “LQD” instruction.

  At line number 0680, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND1_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND1_L)”).

  At line number 0690, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored (stored) in the HL register as the small symbol initial value random number, and then the address in the HL register is set to the next address. ("LQD (HL +), A"). Since the small symbol initial value random number is 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  In the row number 0700, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND2_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND2_L)”).

  At line number 0710, the value of the A register as a random initial value is loaded (stored) in the address area currently stored (stored) in the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code “LQD (HL +), A”). Since the initial value random number per hit is 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  In the row number 0720, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND3_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “INA, (C_SRND3_L)”).

  In line number 0730, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register as a random symbol initial value random number. Here, since there is no initial value random number to be stored next, the address stored in the HL register is not updated (code “LD (HL), A”).

  Line number 0750 is an instruction corresponding to A10401 of the main process, and interrupts are prohibited (code “DI”).

  Line number 0760 is an instruction corresponding to A1035 of the main process, and calls a subroutine (label P_RNDINI) for executing the initial value random number update process (code “CALLR P_RNDINI”).

  Line number 0770 is an instruction corresponding to A10402 of the main process, and calls a subroutine (label P_RNDINC2) for executing random number update process 2 (code “CALLR P_RNDINC2”).

  At line number 0780, the value of the W register is cleared and set to 0 by taking an exclusive OR between the values of the W register (code “XOR W, W”).

  Line numbers 0800 to 0820 correspond to A1037 of the main process, and determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In the line number 0800, a numerical value is input to the A register from the port C_INPUT1 into which the power failure monitoring signal is input (code “IN A, (C_INPUT 1)”).

  In the row number 0810, the logical product of the value of the A register and the value C_PDWNSW (for example, 00000001B in negative logic) indicating that the power failure monitoring signal is OFF is calculated (code “AND A, C_PDWNSW”). The operation result of the logical product of the row number 0810 becomes zero if the power failure monitoring signal is ON (for example, 00000000B in negative logic).

  At line number 0820, if the operation result of line number 0810 is zero (Z) (that is, when a power failure occurs), jump to the address in ROM (address of ROM 111b, branch destination) corresponding to label MAIN90 (conditional branch) Then, the instructions after line number 0860 are executed (code “JR Z, MAIN90”). When the operation result of the line number 0810 is not zero (Z) (that is, when no power failure has occurred), the process proceeds to the instruction of the line number 0830. When the calculation result is zero, the zero flag (ZF) is set.

  Line number 0830 is an instruction corresponding to A10403 of the main process, and interrupts are permitted (code “EI”).

  Line number 0840 corresponds to the transition from A10403 to A10401 of the main process, jumps to the address in ROM (address in ROM 111b) corresponding to label MAIN70, and executes the instruction after line number 0750 (code “JR” MAIN70 ").

  Line numbers 0860 to 0880 correspond to A10404 of the main process, and determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks.

  In line number 0860, when the power failure monitoring signal is in the on state (power failure occurrence state), the value of the W register indicating the number of detections of the on state is updated by 1 (incremented by 1) (code “INC W”).

  In line number 0870, the value of the W register is compared with “2” which is the number of checks (code “CP W, 2”). When the value of the W register is smaller than the number of checks, a carry flag (CF) is set as a comparison operation result (C). At line number 0880, when the carry flag (CF) is set (when the number of ON detections has not reached the number of checks), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label MAIN80, and line number 0800 and thereafter Are executed (code “JRC, MAIN80”). When the carry flag (CF) is not set (when the number of detections of the ON state reaches the number of checks), the process proceeds to line number 0890.

  Line number 0890 corresponds to A1040 of the main process, and calls a subroutine P_OUTCLR that outputs off-data to all output ports (code “CALLR P_OUTCLR”).

  FIG. 131 is a program list showing the program structure of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125) according to the eighth embodiment.

  Line number 1000 is a label P_TINT indicating timer interrupt processing. Line number 1010 corresponds to timer interrupt processing A10501, and “2800h” is loaded as the start address of RAM 111c into the IY register (code “LD IY, 2800H”).

  The line number 1020 corresponds to A10502 of the timer interrupt processing, and “5000h” is loaded as the start address of the ROM data area (for the user program) into the DP register (code “LD DP, 5000H”). The instructions with line numbers 1010 and 1020 can be omitted because they have already been executed in the main process (line numbers 0540 and 0550 in FIG. 130).

  In line numbers 1030 to 1140, subroutines corresponding to steps A1303 to A1314 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125) are called by the “CALLR” instruction. Line number 1150 is a “RETI” instruction for returning from timer interrupt processing to main processing.

  FIG. 132 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) according to the eighth embodiment.

  Line number 1500 is a label (P_SIDESW) corresponding to the start port switch monitoring process, and indicates the ROM address (first address) of the program module corresponding to the start port switch monitoring process. The start port switch monitoring process is a subroutine called by the “CALLR” instruction in the special figure game process (FIG. 21).

  Line number 1510 corresponds to A2701 of the start port switch monitoring process, and the address of the start port 1 winning monitoring table (numerical value corresponding to label D_SIDCHK1) is set as a relative address (D_SIDCHK1-5000H) and loaded into the HL register ( Code "LQDD HL, D_SIDCHK1-5000H"). Thereby, the start port 1 winning monitoring table is prepared.

  The line number 1520 corresponds to A2702 of the start port switch monitoring process, and calls the subroutine (label P_HRNDGET) of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 23) by the “CALLR” instruction (code “CALLR P_HRNDGET”).

  Line number 1530 corresponds to A2703 of the start port switch monitoring process, and when the start start port 36 (start port 1) does not have a start port winning and the carry flag (CF) is not set (in the case of NC). , Jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label SIDESW20 (conditional branch) (code “JRNC, SIDESW20”). The carry flag (CF) is set if there is a start opening prize in step A2806 of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 23).

  Line numbers 1540 and 1550 correspond to A2704 of the start port switch monitoring process. In line number 1540, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of the label C_JTN indicating that the special figure is running short of time (in the normal power support state), and whether they match (T: true) It is determined whether they do not match (F: false) (code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN”). If they match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  The address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is an addition address obtained by adding the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAMEFLG to the value “2800h” of the IY register. The offset address is a relative address (difference address) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. Here, the offset address is limited to a range that can be expressed by 1 byte (corresponding to the lower address of the 2-byte address “xxxxh”), and the code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN” of the line number 1540 is a 3-byte instruction. be able to. Thereby, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes, and the instruction of line number 1540 is a 4-byte instruction.

  In line number 1550, if the special drawing time is short, that is, if the comparison result of line number 1540 is coincident (T), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDESW10 (conditional branch), line number 1590 The following instructions are executed (code “JRS T, SIDESW10”).

  Line number 1560 corresponds to A2705 of the start port switch monitoring process, and loads a right-handed instruction notification command (a numerical value corresponding to label C_RIGHTCOM) into the BC register (code “LD BC, C_RIGHTCOM”).

  Line number 1570 corresponds to A2706 of the start-port switch monitoring process, and calls and executes the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  The line number 1590 corresponds to A2707 of the start opening switch monitoring process, and the address (label D_T1HOINF) of the table for setting the hold information by the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) is set as the relative address (D_T1HOINF-5000H). The HL register is loaded (code “LQDD HL, D_T1HOINF-5000H”).

  Line number 1600 corresponds to A2708 of the start port switch monitoring process, and calls and executes the subroutine (label P_TSIDOSW) of the special-purpose start port switch common process (code “CALLR P_TSIDOSW”).

  FIG. 133A is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 2000 is a label (P_HRNDGET) corresponding to the hard random number acquisition process, and indicates the ROM address (first address) of the program module corresponding to the hard random number acquisition process. The hard random number acquisition process is a subroutine called by the “CALLR” instruction in A2702 and A2710 of the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22).

  The line number 2010 corresponds to A2801 of the hard random number acquisition process, and clears the carry flag (CF) to zero (code “CLR CF”) as no start opening winning information indicating that there is no starting opening winning.

  Line numbers 2020 to 2040 correspond to A2802 of the hard random number acquisition process, and determine whether or not there is an input to the target switch. In line number 2020, the value stored in the address area currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) is loaded into the A register, and then the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code “LD A, (HL +)”). The address currently stored (stored) in the HL register is set by the line number 1510 of the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 132). The value stored in the address area is the switch bit data (determination value other than zero) of the target switch, for example, “00000001B”. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2710.

  In line number 2030, rising information is acquired from an address R_SWCTL + 2 in which rising information is stored in the switch control area in which information related to the target switch is stored, and logical product is obtained with switch bit data (determination value) in the A register. Then, it is determined whether or not the switch is turned on (code “AQND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)”). The switch control area is a storage area for storing detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine for each timer interrupt, and is provided in the RAM 111c in this embodiment. The rising information is information indicating that the target switch has changed from OFF to ON.

  Note that R_SWCTL is the head address of the switch control area, and logic level information described later is stored in the first address R_SWCTL + 1 from the head address, and rising information is stored in the second address R_SWCTL + 2 from the head address. When the target switch changes from OFF to ON, the target bit is changed from 0 to 1 in the 8-bit data of the address R_SWCTL + 2.

  When the target start port (start port 1 or start port 2) has no winning (entry ball) and the target switch is OFF, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the target switch is zero, and the calculation result ( (Logical product) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set. When the rising edge information is the same as the switch bit data (judgment value) (for example, when the bit of the target switch is turned on with “00000001B”), the operation result (logical product) is other than zero (for example, “00000001B”) And the zero flag (ZF) is not set.

  The “AQND” instruction can determine whether or not the switch is turned on without executing an instruction for acquiring the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the register. Since the on / off determination of the switch is performed without going through the register, the determination can be made reliably even if a failure occurs in the register. In addition, since the instruction for acquiring the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the register becomes unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the “AQND” instruction.

  In the line number 2040, when the operation result (logical product) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process (code “RET Z”). That is, when the target start port (start port 1 or start port 2) does not win a prize and the target switch is off, the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process.

  FIG. 133B is a time chart showing a procedure for detecting “rise information” that is a rise of the switch. In the figure, f is an interrupt cycle, and a timer interrupt is generated at the beginning of the interrupt cycle. D represents a delay time. The rise of the switch, that is, whether or not the switch is turned on is determined by the input process of A1303 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125). The first physical level, the second physical level, the logical level, and the rising information shown below are updated each time a timer interrupt occurs, and are organized for each switch provided in the gaming machine and stored in the switch control area. Remembered.

  First, the rise time (23401) and fall time (23402) of the switch will be described. In the input / output process (A1303 in FIG. 125) when the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 111a determines that the level of the switch detection signal is different from the previously set first physical level (from low level to high level or from high level). The first physical level is newly set to the level of the detection signal. If the switch detection signal is different from the previously set second physical level after a predetermined delay time d has elapsed, the second physical level is set to the level of the detection signal. Note that the first physical level and the second physical level differ only in detection timing.

  At this time, if the first physical level and the second physical level match, it is determined that the detection signal has changed, and the level is set as the logical level. When the logic level changes from the low level to the high level, the rising information is set on until the delay time elapses after the next timer interrupt occurs. That is, after the rising edge information is set to ON, it is set to OFF when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  Further, when the signal level of the first physical level is different from the signal level of the second physical level, that is, as indicated by 23403, the level of the detection signal of the switch when the first physical level is detected and when the second physical level is detected. Are different from each other, it is assumed that noise has occurred and the logic level is not changed.

  Returning again to FIG. 133A, line number 2050 corresponds to A2803 of the hard random number acquisition process, and the random number latch register status is input from the port C_HRDCNT (that is, the port of the number corresponding to the label C_HRDCNT) to the A register. (Code “INA, (C_HRDCNT)”).

  Line numbers 2060 and 2070 correspond to A2804 of the hard random number acquisition process, and determine whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register. In the line number 2060, the logical product of the judgment value (judgment data) stored in the address area currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) and the value of the A register is calculated (code “AND”). A, (HL +) "). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”). The determination value is other than zero, for example “00000010B”, and the operation result (logical product) of the line number 2060 becomes zero when the random number latch register status that is the value of the A register does not match the determination value, and the zero flag (ZF ) Is set and the random number latch register status matches the determination value, it becomes non-zero (eg, “00000010B”) and the zero flag (ZF) is not set. When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register, the random number latch register status bit corresponding to the target random number latch register is 0, the random number latch register status does not match the determination value, and the operation result (logic Product) is zero.

  At line number 2070, if the operation result of line number 2060 is zero (Z) (that is, when there is no latch data in the target random number latch register), the subroutine ends and the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process (code) “RET Z”).

  Line number 2080 corresponds to A10701 of the hard random number acquisition process, and is stored in the address area (for example, in the ROM data area) currently stored in the HL register in order to prepare the address of the target hard random number latch register. The obtained value (address of the target hard random number latch register) is loaded into the E register (code “LDE, (HL)”).

  In line number 2090, a carry flag (CF) is set (code “SET CF”) as start port winning information indicating that there is a start port winning corresponding to A2806 of the hard random number acquisition process.

  At line number 2100, the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process (code “RET”).

  As described above, the code generally described as “AQND r, (R_SWCB)” takes the logical product of the judgment value stored in the register r and the value (rising information) of the switch control area of the address R_SWCB. The switch detection state (switch bit ON / OFF) can be determined. In the present embodiment, R_SWCB is an address of rising information in the switch control area. When a switch is detected, a predetermined bit (switch bit) of rising information is turned on.

  Note that a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “AQND r, (R_SWCB)” may be provided in the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242).

[Operation and Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
According to the eighth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game based on detection states of predetermined switches (various switches and sensors such as the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, and the start port 2 switch 37a). And a game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a game state for giving a privilege to the player when the variable display game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group including a plurality of general-purpose registers ( Register banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The update information storage means is assigned a multi-byte address, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means includes a switch control area provided corresponding to a predetermined address and capable of storing a switch detection state. The arithmetic processing means stores in the storage area based on the value of the storage area and the determination value stored in the predetermined general-purpose register without storing the value of any storage area of the update information storage means in the general-purpose register. An instruction (for example, “AQND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)”) that can determine the state of the obtained value is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means determines the detection state of the switch based on this command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include this instruction.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the switch is turned on without executing a command for acquiring the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the general-purpose register. Since the determination of the switch is performed without using the general-purpose register, the determination can be surely performed even if a failure occurs in a general-purpose register other than the predetermined general-purpose register. In addition, since the instruction for acquiring the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the register becomes unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Ninth Embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment.

  FIG. 134A is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 128) according to the ninth embodiment.

  The line number 2500 is a label (P_TSIDOSW) corresponding to the special figure start port switch common process, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the special figure start port switch common process. The special figure start port switch common process is a subroutine called by the “CALLR” instruction in A2708 and A2715 of the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22).

  Line number 2510 corresponds to A 10801 of the special figure start port switch common processing. The code “IQCP (IY + R_SIDOSIG), 255” of the line number 2510 has a value (IY + R_SIDOSIG) stored in the area of the addition address “IY + R_SIDOSIG” as an absolute address in the address space smaller than 255 by the “IQCP” instruction. +1 is updated, and if it is not smaller than 255, 0 is substituted and the value (IY + R_SIDOSIG) is initialized. The value (IY + R_SIDOSIG), which is the number of times the start port signal is output, is added up to 255. The “IQCP” instruction will be described in detail in a program list (FIG. 141) described later. Note that the value (IY + R_SIDOSIG), which is the number of times the start port signal is output, may be set to 255 without returning 0 to 255 or more as indicated by A2901 to A2904 in FIG.

  Line numbers 2520 to 2550 correspond to A2905 of the special figure start port switch common process. At line number 2520, the value stored in the hold information table (the address area of the current HL register) is loaded into the W register as the offset address of the hold count area (code “LD W, (HL +)”). Thereafter, the current address in the HL register is updated to the next address. For example, if the target start port is the start port 1, the current address in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) is the value loaded with the line number 1590. The hold information table (A2707, A2714) is a table (for example, ROM) in which information related to a hold due to winning at the start winning port 36 (starting port 1) or the second starting winning port (ordinary variable winning device 37, starting port 2) is set. In the data area).

  In line number 2530, the value (holding number) stored in the addition address IY + W is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, (IY + W)”). The addition address IY + W is obtained by adding the value stored in the W register (offset address of the reserved number area) and the value stored in the IY register (RAM head address “2800h”). The addition address IY + W is an absolute address of the reserved number area. That is, at line number 2530, the current number of reservations in the number-of-holds area is stored in the A register, but the current number of reservations (number of start memories) is updated by +1 by the current winning at line number 2560 (A2906). This is the number of holds before

  In line number 2540, the number of holds in the A register is compared with the upper limit value (4 in this case), and when the value is smaller than the upper limit value, the carry flag (CF) is set. Not set (code “CP A, 4”).

  In line number 2550, when the number of holds reaches the upper limit value and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code “RET NC”).

  Line number 2560 corresponds to A2906 of the special figure start port switch common process. In the line number 2560, the number of reservations, which is the value of the number of reservations corresponding to the address IY + W in RAM, is updated by +1 as the number of special figure reservations (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) (code “IQNC” (IY + W) "). The RAM internal address IY + W is an address obtained by adding the value stored in the IY register and the value stored in the W register.

  The instruction “IQNC” does not store the 1-byte value stored in the address destination area in the register (at least the general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A (the value stored in the address destination area). This is an instruction to directly update +1 (add 1 only) without fetching it into the register once. For this reason, the use of the instruction “IQNC” eliminates the need to write three codes: load into the register, addition processing in the register, and load into the addressed area. It becomes compact. In addition, the direct addition of the value stored in the address destination area by “IQNC” does not use a general-purpose register, so that no problem occurs even if interrupt processing occurs.

  Line numbers 2570 to 2600 correspond to A2907 of the special figure start port switch common process. In line number 2570, the number of holds stored in the A register (+1 before the update) is loaded into the C register (code “LD C, A”).

  At line number 2580, the value stored in the address area of the current HL register (start-up winning flag) is loaded into the B register (code “LD B, (HL +)”). That is, the start opening prize flag (value shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2) is acquired from the hold information table. Thereafter, the value in the HL register is updated to the next address (HL +).

  At line number 2590, the value (starting opening winning flag) stored in the B register is loaded into the area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG (code “LQD (IY + R_SIDOFLG), B”. The addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is the IY register). Is added to the value (RAM head address “2800h”) corresponding to the label R_SIDOFLG.

  In line number 2600, the value of the BC register is saved in the stack area of the RAM (code “PUSH BC”).

  Line numbers 2610 to 2650 correspond to A2908 of the special figure start port switch common process. In line number 2610, the value stored in the address stored in the current HL register (number of bytes for one hold (7 or 8)) is loaded into the W register (code “LD W, (HL +)”). That is, the number of bytes (7 or 8) for one hold is acquired from the hold information table. Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address.

  As shown in the special figure 1 reserved storage area of the RAM 111c in FIG. 135A, each reserved random number storage area of the special figure 1 reserved storage area has a 2-byte big hit random number, 1 byte big hit symbol random number, 1 byte Small per symbol design random number, 2-byte variation pattern random number 1, 1-byte variation pattern random number 2, 1-byte variation pattern random number 3 are stored and assigned to each special figure 1 hold (first start memory) The number (number of reserved bytes) is 8 bytes. On the other hand, as shown in the special figure 2 reserved storage area of the RAM 111c in FIG. 135B, each reserved random number storage area of the special figure 2 reserved storage area has a 2-byte big hit random number, 1 byte big hit symbol random number, 2 bytes Fluctuation pattern random number 1, 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 2, 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 3 are stored, and the number of bytes assigned to each special figure 2 hold (second start memory) (the number of hold bytes) is 7 Become a byte. Since the special figure 2 variable display game does not have a small hit, no one-byte small hit symbol random number is stored in each reserved random number storage area of the special figure 2 reserved storage area.

  In line number 2620, the number of reserved bytes (7 or 8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the number of reserved data stored in the A register (+1, the number of reserved data before updating, 0 to 3), and the WA register Stores the operation result (the number of holdings × the number of holding bytes) (code “MUL W, A”). Since the operation result is 0 to 24, the operation result is substantially stored in the A register of the lower byte. The reserved number is the number of startup memories (starting memory number), and the reserved byte number is the number of bytes allocated for each hold (per startup memory).

  At line number 2630, the value stored in the address stored in the current HL register (the address of the random number storage area) is loaded into the L register (code “LD L, (HL)”). That is, the address (first address) of the random number storage area is acquired from the hold information table. The leading address of the random number storage area (holding storage area) is 2830h in the special figure 1 holding storage area (FIG. 135A) and 2850h in the special figure 2 holding storage area (FIG. 135B).

  In line number 2640, the value stored in the A register (the number of holdings × the number of holding bytes) is added to the start address of the random number storage area stored in the L register (code “ADD L, A”). As a result of the addition, the value of the L register becomes the address of the area corresponding to the number of reservations (+1 the number of reservations before updating), that is, the start address of the random number storage area of the reservation generated by the current winning. For example, if the hold generated by the current winning is hold 3, the address of the area corresponding to the number of holds in the special figure 1 hold storage area (FIG. 135A) is 30h + 2 × 8 = 40h in the offset address (lower byte), In the special figure 2 reserved storage area (FIG. 135B), the offset address (lower byte) is 50h + 2 × 7 = 5Eh.

  In line number 2650, the numerical value “28h” is loaded into the H register as the upper address of the address of the area corresponding to the number of holds (code “LD H, 28H”).

  Line numbers 2660 to 2670 correspond to A 10802 of the special figure start port switch common process. In the line number 2660, the value (2-byte jackpot random number) stored in the 2-byte area is input from the address (address of the target hard random number latch register) stored in the E register (code “INW WA, (E) ").

  At line number 2670, the big hit random number of the WA register is stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (in the RAM), that is, the reserved random number storage area generated by the current winning (the area corresponding to the reserved number). Is loaded (stored) (code “LQD (HL +), WA”). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”). Since the big hit random number is 2 bytes, for example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2840h, the next address is 2842h. Note that the lower byte (value of the A register) of the big hit random number is stored in the RAM area having a smaller address before the upper byte (value of the W register).

  In this way, the code “LQD (HL +), WA” automatically updates the address in the HL register to the next address that is the next storage destination, so the next time in a continuous RAM area such as a random number storage area. The instruction for calculating the storage destination address is not required. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

  Line numbers 2680 to 2690 correspond to A10803 of the special figure start port switch common process. In the line number 2680, the value (here, the lower byte) of a predetermined register “C_SRND0_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “INA, (C_SRND0_L)”). The predetermined register is the soft random number register 0.

  In line number 2690, the value of the A register as a jackpot symbol random number is loaded into the area of the address stored in the current HL register (code "LQD (HL +), A"). Thereafter, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”). Since the big hit symbol random number is 1 byte, for example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2842h, the next address is 2843h.

  Line numbers 2700 to 2710 correspond to A2912 of the special figure start port switch common process.

  In the line number 2700, the value of the B register is compared with the numerical value (the value indicating the special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 as the start opening winning flag (the value indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2), and whether or not they match. (T), it is determined whether they do not match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”). If they match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  In the line number 2710, when the comparison result of the line number 2700 is inconsistent (F), that is, when the target start port is the start port 2 (when the start port winning flag indicates FIG. 2), the label TSIDOSW10 is displayed. Jump to the corresponding ROM address (conditional branch), and execute the instruction after line number 2750 (code “JRS F, TSIDOSW10”). This is because the special figure 2 variable display game does not have a small hit and does not need to acquire and store a small hit symbol random number.

  Line numbers 2720 to 2730 correspond to A10804 of the special figure start port switch common process. In line number 2720, the value of a predetermined register “C_SRND1_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “INA, (C_SRND1_L)”).

  At line number 2730, the value of the A register is loaded as a small hitting design random number into the area of the address stored in the current HL register (code “LQD (HL +), A”. After that, in the current HL register The address is updated to the next address (“HL +”) Since the large and small symbol random number is 1 byte, for example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2843h, the next address is 2844h.

  Line numbers 2750 to 2780 correspond to A2915 of the special figure start port switch common process. At the line number 2750, the value (that is, the fluctuation pattern random number 1) stored in the area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN1 is loaded into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)”). The addition address is obtained by adding a value (offset address of the generation area where the variation pattern random number 1 is generated) corresponding to the label R_RNDHEN1 to the value stored in the IY register (RAM head address “2800h”). Note that the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN1 is an absolute address of a generation area where the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is generated.

  Here, the offset address R_RNDHEN1 is limited to a range that can be represented by 1 byte, and the code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)” of the line number 2750 can be a 2-byte instruction. Thereby, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes, and the instruction of line number 2750 is a 3-byte instruction.

  In the line number 2760, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the WA register is loaded into the 2-byte area (in the RAM) from the address currently stored in the HL register (code “LQD (HL +), WA”). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”). Since the variation pattern random number 1 is 2 bytes, for example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2844h, the next address is 2846h.

  In line number 2770, the value stored in the 2-byte area (in RAM) from the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN2 (that is, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2, 3) is loaded into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)”). The addition address is obtained by adding the value (offset address of the generation area where the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is generated) corresponding to the label R_RNDHEN2 to the value (RAM head address “2800h”) stored in the IY register. Note that the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN2 is an absolute address of a generation area where the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is generated. The generation areas in which the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (1 byte) and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 (1 byte) are generated are continuous, and the total is 2 bytes. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 can be simultaneously loaded into the WA register with one instruction.

  In line number 2780, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the WA register are loaded into the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (2 bytes in the RAM) (code “LD (HL), WA”). For example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2846h, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are loaded into 2846h and 2847h.

  Line number 2790 corresponds to A2916 of the special figure start port switch common process, and calls a subroutine (label P_THOINF) of the special figure hold information determination process (FIG. 129) (code “CALLR P_THOINF”).

  Line numbers 2800 to 2820 correspond to A2917 of the special figure start port switch common process. In line number 2800, the value of the BC register is restored from the stack area of the RAM (code “POP BC”). The value of the B register is a start opening prize flag (value shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2), and the value of the C register is a hold number (+1 hold number before updating).

  In line number 2810, a value corresponding to the label C_THOMD (a value indicating the special figure hold mode) is added to the value of the B register (code “ADD B, C_THOMD”).

  At line number 2820, 2 is added to the value of the C register (code “ADD C, 2”).

  The line number 2830 corresponds to A2918 of the special figure start port switch common process. A subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process is called and executed (code “CALLR P_COMSET”). The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of the B register and the C register.

  At line number 2840, the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code “RET”).

  As described above, a code generally described as “LQD (qq +), r (or dd)” is an area in RAM (particularly a random number storage area) indicated by an address value set in the pair register qq as a storage instruction. ), The value of the register r (or the pair register dd) is stored, and the address value of the pair register qq is added and updated by a predetermined addition value to obtain the next address value. Note that r is an arbitrary register, and qq and dd (different from qq) are arbitrary pair registers. The predetermined added value corresponds to the number of bytes in the register, and is 1 for the register r and 2 for the pair register dd. A pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes the code “LQD (qq +), r (or dd)”.

[Operations and effects of the ninth embodiment]
According to the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate), and the variable display game performs a special result. In this case, a game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state that gives a bonus to a player. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (registers) Banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. A plurality of register pairs each composed of two registers are configured in the register group. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) extracts a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the start winning area or the entrance or passing of the game ball to the gate), and the right to execute the variable display game Can be stored in the random number storage area of the update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c). The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) stores the value stored in the predetermined register pair or the predetermined register in any storage area of the update information storage means corresponding to the address set in the other register pair. Thereafter, a storage instruction for updating an address set in the other register pair is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means stores the random number stored in the predetermined register pair or the predetermined register in the random number storage area of the update information storage means according to the storage instruction. The storage instruction is, for example, “LQD (HL +), WA” or “LQD (HL +), A”. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such stored instructions.

  Since the storage destination address is automatically updated by the storage instruction, when storing values continuously in a continuous storage area (for example, an area in RAM), calculation of the address of each storage destination conventionally required The instruction for is not required. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

  Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, when the random numbers are continuously stored in the random number storage area (for example, the area in the RAM), an instruction for calculating the address of each storage destination, which is conventionally required, becomes unnecessary. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Modification of Ninth Embodiment]
FIG. 134B is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 128) according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. In addition, the code | symbol of the same content as FIG. 134A of 9th Embodiment attaches the same line number, and abbreviate | omits description.

  Line numbers 2500 to 2670 are the same as those in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment. However, in line number 12010 to be executed next to line number 2670, the values of the WA register and WA ′ register are exchanged (code “ XQCH WA, WA '"). In this embodiment, the WA register is the WA register 1203A (front register) of the register bank 0, and the WA ′ register is the WA register 1203B (back register) of the register bank 1. As a result, the big hit random number (2 bytes) currently stored in the WA register of the register bank 0 is stored in the WA ′ register of the register bank 1 before the value of the WA register 1203A of the register bank 0 is changed (destroyed). It can be temporarily evacuated.

  When a subroutine (label P_THOINF) for special figure hold information determination processing is called at line number 2790, the values of the WA register and WA ′ register, which are pair registers, are exchanged again (code “XQCH WA, WA ′”). As a result, the big hit random number saved (stored) in the WA ′ register of the register bank 1 is returned (returned) to the WA register of the register bank 0 when executing the special figure holding information determination process (immediately before execution). ), Can be used in the jackpot determination process of the special figure hold information determination process. In the special figure hold information determination process, since it is not necessary to take out (read) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM, the program capacity (the number of codes and the code amount) can be reduced. Further, since the data is not saved in the RAM stack area, an increase in RAM capacity can be prevented.

  Line number 12020 and line number 12030 are the same as line number 2690, but in order to be able to use the jackpot symbol random number acquired at row number 2680 in the subsequent special symbol hold information determination process, the jackpot symbol random number is A In addition to the register, it is also stored in the E register (code “LDE, A”).

  The line number 12040 and the line number 12050 are the same as the line number 2730, but the small hit symbol random number is used so that the small hit symbol random number acquired at the line number 2720 can be used in the later special figure hold information determination processing. Is stored in the D register in addition to the A register.

  As described above, the code generally described as “XQCH dd, dd ′” corresponds to the value of the pair register dd of the first register bank (for example, register bank 0) and the pair register dd as an exchange instruction. The value of the pair register dd ′ of the second register bank (for example, register bank 1) to be exchanged is exchanged. Therefore, the big hit random number (2 bytes) stored in the pair register dd of the first register bank can be temporarily saved in the pair register dd 'of the second register bank. Then, the saved big hit random number can be returned (returned) to the pair register dd of the first register bank at a desired timing and used. Further, the data can be saved without using the RAM stack area. Accordingly, in the special figure hold information determination process or the like, there is no need for a command to retrieve (read) a big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM, so that the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced. A pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  Note that a dedicated logic circuit that executes the code “XQCH dd, dd ′” may be provided in the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242).

[Operation and Effect of Modification of Ninth Embodiment]
According to a modification of the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variation display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate), and the variation display game is executed. Is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state for giving a privilege to a player when a special result is obtained. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. The game control means includes a first register group (for example, register bank 0) and a second register group (for example, register bank 1) composed of register groups having the same configuration as the first register group. The arithmetic processing means exchanges a value stored in the first register group and a value stored in the second register group, and sends an exchange instruction (for example, “XQCH” instruction) to be stored in each register group. Configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means extracts a random number (big hit random number) used for a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special game state in the variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the extracted random number is stored in the first register. In a state of being stored in the group, the random number stored in the first register group is saved in the second register group by the exchange instruction. The arithmetic processing means restores the random number saved in the second register group by the exchange command to the first register group before making a prior determination as to whether or not to generate the special gaming state based on the random number, Predetermining is performed using the random number returned to the register group.

  Therefore, the value (for example, big hit random number) stored in the first register group (for example, register bank 0) can be temporarily saved in the second register group (for example, register bank 1) by the exchange instruction. . Then, the saved value (for example, the big hit random number) can be returned (returned) to the first register group at a desired timing and used by the exchange command. Therefore, the value stored in the first register group can be saved without using the RAM stack area or the like. In addition, since the value can be saved in the second register group, an instruction to retrieve (read) this value from the RAM is unnecessary, so that the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced. In particular, it is possible to protect the random number by saving it from the first register group to the second register group by applying an exchange command for a random number which is an important value in game control. The random number saved at a desired timing such as immediately before the prior determination is returned to the first register group, and the preliminary determination is performed using the random number returned to the first register group. Therefore, the first register group can be freely used until a desired timing after being saved.

[Tenth embodiment]
A tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136A. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment.

  136A is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure hold information determination process (FIG. 129) according to the tenth embodiment.

  Line number 3000 is a label (P_THOINF) corresponding to the special figure hold information determination process, and indicates the ROM address (first address) of the program module corresponding to the special figure hold information determination process. The special figure hold information determination process is a subroutine called by a “CALLR” instruction in A2916 (line number 2790 in FIG. 134) of the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 128).

  Line numbers 3010 to 3050 correspond to A3001 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  In the line number 3010, an address (a value corresponding to the label R_T2HORYU) corresponding to the reserved number storage area of the special figure 2 held number is loaded into the DE register (code “LDY DE, R_T2HORYU”). R_T2HORYU is an offset address based on the value “2800h” of the IY register, and only the lower address of the reserved number storage area needs to be designated as R_T2HORYU. Therefore, the conventional code (machine language instruction) for loading a value into the DE register is 3 bytes, but the code (machine language instruction) by this “LDY” instruction is 2 bytes.

  In the line number 3020, a value “R_T2RNDMEM” obtained by subtracting 7 (the number of reserved bytes reserved in the special figure 2) from the top address (a numerical value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM) of the special figure 2 reserved random number storage area (the special figure 2 reserved storage area) −7 ”is loaded into the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved in FIG. 2 (code“ LDY HL, R_T2RNDMEM-7 ”).

  In line number 3030, the reserved byte number “7” for the special figure 2 hold is loaded into the W register (code “LD W, 7”).

  In the line number 3040, the start opening prize flag stored in the area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is compared with a numerical value (a value indicating the special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (codes “CP (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1”). "). The addition address is obtained by adding a value corresponding to the label R_SIDOFLG to a value (RAM head address “2800h”) stored in the IY register. When the start opening prize flag shows the special figure 1 and the comparison result matches, the zero flag is set (Z), and when the start opening prize flag shows the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match, the zero flag is not set. (NZ).

  In line number 3050, when the start opening winning flag indicates FIG. 2 and the zero flag is not set (NZ), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label THOINF10 (conditional branch) and execute the instruction after line number 3140 (Code “JR NZ, THOINF10”). That is, if the start port 1 is not winning, the process branches.

  Line numbers 3060 to 3100 correspond to A3002 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  In line number 3060, the address corresponding to the label R_T1HORYU corresponding to the reserved number storage area of the special figure 1 held number is loaded into the DE register (code “LDY DE, R_T1HORYU”).

  In line number 3070, a value “R_T1RNDMEM” obtained by subtracting 8 (the number of reserved bytes reserved in FIG. 1) from the top address (a numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1RNDMEM) of the random number storage area reserved in FIG. −8 ”is loaded into the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved in FIG. 1 (code“ LDY HL, R_T1RNDMEM-8 ”).

  In line number 3080, the value of the W register, which is currently 7 is updated by +1 (incremented by 1) to make the number of reserved bytes “8” for the special figure 1 hold (code “INC W”).

  In the row number 3090, as in the row number 1540, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of the label C_JTN indicating that the special figure is running shortly (in the normal power support state) (code “CHK ( IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN "). If the comparison result matches in the special drawing time, the calculation result is not zero and the zero flag is not set (NZ). If the comparison result does not match in the special drawing time, the zero flag is set. (Z).

  In line number 3100, if the special drawing time is short, that is, if the comparison results match (NZ), the processing returns to the special drawing start port common processing (FIG. 128) (code “RET NZ”).

  Line numbers 3110 to 3120 correspond to A3003 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  In line number 3110, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is compared with the value of the label C_TFAN indicating that the big hit or the small hit is being made (code “CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TFAN”). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME indicates an area in the RAM that stores the special figure game process number (A2606) on the basis of the value “2800h” of the IY register. The value of the label C_TFAN is the special game process number “3” for fanfare / interval processing. In case of big hit or small hit, and the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), and it is smaller than 3 if neither big hit nor small hit The carry flag (CF) is set (C).

  In line number 3120, when the big hit or the small hit is being made and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the processing returns to the special figure start port switch common processing (FIG. 128) (code “RET NC”).

  Line numbers 3140 to 3170 correspond to A10901 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  In line number 3140, the number of holds stored in the number-of-holds storage area corresponding to the address of the DE register (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, (DE ) ").

  In line number 3150, the number of reserved bytes stored in the W register (7 or 8), the number of reserved data stored in the A register (the number of reserved figures 1 or the number of reserved figures 2) (here, 1 to 4), And stores the operation result (the number of holdings × the number of holding bytes) in the WA register (code “MUL W, A”). Since the operation result is 7 to 31, the operation result is substantially stored in the A register of the lower byte.

  In line number 3160, the value of the WA register is saved in the stack area of the RAM (code “PUSH WA”).

  In line number 3170, the value of the area (2 bytes) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (HL + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register and the value of the A register (reserved number × reserved byte number). The value of the HL register is a value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved bytes from the start address of the random number storage area, and is a value related to the random number storage area. The value of the A register is the number of holdings × the number of holding bytes, and is a value based on a multiplication value of the number of holdings (the number of starting memories) and the number of bytes assigned for each holding (for each starting memory).

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value of the HL register is used as the start address of the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is (holding number−1) × the number of reserved bytes.

  Here, the total address value HL + A becomes the head address of the most recently generated random number storage area that has been newly generated (the leftmost side in FIGS. 135A and 135B). In the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest pending jackpot random number is stored. The lower byte of the latest pending jackpot random number is acquired in the A register and the upper byte is acquired (read) in the W register. .

  Line number 3180 corresponds to A3004 of special figure hold information determination processing, and calls a subroutine (label P_BHITJUD) of jackpot determination processing (code “CALLR P_BHITJUD”). In the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the latest jackpot random number.

  Line numbers 3190 to 3200 correspond to A3005 of the special figure hold information determination process. At line number 3190, the value of the WA register saved in the stack area at line number 3160 is returned from the stack area to the WA register (code “POP WA”).

  In the line number 3200, if the result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (when the carry flag is not set (in the case of NC)), the label for performing the process after the line number 3300 (the process after A3008 in FIG. 129) is performed. Jump to ROM address corresponding to THOINF30 (conditional branch) (code “JRNC, THOINF30”).

  Line numbers 3210 to 3240 correspond to A3006 of the special figure hold information determination process. At line number 3210, the address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL1 for special figure 1 is loaded into the DE register (code “LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL1”).

  The line number 3220 is the same code as the line number 3040, and the start opening winning flag stored in the area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is compared with the numerical value corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (the value shown in FIG. 1). (Code "CP (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1").

  In line number 3230, when the start opening prize flag indicates FIG. 1 and the zero flag is set (Z), jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label THOINF20 (conditional branch) and execute the instructions after line number 3260. Execute (code “JR Z, THOINF20”). That is, if the start port 1 wins, it branches.

  In line number 3240, the address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL2 for special figure 2 is loaded into the DE register and overwritten (code “LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL2”).

  Line numbers 3260 to 3270 correspond to A10902 of the special figure hold information determination process. At line number 3260, 2 is added to the value of the A register (code “ADD A, 2”). In the A register, a value obtained by adding “2” to (reserved number × number of reserved bytes) is stored.

  In line number 3270, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQD A, (HL + A)”). At present, the total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register (the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved bytes from the start address of the random number storage area) and the value of the A register (number of reserved times × number of reserved bytes + 2). The value of the HL register is a value related to the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is a value based on a multiplication value of the number of reservations and the number of bytes assigned for each reservation. Here, the total address value is obtained by adding “2” to the top address of the latest pending random number storage area that has occurred most recently. In the area corresponding to the total address value, the most recently generated latest jackpot symbol random number is stored, but the latest pending jackpot symbol random number is acquired (read) in the A register.

  Line numbers 3280 to 3290 correspond to A10903 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  In line number 3280, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value DE + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQD A, (DE + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value stored in the DE register (the top address of the jackpot symbol random number check table) and the value of the A register (the value of the jackpot symbol random number). Since the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is stored in the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest suspended stop symbol information is acquired (read) in the A register. Thus, stop symbol information is acquired corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number.

  At line number 3290, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label THOINF100 (code "JR THOINF100").

  As described above, a code generally described as “LQD qq (or r ′), (dd + r)” is an address (here, specified) as a read instruction based on the value of the dd register and the value of the r register. Then, the value (random number) in the RAM area (random number storage area) indicated by the total address dd + r) is stored in the pair register qq (or register r ′). Note that r and r 'are arbitrary registers, and r' may be the same as or different from r. qq and dd are arbitrary pair registers, and qq may be the same as or different from dd. The total address value dd + r is the sum of the value of the pair register dd (reference address derived based on the leading address of the random number storage area) and the value of the r register (reserved number × value derived based on the number of reserved bytes). Yes, you can specify a specific random address (area) for each hold. A pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  Therefore, unlike the conventional case, it is not necessary to execute a code for directly calculating the address where the random number is stored each time a specific random number for each hold is acquired, and the address can be efficiently specified and specified. Random numbers can be acquired efficiently, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

  Note that the code “LQD qq (or r ′), (for obtaining a value stored in the RAM address specified from the value of the pair register dd and register r in the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) in the CPU core 102. A dedicated logic circuit that executes “dd + r)” may be provided.

[Operation and Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
According to the tenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate), and the variable display game performs a special result. In this case, a game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state that gives a bonus to a player. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (registers) Banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. A plurality of register pairs each composed of two registers are configured in the register group. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) extracts a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and stores it in the random number storage area of the update information storage means (for example, the RAM 111c) as the right to execute the variable display game. it can. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) sets the value of one of the storage areas of the update information storage means to one register or the corresponding to the address specified based on the value stored in the predetermined register and the predetermined register pair. A read instruction stored in one register pair is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means reads the random number stored in the random number storage area of the update information storage means by the read command. The read command is, for example, “LQD WA, (HL + A)” or “LQD A, (HL + A)”. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction.

  With such a read instruction, it is no longer necessary to execute an instruction that directly calculates the address where this value is stored each time a value of that storage area is acquired, and the address of any one of the storage areas And the value stored in the area can be efficiently obtained, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

  For example, a predetermined register pair (for example, HL register) stores a value related to the address of the random number storage area, and a predetermined register (for example, A register) is assigned for each start memory and the number of start memories. Stores a value based on the product of the number of bytes.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, it is not necessary to execute an instruction to directly calculate an address where a random number is stored every time a random number in any one of the random number storage areas is acquired. The address of the area and the random number stored in the area can be efficiently obtained, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

[Modification of the tenth embodiment]
FIG. 136B is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure hold information determination process (FIG. 129) according to the modification of the tenth embodiment. In addition, the code | symbol of the same content as FIG. 136A of 10th Embodiment attaches | subjects the same line number, and abbreviate | omits description.

  The modification of the tenth embodiment is a special figure hold information determination process that is executed in response to the case where the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 134B) of the modification of the ninth embodiment is executed. In the special figure start port switch common process of FIG. 134B, the big hit random number is temporarily saved in the WA ′ register, and is restored to the original WA register when the special figure holding information determination process is executed (immediately before execution). . Therefore, in the special figure hold information determination process of FIG. 136B, a process of extracting a big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM (the process from line number 3000 to line number 3030 in FIG. 136A, the process from line number 3060 to line number 3080) , And the processing from line number 3130 to line number 3170) becomes unnecessary.

  The line numbers 13010 and 13020 are the same as the line numbers 3040 and 3050 in FIG. 136A.

  In line number 13010, the value of register B is compared with the numerical value (value indicating special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_Sido1 as the start opening winning flag (value indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2), and whether it matches? (T), it is determined whether they do not match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”).

  In the line number 13020, when the comparison result of the line number 13010 does not match (F), that is, when the target start port is the start port 2 (when the start port winning flag indicates the special figure 2), the label THOINF10 is displayed. Jump to the corresponding ROM address (conditional branch) and execute the instruction after line number 3180 (code “JRS F, THOINF10”).

  In line number 3180, a jackpot determination process subroutine (label P_BHITJUD) is called, and the jackpot determination process is executed using the jackpot random number in the WA register. Thus, it is not necessary to take out (read out) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the big hit determination process.

  Line numbers 13030 to 13060 correspond to line numbers 3210 to 3240.

  At line number 13030, the relative address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL1 for special figure 1 is loaded into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_ZCHKTBL1-5000H”).

  In line number 13040, as in line number 13010, the value of register B is compared with the numerical value (value indicating special figure 1) corresponding to label C_SIDO1 as a start opening prize flag (value indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2). Then, it is determined whether they match (T) or do not match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”).

  In the row number 13050, when the comparison result of the row number 13040 is coincident (T), that is, when the target start port is the start port 1 (when the start port winning flag indicates FIG. 1), the label THOINF20 is displayed. Jump to the corresponding ROM address (conditional branch), and execute the instruction after line number 13070 (code “JRS T, THOINF20”).

  At line number 13060, the relative address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL2 for special figure 2 is loaded into the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_ZCHKTBL1-5000H").

  At line number 13070, the jackpot symbol random number stored in the E register at line number 12020 in FIG. 134B is stored in the A register (LD A, E). Therefore, it is not necessary to take out (read out) the jackpot symbol random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the special figure hold information determination process.

  At line number 13080, stop symbol information is acquired corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number, as with line number 3280 in FIG. 136A. In line number 13080, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQD A, (HL + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value stored in the HL register (the top address of the jackpot symbol random number check table) and the value of the A register (the value of the jackpot symbol random number). Since the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is stored in the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest suspended stop symbol information is acquired in the A register.

[Operation and Effect of Modification of Tenth Embodiment]
According to the tenth embodiment, the jackpot determination process of the special figure hold information determination process is executed using the jackpot random number saved by a code generally described as “XQCH dd, dd ′”. Thus, it is not necessary to extract the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the big hit determination process, and the program capacity (the number of codes and the code amount) can be reduced.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the tenth embodiment.

  FIG. 137 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the change start information setting process (FIG. 40) according to the eleventh embodiment.

  The line number 3500 is a label (P_TSTASET) corresponding to the change start information setting process, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the change start information setting process.

  Line numbers 3510 to 3580 correspond to A4601 of the change start information setting process. In line number 3510, the value (variable symbol discrimination flag) in the variation symbol discrimination flag area at the address “IY + R_TZINF” is compared with the value corresponding to the label C_TZ1HEN (value indicating the special symbol 1) (code “CP (IY + R_TZINF), C_TZ1HEN "). The label R_TZINF indicates the offset address of the variation symbol determination flag area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. A zero flag is set when the variation symbol discrimination flag shows special figure 1 and the comparison results match (Z), and a zero flag is not set when the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag shows special figure 2 and the comparison results do not match. (NZ).

  In line number 3520, when the variation symbol discrimination flag shows special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match (NZ), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label TSTASET10 (conditional branch), and the instructions after line number 3570 are executed. Execute (code “JR NZ, TSTASET10”).

  In the line number 3530, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 4 to the top address (a numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1RNDMEM, for example, 2830h) of the special figure 1 reserved random number storage area (special figure 1 reserved storage area), that is, Of the random number storage area, the area of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the reserved 1 to be digested (for example, the area of addresses 2834h and 2835h in FIG. 135A) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T1RNDMEM + 4)”).

  In the line number 3540, an address area (2 bytes) obtained by adding 6 to the top address (a numeric value corresponding to the label R_T1RNDMEM, for example, 2830h) of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 reserved (special figure 1 reserved storage area), that is, Of the random number storage area, the area of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the reserved 1 to be digested (for example, areas of addresses 2836h and 2837h in FIG. 135A) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T1RNDMEM + 6)”).

  In the special figure 1 reserved storage area, the jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, and jackpot symbol random number to be digested have already been cleared (A3604, A4022, A4023). The random number storage area can be shifted (holding shift) by clearing the random number storage area 3 (A4613).

  At the line number 3550, a jump is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TSTASET20 (code “JR TSTASET20”).

  In the line number 3570, an address area (2 bytes) obtained by adding 3 to the top address (a numeric value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM, for example, 2850h) of the special figure 2 reserved random number storage area (special figure 2 reserved storage area), that is, In the random number storage area, the reserved 1 fluctuation pattern random number 1 area (for example, 2853h and 2854h in FIG. 135B) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T2RNDMEM + 3)”).

  In the line number 3580, an address area (2 bytes) obtained by adding 5 to the top address (a numerical value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM, for example, 2850h) of the special figure 2 reserved random number storage area (special figure 2 reserved storage area), that is, Of the random number storage area, the area of the variation 1 random number 1 to be digested (for example, 2855h and 2856h in FIG. 135B) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T2RNDMEM + 5)”).

  In the special figure 2 reserved storage area, since the big hit random number and big hit symbol random number of reserved 1 to be digested have already been cleared (A3703, A4116), the random number storage areas of the floating pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the reserved 1 are also cleared. By doing so, the random number storage area can be shifted (holding shift) (A4613).

  The line number 3600 corresponds to A4602 of the change start information setting process, and loads the first address “D_TZENTIM-5000H” of the first half change time value table expressed as a relative address into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_TZENTIM-5000H”). ").

  Line numbers 3610 to 3650 correspond to A4603 of the change start information setting process. In line number 3610, the first half variation number (for example, 1 to 10) is loaded into the B register from the first half variation number area (A4316) indicated by the addition address IY + R_TZENNUM (code “LQD B, (IY + R_TZENNUM)”). The label R_TZENNUM is an offset address of the first-half variation number area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  In line number 3620, the value of the B register is updated by -1 (subtracted by 1) (code "DEC B"). The value of the B register is, for example, a value from 0 to 9, and can be used to prepare a change command (MODE).

  In the line number 3630, the value of the B register (for example, a value from 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (the leading address of the first half variation time value table) (code “ADD HL, B”).

  At the line number 3640, the value of the B register (for example, a value from 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (code “ADD HL, B”).

  By the instruction of line number 3630 and line number 3640, a value twice the value of the B register (for example, an even value from 0 to 18) is added to the start address of the first half fluctuation time value table in which the first half fluctuation time values are arranged. Is done. This is because the first half variation time value is 2 bytes, and it is necessary to add even values. After the instruction of line number 3640 is executed, the value stored in the address area (2 bytes in the ROM) stored in the HL register is the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number.

  In line number 3650, the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is loaded (acquired) into the WA register from the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (code “LD WA, (HL)”).

  The line number 3660 corresponds to A4604 of the change start information setting process, and loads the start address “D_TKOUTIM-5000H” of the second half change time value table expressed as a relative address into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_TKOUTIM-5000H”). ").

  Line numbers 3670 to 3720 correspond to A4605 and A4606 of the change start information setting process. In line number 3670, the latter half variation number (for example, 1 to 10) is loaded into the C register from the latter half variation number area (A4310) indicated by the addition address IY + R_TKOUNUM (code “LQD C, (IY + R_TKOUNUM))”). The label R_TKOUNUM is an offset address of the latter-half variation number area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  In line number 3680, the value of the C register is updated by -1 (subtracted by 1) (code "DEC C"). The value of the C register is a value from 0 to 9, for example.

  In line number 3690, the value of the C register (for example, a value from 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (the leading address of the second half variation time value table) (code “ADD HL, C”).

  In the line number 3700, the value of the C register (for example, a value from 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (code “ADD HL, C”).

  By the instruction of line number 3690 and line number 3700, a value twice the value of the C register (for example, an even number from 0 to 18) is added to the start address of the latter half fluctuation time value table in which the latter half fluctuation time values are arranged. Is done. This is because the second half variation time value is 2 bytes, and it is necessary to add an even value. After the instruction of line number 3640 is executed, the value stored in the address area (2 bytes in the ROM) stored in the HL register is the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number.

  At line number 3710, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (added by 1) and can be used to prepare a variation command (ACTION) (code “INC C”).

  In line number 3720, the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number acquired from the area of the address currently stored in the HL register is added to the WA register (code “ADD WA, (HL)”). In the WA register, all variation time values (first half variation time value + second half variation time value) are stored.

  Line number 3730 corresponds to A4607 of the change start information setting process, and the value of the WA register (addition value (total change time value) by the instruction of line number 3720) is changed from the special game process timer area (addition address = IY + R_TGAME + 1). (Code “LQD (IY + R_TGAME + 1), WA”). Here, R_TGAME + 1 is an offset address of the special-purpose game process timer area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The special game process timer area is a 2-byte area of address IY + R_TGAME + 1 and address IY + R_TGAME + 2.

  In the line number 3740, the value corresponding to the label C_THMD_C0 is added to the value of the B register (code “ADD B, C_THMD_C0”).

  The line number 3750 corresponds to the change start information setting process A4610, and calls and executes the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  As described above, a code generally described as “CQLRW (R_THIT_MEM)” has a clear instruction, an area of the address value R_THIT_MEM as a part of the random number storage area, and clear data (eg, zero value) in the register of FIG. 121A. ) Without storing (at least without using general-purpose registers). 121A is a general-purpose register (W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, IX register, IY register) external to the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242. Special purpose registers (flag register, DP register, SP register, PC register). Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in the register, the random number stored in a part of the random number storage area can be surely cleared. Conventionally, the random number storage area is cleared by executing an instruction to store clear data (for example, zero value) in a register or an instruction to store the stored clear data in a random number storage area. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Operations and effects of the eleventh embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate), and the variable display game performs a special result. In this case, a game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state that gives a bonus to a player. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group including a plurality of general-purpose registers ( Register banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control apparatus 100) can extract a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and store it in the random number storage area of the update information storage means as the right to execute the variable display game. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) is configured to be able to execute a clear instruction (for example, “CQLRW” instruction) that clears a part of the storage area of the update information storage means without using a general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing means clears the random number storage area of the update information storage means by a clear command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include a clear instruction.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no need to execute an instruction for storing clear data (for example, zero value) in a general-purpose register or an instruction for storing stored clear data in a random number storage area. Even if it occurs, the random number stored in a part of the random number storage area can be surely cleared. Further, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  According to the eleventh embodiment, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) stores a game control program and also has a storage means (for example, ROM 111b) having a data area for storing data for the game control program. Arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) that performs required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register (DP register) that stores the start address of the data area in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. The data area includes at least a variable time value table including variable time values related to the variable display game. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, “LQDD HL, D_TKOUTIM-5000H”) that designates an area in the data area by a relative address based on the head address stored in the register (DP register). Is done. The arithmetic processing means designates the address of the variable time value table by this command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such instructions.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the data is not represented by the relative address (for example, 1 byte) based on the start address of the data area stored in the register, but by the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space. The address of the variable time value table in the area can be specified. For this reason, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. In particular, there are two fluctuation time value tables, a first half fluctuation time value table and a second half fluctuation time value table, which are often referred to, so that there are many benefits in reducing the amount of code.

[Twelfth embodiment]
A twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eleventh embodiments.

  FIG. 138 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 62) according to the twelfth embodiment.

  A line number 4010 is a label (P_GATESW) corresponding to the gate switch monitoring process, and indicates an address (first address) in the ROM of the program module corresponding to the gate switch monitoring process.

  Line numbers 4020 and 4030 correspond to A7701 of the gate switch monitoring process. In the row number 4020, the rising information of the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) is acquired from the address R_SWCTL + 2, and the switch bit data (determination value) corresponding to the label C_GATE is ANDed, and the switch is turned on. (Code “CHK (R_SWCTL + 2), C_GATE”). Here, the switch control area is a storage area for storing detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine for each timer interrupt. The rising information (see FIG. 133B) is information indicating that the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) has changed from OFF to ON. In the area of the address R_SWCTL + 2, rising information is stored in the switch control area in which information on the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) is stored.

  When there is no game ball passing through the normal start gate 34 and the gate switch 34a is OFF, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the gate switch 34a is zero, the operation result (logical product) is zero, and the zero flag (ZF) is set. When the rising edge information is the same as the switch bit data (judgment value) (for example, when the switch bit is turned on with “00000100B”), the operation result (logical product) is non-zero (for example, “00000100B”). The zero flag (ZF) is not set.

  In line number 4030, when the operation result (logical product) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns to the normal game processing (FIG. 61) (code “RET Z”). ). That is, when there is no game ball passing through the normal start gate 34 and the gate switch 34a is OFF, the routine returns to the normal game processing (FIG. 61).

  Line numbers 4040 to 4070 correspond to A7702 of the gate switch monitoring process. In line number 4040, as in line numbers 1540 and 3090, the value stored in address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of label C_JTN indicating that the special figure is running shortly (in the normal power support state) ( Code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN”). If the comparison result matches in the special drawing time, the calculation result is not zero and the zero flag is not set (NZ). If the comparison result does not match in the special drawing time, the zero flag is set. (Z).

  In line number 4050, if the special drawing time is short, that is, if the comparison results match (NZ), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label GATESW10 (conditional branch), and the instructions after line number 4110 Is executed (code “JR NZ, GATESW10”).

  In the row number 4060, as in the row number 3110, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is compared with the value of the label C_TFAN indicating that the big hit or the small hit is being made (codes “CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TFAN”). ). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME indicates an area in the RAM (special game process number area) that stores the special game process number (A2606) with reference to the value “2800h” of the IY register. The value of the label C_TFAN is the special game process number “3” for fanfare / interval processing. In case of big hit or small hit, and the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), and it is smaller than 3 if neither big hit nor small hit The carry flag (CF) is set (C).

  In the line number 4070, when the big hit or the small hit is in progress and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label GATESW10 (conditional branch), and the line numbers 4110 and after The instruction is executed (code “JR NC, GATESW10”).

  Line number 4080 corresponds to A7703 of the gate switch monitoring process, and loads a left-handed instruction notification command (numerical value corresponding to label C_LEFTCOM) into the BC register (code “LD BC, C_LEFTCOM”).

  Line number 4090 corresponds to A7704 of the gate switch monitoring process, and calls and executes the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  Line numbers 4110 to 4130 correspond to A 7705 of the gate switch monitoring process. In the line number 4110, the A register is loaded with the value (the number of reserved symbols) stored in the usual memory number storage area (in the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_FHORYU (code “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)”). The label R_FHORYU is an offset address of the reserved figure number storage area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  In the line number 4120, the number of reserved flags in the A register is compared with the upper limit value (4 in this case). If the number is smaller than the upper limit value, the carry flag (CF) is set, and if the upper limit value is exceeded, the carry flag (CF ) Is not set (code “CP A, 4”).

  In the line number 4130, when the number of pending drawings reaches the upper limit value and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the routine returns to the usual game processing (FIG. 61) (code “RET NC”).

  The line number 4140 corresponds to A7706 of the gate switch monitoring process, and +1 is updated to the number of reserved symbols in the RAM, which is the value of the number of reserved addresses in RAM IY + R_FHORYU (code “IQNC (IY + R_FHORYU)”). The RAM address IY + R_FHORYU is an addition address obtained by adding the value “2800h” stored in the IY register and the value corresponding to the label R_FHORYU. Here, it is possible to directly update +1 without storing the 1-byte value (the number of pending symbols) stored in the usual figure pending number area of the address IY + R_FHORY in the register (at least a general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A.

  Line numbers 4150 to 4170 correspond to A7707 of the gate switch monitoring process. At the line number 4150, the leading address (numerical value corresponding to the label R_FRNDMEM) of the random number storage area (general map storage area) reserved for normal use is loaded into the HL register (code “LDY HL, R_FRNDMEM”).

  In line number 4160, the value of the A register is added to the value of the A register in order to double the value of the A register (+1 is the usual pending number before updating, 0 to 3) (code “ADD A, A "). As a result, the value of the A register becomes a value from 0 to 6.

  In the line number 4170, the value of the A register (value from 0 to 6) is added to the value of the HL register (the leading address of the usual reserved storage area) (code “ADD HL, A”). At this time, the value of the HL register is the address of the hit random number storage area for the most recent occurrence of the usual map hold.

  Line numbers 4180 to 4190 correspond to A7708 of the gate switch monitoring process. In line number 4180, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND2_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register as a random number (code “IN A, (C_SRND2_L)”).

  In line number 4190, the value in the A register as a random number is loaded (stored) into the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (the area for storing the random numbers for the latest usual map hold), and then the address in the HL register. Is updated to the next address (code “LQD (HL +), A”). Since the hit random number is 1 byte and the A register to be loaded (stored) is also 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  In line number 4200, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND3_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register as a per symbol random number (code “IN A, (C_SRND3_L)”).

  In line number 4210, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (corresponding symbol random number storage area of the latest general figure hold) as the hit symbol random number (code “LD ( HL), A "). Here, since there is no random number to be stored next, the address stored in the HL register is not updated.

  At line number 4220, the routine returns to the usual game process (FIG. 61) (code “RET”).

  As described above, the code generally described as “CHK (R_SWCB), n” takes the logical product of the determination value n and the value of the switch control area (rising information) to detect the switch detection state (switch bit ON / OFF) can be determined. Note that R_SWCB is an address of rising information in the switch control area. When a switch is detected, a predetermined bit (switch bit) of rising information is turned on. This “CHK” instruction can determine whether or not the switch is turned on without executing an instruction for acquiring the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the register. Since the switch detection state is determined without going through the register, the determination can be made reliably even if a failure occurs in the register. Further, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. Note that a dedicated logic circuit that executes the code “CHK (R_SWCB), n” may be provided in the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242).

[Operations and effects of the twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game based on detection states of predetermined switches (various switches and sensors such as the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, and the start port 2 switch 37a). And a game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a game state for giving a privilege to the player when the variable display game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group including a plurality of general-purpose registers ( Register banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The update information storage means is assigned a multi-byte address, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means includes a switch control area provided corresponding to a predetermined address and capable of storing a switch detection state. The arithmetic processing means stores the state of the value stored in the storage area based on the value of the storage area and the predetermined determination value without storing the value of any storage area of the update information storage means in the general-purpose register. An instruction that can be determined (for example, “CHK (R_SWCTL + 2), C_GATE”) is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means determines the detection state of the switch based on this command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include this instruction.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the detection state of the switch can be determined without executing a command for acquiring the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the general-purpose register. Since the detection state of the switch is determined without using the general-purpose register, the determination can be made reliably even if a failure occurs in the general-purpose register, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
A thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to twelfth embodiments. The thirteenth embodiment relates to a program structure for various editing processes.

  FIG. 139A is a program list showing a partial program structure of the segment LED editing process (FIG. 72) according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 139B is a program list showing the conventional program structure of LED editing processing.

  Line number 4500 in FIG. 139A is a label (P_SEGEDIT) corresponding to the segment LED editing process, and indicates the address in the ROM of the program module corresponding to the segment LED editing process.

  The line number 4510 corresponds to step A9201 of the segment LED editing process (FIG. 72), and the value (flashing control timer) of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM is updated by 1 (code “IQNC (IY + R_DSPTIM)”). The label R_DSPTIM is an offset address of the blinking control timer area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. Here, it is possible to directly update +1 without storing the 1-byte value (the number of reserved maps) stored in the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM in the register (at least the general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A.

  Line numbers 4520 and 4530 correspond to A9202 of segment LED editing processing. In line number 4520, it is determined whether or not the value (flashing control timer) of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM coincides with the output on timing 20h as the flashing control timer area (code “CHK (IY + R_DSPTIM), 20H”). That is, a logical product with 20h indicating the output ON timing is obtained, and it is determined whether a predetermined bit (in this case, bit 5 with bit 0 as the least significant bit) in the blinking control timer area is 0 or 1. The output on timing 20h (00100000B) is 32 in decimal and corresponds to 128 ms (= interrupt cycle (4 ms) × 32). Since the value of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM is updated by +1 every 4 ms, the bit 5 is alternately changed between 0 and 1 every 128 ms, and the desired timing can be known by performing the comparison determination. it can. If the comparison determinations match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  In line number 4530, if the blinking control timer coincides with the output on timing, that is, if the comparison result of line number 4520 is coincident (T), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label EDIT10 (conditional branch). , The instruction after line number 4570 is executed (code “JRS T, EDIT10”).

  Line numbers 4540 and 4550 correspond to A9204 of the segment LED editing process. In the line number 4540, the head address (the numerical value corresponding to the label D_FHOLED2) of the usual pending number display table 2 is set as a relative address (D_FHOLED2-5000H) and loaded into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H”). ). As a result, the common figure hold number display table 2 is set. The relative address is an address based on the head address “5000h” of the user program data area (in the ROM).

  Since this “LQDD” instruction uses a relative address (substantially 1 byte) instead of an absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space as an operand, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction is larger than that of a normal LD instruction. Decrease by 1 byte (eg, decrease from 3 bytes to 2 bytes). The relative address (for example, 000h to BFFh) is originally 2 bytes. However, if the mnemonic (machine language instruction part) is changed corresponding to the value of the upper byte (for example, 0 to B) of the relative address, it is substantially The relative address can be indicated by the lower byte (1 byte).

  At line number 4550, a jump (branch) is made to the address in ROM corresponding to the label EDIT20 (code “JR EDIT20”).

  Line number 4570 corresponds to segment LED editing processing A9203, and the leading address (numerical value corresponding to label D_FHOLED1) of general-purpose reserved number display table 1 is set as a relative address (D_FHOLED1-5000H) and loaded into the HL register. (Code "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED1-5000H"). As a result, the common figure hold number display table 1 is set.

  Line numbers 4590 to 4630 correspond to A9205 of segment LED editing processing. In line number 4590, as in line number 4110, the A register is loaded with the value (the number of pending charts) stored in the usual figure pending number storage area (in RAM) of addition address IY + R_FHORYU (code “LQD A, ( IY + R_FHORYU) "). The label R_FHORYU is an offset address of the reserved figure number storage area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The addition address IY + R_FHORYU is obtained by adding the offset address corresponding to the label R_FHORYU to the value (RAM head address “2800h”) stored in the IY register. The offset address is a relative address (difference address) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  The offset address is limited to a range that can be expressed by 1 byte (corresponding to the lower address of the 2-byte address “xxxxh”), and the code “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)” of the line number 4590 can be a 2-byte instruction. . Thereby, the program capacity can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes, and the instruction of line number 4590 is a 3-byte instruction.

  In the line number 4610, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read out) into the A register as the display data corresponding to the number of reserved drawings (code “LQD A, (HL + A)”). ). The total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register (the top address of the usual figure hold number display table) and the value of the A register (the usual figure hold number). At line number 4610, display data is acquired from the universal figure hold number display table corresponding to the universal figure hold number.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139C, display data corresponding to the number of reserved drawings will be described. FIG. 139C (I) shows how the lamps D15 and D16 of the general-purpose hold indicator 56 are turned on (turned on, turned off, and blinking). FIG. 139C (II) shows the general-purpose hold number display tables 1 and 2. In the usual figure hold number display tables 1 and 2, display data (1 byte) corresponding to the usual figure hold numbers 1 to 4 is arranged and stored for each byte in order from the top address. Therefore, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is stored in the total address, which is the sum of the top address and the number of reserved general maps, of the general map reserved number display table.

  If the number of holds is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both of the table hold number display tables 1 and 2, so the figure hold indicator 56 does not flash, but if the number of holds is 3 to 4, Since the display data in the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data in the general figure hold number display table 2 are different, the common figure hold indicator 56 blinks. Assuming that bit 0 is the least significant bit, in this embodiment, when lamp D15 is lit, display data bit 5 is set to “1”, and when lamp D16 is lit, display data bit 4 is turned on. Set to “1”. For example, when the number of reserved maps is 2, the display data is “00110000B”, the bits 4 and 5 are on “1”, and the lamps D15 and D16 of the reserved map display 56 are turned on. When the general-purpose hold indicator 56 blinks with the hold number 3 to 4, the lamp D15 (or lamp D16) is lit while the bit 5 (or bit 4) of the blinking control timer area is set to 1 at the output ON timing. , Lamp D15 (or lamp D16) is extinguished while 0 is reached.

  In the line number 4620, the logical value of the area of the addition address IY + R_SEGDAT + 3 as the segment area (1 byte) of the general-purpose hold indicator 56 and “11001111B” is obtained, and bits 4 and 5 of the data in the segment area are cleared to zero. (Code “AQND (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3), 11001111B”).

  In the line number 4630, the value of the A register is saved (set) in the segment area (addition address IY + R_SEGDAT + 3 area) of the general figure hold display 56 as the display data corresponding to the number of common figure hold (code “OR (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3)”. , A ").

  In the program module having the conventional structure of FIG. 139B, two codes “LD HL, R_DSPTIM” and “IQNC (HL)” of line number 5010 and line number 5020 are changed to code “IQNC (IY + R_DSPTIM)” of line number 4510 of FIG. 139A. Correspond. “IQNC (HL)” is not a conventional command. The code of line number 4510 in FIG. 139A is 2 bytes “AA77” in machine language, whereas these two instructions require 4 bytes in total, and the program capacity is increased. In particular, in line number 5010, R_DSPTIM is used as an absolute address (2 bytes “2877h”) rather than an offset address (1 byte “77h”), which causes an increase in program capacity. As shown in FIG. 139B, in the machine language stored in the ROM, the top of the 2-byte address is the lower byte and the next is the upper byte.

  In the program module having the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the code “LD A, (R_FHORYU)” with the line number 6000 corresponds to the code “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)” with the line number 4590 in FIG. 139A. In line number 6000, R_FHORYU is used as an absolute address (2 bytes “2861h”), not an offset address (1 byte “61h”), so the number of bytes of the code is increased by 1 byte from line number 4590. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also increases.

  In the program module having the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the code “LD HL, D_FHOLED2” of line number 5050 and the code “LD HL, D_FHOLED1” of line number 5080 are respectively code “LQDD” of line number 4540 of FIG. 139A. HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H ”and line number 4570 code“ LQDD HL, D_FHOLED1-5000H ”. In the codes of line number 5050 and line number 5080, address designation is performed with an absolute address (for example, “503F” and “5037”) instead of a relative address (difference with respect to reference address “5000h”, for example, “3F” and “37”). The number of bytes in the code has increased by 1 byte (from 2 bytes to 3 bytes). Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also increases.

  In the conventional program module (FIG. 139B), the code “LQD A, (HL + A)” of line number 4610 in FIG. 139A does not exist, so the number of programs increases from line numbers 6000 to 6070.

  Further, in the program module having the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the two codes “LD A, (R_SEGDAT + 3)” and “AND 11001111B” of the line number 6040 and the line number 6050 are replaced with the code “AQND (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3) of the line number 4620 in FIG. 139A. ), 11001111B ". Since two codes are used in line number 6040 and line number 6050, the number of bytes of the code is increased by one byte from line number 4620.

  FIG. 140 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the external information editing process (FIG. 75) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

  A line number 5500 is a label (P_INFEDIT) corresponding to the external information editing process, and indicates a ROM address (first address) of the program module corresponding to the external information editing process.

  Line numbers 5510 to 5530 correspond to A9501 to A9502 of the external information editing process. In line number 5510, the A register is loaded with the value stored in the glass frame opening error area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_GLASS (code “LQD A, (IY + R_GLASS)”). The label R_GLASS is an offset address of the glass frame opening error area with reference to the value “2800h” of the IY register. In the value of the glass frame open error area (1 byte), a predetermined bit is set to “1” if a glass frame open error is occurring.

  In line number 5520, the logical sum of the value stored in the body frame open error area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_WAKU and the value of the A register is calculated (code “OR A, (IY + R_WAKU)”). The label R_WAKU is an offset address of the body frame opening error area with reference to the value “2800h” of the IY register. As for the value of the body frame open error area (1 byte), a predetermined bit is set to “1” if a body frame open error is occurring.

  In line number 5530, if a glass frame open error or body frame open error has occurred and the logical sum is not zero (F), jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to label INFEDIT10 (conditional branch), and line number 5570 and thereafter Are executed (code "JRS F, INFEDIT10").

  Line number 5540 corresponds to A9503 and A9504 of the external information editing process. In the line number 5540, the logical product of the value of the area of the address R_INFDAT2 as the external information output data area (1 byte) and the clearing value (clear data) “11001111B” is obtained, and the door / frame opening signal and the security signal are The off-data is saved in the external information output data area (code “AQND (R_INFDAT2), 11001111B”). The external information output data area is an abnormality control area indicating various abnormality detection states (abnormal signal on / off) for each bit. Bit 4 of the external information output data area (abnormal control area) is a bit for setting an abnormal state (ON) of the door / frame opening signal, and bit 5 is a bit for setting an abnormal state (ON) of the security signal. Here, it is cleared to zero.

  At line number 5550, jump to a ROM address corresponding to label INFEDIT20 (conditional branch), and execute the instruction after line number 5600 (code "JR INFEDIT20").

  The line number 5570 corresponds to A9505 of the external information editing process. In the line number 5570, the logical sum of the value of the external information output data area (address R_INFDAT2 area) and the on-data “00010000B” of the door / frame opening signal is calculated to obtain the external information output data area (abnormal control area). Save (turn on) the ON data of the door / frame opening signal (code “OQR (R_INFDAT2), 00010000B”).

  Line number 5580 corresponds to A9506 of the external information editing process. In line number 5580, the logical sum of the value of the test signal output data area (address R_SKNDAT) and the on-data “01000000B” of the gaming machine error status signal is calculated, and the result is stored in the test signal output data area (abnormal control area). The ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved (set to ON) (code “OQR (R_SKNDAT), 01000000B”).

  Line number 5600 corresponds to A9507 of the external information editing process. In line number 5600, if the value (security signal control timer) of the security signal control timer area of the addition address IY + R_SECUTIM is not 0, −1 is updated, and if it is 0, 0 is maintained (code “DQCP (IY + R_SECUTIM), 0”). ). The label R_SECUTIM is an offset address of the security signal control timer area. This “DQCP” instruction decreases the value stored in the security signal control timer area without acquiring it in the Gilesta.

  The line number 5610 corresponds to A9508 of the external information editing process. In the line number 5610, when the calculation result of the line number 5600 is zero (Z), that is, when the security signal control timer is 0, the jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT30 (conditional branch) is performed, and the line number 5640 is obtained. The following instructions are executed (code “JR Z, INFEDIT30”).

  Line number 5620 corresponds to A9509 of the external information editing process. The security signal ON data “00100000B” is saved (set to ON) in the external information output data area (abnormal control area) of the address R_INFDAT2 (code “OQR (R_INFDAT2), 00100000B”).

  As described above, the code generally described as “AQND (R_ERR),... 0,... B” is a value stored in the abnormal control area (in the RAM) indicated by the address value of the label R_ERR. And a clear value (clear data) “... 0,... B”, and a predetermined bit in the abnormality control area is cleared. Each bit in the abnormality control area indicates that a predetermined abnormality (error signal) has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to clear a bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred without executing an instruction for acquiring a value stored in the abnormality control area in a register. For this reason, even if a malfunction occurs in the register, it is possible to reliably clear a bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the abnormality control region. Further, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  As described above, the code generally described as “OQR (R_ERR),... 1... B” is stored in the abnormality control area (in the RAM) indicated by the address value of the label R_ERR. And the set value (setting data) “... 1... B” are ORed to set a predetermined bit in the abnormality control area. Therefore, it is possible to turn on a bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred without executing an instruction for acquiring a value stored in the abnormality control area in a register. For this reason, even if a malfunction occurs in the register, it is possible to reliably set a bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the abnormality control region. Further, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) has the code "AQND (R_ERR), ... 0 ... B" and the code "OQR (R_ERR), ... 1, ... B". A dedicated logic circuit for executing the above may be provided.

[Operations and effects of the thirteenth embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate), and the variable display game performs a special result. In this case, a game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state that gives a bonus to a player. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group including a plurality of general-purpose registers ( Register banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The update information storage means is assigned a multi-byte address, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address, and includes an abnormality control area that indicates an abnormality detection state of the gaming machine in bit units. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, an “OQR” instruction) for setting a predetermined bit in any storage area of the update information storage means without using a general-purpose register. When an abnormality of the gaming machine is detected, the arithmetic processing means sets a predetermined bit in the abnormality control area of the update information storage means by this command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such instructions.

  As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, even if a problem occurs in the general-purpose register, it is possible to reliably set the bit in the abnormality control area indicating that an abnormality has occurred. Further, since the instruction for storing the value of the abnormal control area in the register is unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) includes a storage means (for example, ROM 111b) having a data area for storing the game control program and data for the game control program. . The game control device 100 includes a register (DP register) that stores the start address of the data area in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) is an instruction that designates an area in the data area by a relative address based on the start address stored in the register (DP register) (for example, "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H").

  Therefore, an instruction for designating an area in a data area not by an absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the top of the address space but by a relative address (for example, 1 byte) based on the top address of the data area stored in the register Can be used. For this reason, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) includes a start address designation register (IY register) for storing the start address of the update information storage means in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) is an instruction that designates an area in the update information storage means by an offset address that is based on the start address stored in the start address specification register. For example, “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)”).

  Therefore, the area in the update information storage means is not an absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space but an offset address (for example, 1 byte) based on the start address of the update information storage means stored in the register. You can use an instruction that specifies. For this reason, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, the storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100), based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, sets the number of start memories to be the right to execute the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number in the reserved number area of the update information storage means Can be memorized. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) designates any storage area of the update information storage means by an offset address with reference to the start address stored in the start address designation register, and sets the value of the storage area to a predetermined general-purpose value. An instruction (for example, “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)”) to be read into the register is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) reads the number of the start memory stored in the reserved number area by this command.

  Therefore, the hold in the update information storage means is not based on the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the head of the address space but by the offset address (for example, 1 byte) based on the start address of the update information storage means stored in the register. You can use instructions that specify several areas. For this reason, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. In particular, since the number-of-holds area is often referred to in various processes of the game control program, there are many benefits in reducing the amount of code.

[Fourteenth embodiment]
In conventional gaming machines, the CPU executes the execution contents of conditional branches and branch destinations by combining a plurality of instructions. In this embodiment, each instruction at conditional branch and branch destinations is executed by one instruction. The content is executed by the CPU. As a result, even if the control content is the same as the conventional one, the code amount of the program can be made smaller than before, and the capacity required for storing the program code in the ROM storing the program can be made compact. . Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to thirteenth embodiments. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to a program code (program list).

  FIG. 141 is a program list for explaining a part of the program structure according to the fourteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, the program code of the random number update processing 2 using the instructions specific to the present embodiment will be described, and three instructions (mnemonic) “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” that are the gist of the present embodiment Is mainly described. Random number update process 2 is labeled “P_RNDINC2” and is called at step A10402 of the main process (FIG. 124A) and step A1307 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125).

  The code “IQNCW (R_RNDHEN1)” of the line number 6010 corresponds to A10601 of the random number update process 2 (FIG. 126). This code is a content (instruction) in which a value “+1” is added to the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (R_RNDHEN1), which is a 2-byte random number, with 2 bytes in accordance with an instruction (mnemonic) “IQNCW”. Here, R_RNDHEN1 is a label indicating the start address of the random number area where the variation pattern random number 1 is stored (stored), and R_RNDHEN2 which appears below stores (stores) the variation pattern random number 2. R_RNDHEN3 is a label indicating the address of the random number area where the variation pattern random number 3 is stored (stored). The random number area is also called a random number counter area because random numbers are added or subtracted in the random number area. In this specification, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are stored in the storage area of the RAM 111c, which is update information storage means for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means (CPU 111a, CPU core 102). It may be stored in other information storage means (excluding registers).

  In other words, the instruction “IQNCW” changes the 2-byte value stored in the address destination area without using the register (at least the general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A (the value stored in the address destination area). This is an instruction for directly adding +1 (without being once taken into the register of FIG. 121A). A storage area corresponding to an address (address) is called an address destination area or an address destination. For this reason, the use of the instruction “IQNCW” eliminates the need to write three codes: load into the register, addition processing in the register, and load into the address destination, making the program more compact than the conventional program. Become. In addition, directly adding the value stored in the address destination by “IQNCW” does not use the register, so that it is prohibited to generate an interrupt process between the load to the address destination and the load to the address destination. There is no need to save to the stack or switch banks when enabling interrupts. 121A is a general-purpose register (W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register IX register, IY register) outside the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 And special purpose registers (flag register, DP register, SP register, PC register).

  As will be described later, as an instruction similar to “IQNCW”, there is an instruction “DQECW” for decrementing a predetermined 2-byte area, and “DQECW” does not use the register (at least general-purpose register) of FIG. 121A. This is an instruction for directly subtracting −1 from the 2-byte value stored in the addressed area. Further, as an instruction similar to “IQNCW” that is an addition instruction for the address destination 2 byte area, there is the above-described instruction “IQNC” that is an addition instruction for the address destination 1 byte area, and an instruction similar to “DQECW”. There is an instruction “DQEC” which is a subtraction instruction for the addressed 1-byte area.

  The code “IQCP (R_RNDHEN2), 240” in line number 6030 corresponds to A10602 in FIG. In response to an instruction “IQCP”, this code updates (increments) the value of R_RNDHEN2 by +1 when the value of R_RNDHEN2 (the value of the variation pattern random number 2 stored at the address destination) is smaller than 240, and R_RNDHEN2 When the value of is not smaller than 240, the variable pattern random number 2 is initialized by substituting 0 into R_RNDHEN2. That is, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 circulates in the range from 0 to 240 with 240 as the upper limit, and returns to 0 after reaching 240.

  When the instruction “IQCP” is explained again, the value before the comma in the operand is defined as the target value (value stored in the address destination), and the value after the comma is defined as the determination value (240 in this case). It is determined whether or not the value stored at the address becomes smaller than the determination value. If the value is smaller, the value stored at the target address is incremented. If not smaller, the initial value is 0. This instruction is initialized by substituting the value stored in the address.

  Conventionally, in order to execute the instruction, a code ("JP", "JR", etc.) for conditional branching is described for R_RNDHEN2 when it is smaller than 240 and when it is not smaller than 240. It had been. Furthermore, as a branch instruction of a condition, a code for incrementing R_RNDHEN2 is described when R_RNDHEN2 is smaller than 240, and a code for substituting 0 into R_RNDHEN2 is described when R_RNDHEN2 is not smaller than 240. It was. That is, conventionally, at least three codes (instructions) have been described, but in the present embodiment, they are described by one code, so that the program capacity is reduced. For example, the machine language instruction of the code “IQCP (vw), n” (vw is the direct value of the address) when the address is directly specified is 5 bytes, but the address can be set to any register qq (= WA, BC). , DE, HL, IX, IY), the machine language instruction of the code “IQCP (qq), n” when the address is indirectly specified once becomes 3 bytes (however, an instruction for loading the address into the pair register qq) Is required).

  The code “DQCP (R_RNDHEN3), 238” in the line number 6050 corresponds to A10603 in FIG. This code initializes R_RNDHEN3 by substituting 238 for R_RNDHEN3 when the value of R_RNDHEN3 (the value of the variation pattern random number 3 stored at the address destination) is 0 by the instruction “DQCP”. In this case (that is, other than 0), the value of R_RNDHEN3 is updated by -1 subtraction (decrement process). That is, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 circulates in the range from 238 to 0 with 238 as the upper limit, and returns to 238 after reaching the decrement result of 0 (initial value 238 is set). As described above, in the instruction “DQCP”, the value of the area of the predetermined address is determined to be 0, and when the value of the area of the predetermined address is 0, the numerical value specified by the operand is stored in the predetermined area.

  To explain the command “DQCP” again, the value before the comma is the target value (the value stored in the address destination), and the value after the comma is the initial value (here, 238), which is stored in the target address. The value stored in the target address is decremented if it is not 0, and the initial value is stored in the target address if it is 0. This is an instruction to initialize by substituting the value.

  Similarly to the “IQCP” instruction, the contents of “DQCP” can be described with a single code, which was previously described with at least three codes. Similarly to “IQNCW”, “DQCP” and “IQCP” cause the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) to execute instruction contents without using the registers 1220A and 1220B. It is not necessary to set interrupt prohibition, or the PUSH and POP instructions for register values are unnecessary, or bank switching is not required. The CPU core 102 (in the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the instructions “DQCP”, “IQCP”, and “IQNCW”.

  Here, the codes for updating the random numbers have been described for the three instructions “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” that are the gist of the present embodiment, but “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, “DQCP” May be used for timer update and counter update, respectively.

  Further, “IQNCW” may add the address value itself, and “IQCP” and “DQCP” respectively determine the address value itself and initialize the address value according to the determination result / address value. It can be added (increase) or subtracted (decrease).

  The program code of the random number update process 2 listed here is an example for realizing the control contents in the random number update process 2. The variable pattern random number 1 updates the random number value by increment, and the variable pattern random number 2 increments. The random number value is updated by, and the random number value of the variation pattern random number 3 is updated by decrement. However, when updating each random number value, it is possible to arbitrarily combine whether to use an instruction to increment or to decrement. .

  FIG. 142 is a program list for explaining a part of the special game process according to the fourteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, the program code for the special-purpose game process that uses a command specific to the present embodiment will be described, and one command (mnemonic) called “DQECW” that is the gist of the present embodiment will be mainly described. . The special figure game process corresponds to the label “P_TGAMEPRC” and is called in step A1309 of the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 8 and 125).

  The code of line number 6510 corresponds to A2601 of the special figure game process (FIG. 21). This code is a content for calling a subroutine (start-up switch monitoring process) corresponding to the label “P_SIDESW”.

  The code of line number 6520 corresponds to A2602 in FIG. This code is a content for calling a subroutine corresponding to the label “P_CNTSW” (a big prize opening switch monitoring process).

  The code “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” in line number 6540 corresponds to A2603 in FIG. As described above, the label R_TGAME indicates the address (in this case, the absolute address) of the special figure game process number area for storing the special figure game process number (A2606), and the address “R_TGAME + 1” obtained by adding 1 to the address is The head address (in this case, the absolute address) of the special figure game processing timer area which is a 2-byte area is shown. This code is an instruction for the area of the address “R_TGAME + 1”. Specifically, if the value of the address destination area of R_TGAME + 1 is not 0, the value of the special-purpose game processing timer, which is a 2-byte numerical value, is updated by -1. If the value of the address destination area is 0, This is an instruction for substituting the numerical value (= 0) designated by the operand as the value of the special figure game processing timer and maintaining 0. As described above, in the instruction “DQCPW”, the value of the area of the predetermined address is determined as 0, and when the value of the area of the predetermined address is 0, the numerical value specified by the operand is stored in the predetermined area. Note that a code using an addition address of “DQCPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1), 0” can also be used. The code “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” using an absolute address as “R_TGAME + 1” is 6 bytes in a machine language instruction, whereas the code “DQCPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1), 0” using an offset address as “R_TGAME + 1” Is 5 bytes in machine language instructions, and the number of bytes (capacity) is small.

  The code of the line number 6550 corresponds to A2604 in FIG. 21. If the value of the address of the address of R_TGAME + 1 (the special game process timer area) is not 0 (not timed up), the label “TGAMEPRC10 of line number 6610” Jumps to the address in the ROM corresponding to “” and executes the instruction after the line number 6620, otherwise reads the code of the next line (if the time is up).

  The code of line number 6570 corresponds to A2605 in FIG. 21, and is the content for loading the start address D_TGAMEPRC of the special-purpose game sequence branch table into the HL register.

  The codes from line number 6580 to line number 6600 correspond to A2606 and A2607 in FIG.

  At line number 6580, the value (special game process number) stored in the special figure game process number area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_TGAME is loaded into the A register (code “LQD A, (IY + R_TGAME))”) . The label R_TGAME is the offset address of the special game process number area based on the value “2800H” of the IY register.

  In line number 6590, the special figure game process number which is the value of the A register is doubled.

  In line number 6600, first, the total address HL + A is obtained by adding the value of the A register after being doubled to the head address of the special figure game sequence branch table stored in the HL register. The reason for doubling is that since the branch destination address value in the special figure game sequence branch table is 2 bytes, it is necessary to add an even number (the special figure game process number includes an odd number).

  The code “CALL (HL + A)” of the line number 6600 is a content that makes a subroutine call with a processing number according to the branch destination address value stored in the area of the total address HL + A (area in the special figure game sequence branch table). is there. By this code, the value of the HL register is not changed to (the value of the HL register + the value of the A register), and the value of the head address of the special game sequence branch table is maintained. Subroutine calls correspond to A2608 to A2618 in FIG. The branch destination address value is the start address of the subroutine. In the present embodiment, in the branch process of the special figure game sequence table in the special figure game process, the instruction “CALL (HL + A)” refers to the branch destination address value stored in the area of the total address HL + A. Although it has been described that a call is made, “CALL (HL + A)” may be used in the branch process of the normal game sequence table in the normal game process. That is, “CALL (HL + A)” is used as the A7607 code of the usual game process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the code of the line number 6620 corresponds to A2619 in FIG. 21, and the code of the line number 6630 corresponds to A2620 in FIG. The code of line number 6650 corresponds to A2621 in FIG. 21, and the code of line number 6660 corresponds to A2622 in FIG.

  Here, the instruction “DQCCPW” will be described again. The value before the comma is the target value (a 2-byte value stored at the address destination), and the value after the comma is the initial value (here, 0). This is an instruction for determining whether or not the target value is 0, and decrementing the target value if it is not 0, and substituting the initial value into the target value if it is 0. “DQCPW” is a 2-byte version of “DQCP” described above. That is, the instruction directly determines 2 bytes for the target value and directly updates the target value by −1 from the 2-byte value according to the determination result.

  In addition, “IQCPW” as a 2-byte version instruction of “IQCP” is also devised in the present invention for the operation of an area for storing a 2-byte value. This is an instruction that directly determines and updates +1 directly from a 2-byte value for a target value according to the determination result. That is, in the “IQCCPW” instruction, an upper limit value is defined, and when the value of 2 bytes stored in the predetermined area is smaller than the upper limit value, +1 is directly updated, and when the upper limit value is reached, the value of 2 bytes is changed. Return to zero.

  FIG. 143 is a program list for explaining a part of the special game sequence branch table according to the fourteenth embodiment. As described above, the special figure game sequence branch table is labeled “D_TGAMEPRC” and is referred to for a subroutine call of special figure game processing.

  There is a mnemonic “DW” in the code, and this mnemonic is a pseudo-instruction that specifies to the assembler that one stage of the table is 2-byte data.

  In FIG. 143, the special figure game sequence branch table is shown as a group of pseudo instructions for setting a subroutine name (label) in association with a branch destination address value. The branch table is a list of branch destination address values (subroutine start addresses) set (stored) in the ROM 111b in order by these instruction groups. In other words, the special game sequence branch table in the ROM 111b is obtained by replacing the labels (P_TUSUL, P_TSTOP, etc.) in FIG. 143 with branch destination address values.

  The pseudo instruction of line number 7010 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2608 in FIG. 21, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7020 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2609. The pseudo instruction with line number 7030 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2610, and the pseudo instruction with line number 7040 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2611. The pseudo instruction with line number 7050 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2612, and the pseudo instruction with line number 7060 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2613.

  The pseudo instruction of line number 7070 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2614, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7080 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2615. Further, the pseudo instruction of line number 7090 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2616, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7100 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2617, and The pseudo instruction corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2618.

[Operations and effects of the fourteenth embodiment]
According to the fourteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate), and the variable display game performs a special result. In this case, a game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state that gives a bonus to a player. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. The update information storage means is assigned a multi-byte address, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address and can store a 2-byte random number value (for example, a variation pattern random number 1) for determining the mode of the variation display game, or game control A 2-byte timer area capable of storing a 2-byte timer value (for example, a value of a special figure game processing timer) for measuring the progress of the program is provided. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an addition instruction (for example, “IQNCW (R_RNDHEN1)”) that adds a 2-byte value stored in a target address without storing the value in a general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be capable of executing a subtraction instruction (for example, “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0”) for subtracting the 2-byte value stored in the target address without storing it in the general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing means, by an addition instruction or a subtraction instruction, generates a 2-byte random value in a random number area (for example, a random number generation area for a variation pattern random number 1) or a 2-byte timer area (for example, a special figure game processing timer area). Add or subtract the timer value.

  The addition instruction or the subtraction instruction is, for example, “IQNCW”, “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, or “DQCPW”. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction. An addition instruction or a subtraction instruction does not store in a general-purpose register, that is, without using a general-purpose register, directly adds (increases) a value to be an instruction target (a value stored in an address storage area) or This is an instruction to subtract (decrease). “IQCP”, “DQCP”, “IQNC”, and “DQEC” are addition instructions or subtraction instructions that add or subtract without storing the 1-byte value stored in the target address in the general-purpose register. "DQECW", "IQCPW" and "DQCPW" have the same effects.

  Random number counter area when any of the addition or subtraction instructions such as “IQCP”, “DQCP”, “IQNC”, “DQEC”, “IQNCW”, “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, and “DQCPW” is used to update the random number value In order to increase or decrease the random number counter without acquiring the value stored in the (random number area) to the general-purpose giresta, the random number counter is not updated due to a general-purpose register malfunction, and the random number is biased. It is possible to avoid the occurrence. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. Further, the codes by these instructions are not limited to the code (for example, “IQCP (vw), n”) when the address is directly specified by the direct value vw, but the address can be set to any register qq (= WA, BC, DE, HL). , IX, IY) may be a code (for example, “IQCP (qq), n”) when the address is indirectly specified after being once entered.

  In addition, when using either the addition instruction or the subtraction instruction for updating the timer, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timer does not update due to a malfunction of the register and the progress of the game does not proceed. In the case of using, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the occurrence of winning is not reflected and the time is not continued at a predetermined start number and continues.

  Further, as a feature of these addition instructions or subtraction instructions, conventionally, a plurality of codes had to be described. However, in this embodiment, they can be expressed as one code, and the program capacity can be reduced. . For example, for an “IQCP” instruction, only 5 bytes are required for one code, and for an “IQCPW” instruction, only 6 bytes are required for one code. However, since multiple codes are not required, the program is compact as a whole. The program capacity decreases.

  In addition, in order to directly add (increase) or subtract (decrease) the target value (value stored at the address destination) without using a general-purpose register, in the period of executing the processing represented by the one code Therefore, it is not necessary to set the prohibition of interrupt to protect the value of the general-purpose register, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity (corresponding to the amount of code required for setting the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission).

  In addition, because the value subject to the instruction is added or subtracted without using the general-purpose register, the value of the general-purpose register can be saved to the stack or the register bank can be switched during the processing period represented by the one code. Therefore, it is not necessary to protect the value of the general-purpose register, and the program capacity (the amount of code for saving and restoring the value of the general-purpose register or the amount of code for switching the bank and returning the bank) can be reduced.

  Further, according to the fourteenth embodiment, the update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address, and can store a random number counter area (for example, a variation pattern) that can store a random value for determining the mode of the variation display game. A random number area (random number generation area) of random numbers 2 and 3. The arithmetic processing means compares the value stored in the target address with a predetermined determination value without storing it in the general-purpose register, and as a result of the comparison, If the predetermined judgment value is smaller, the increment processing is executed on the value stored in the target address. If the result of the comparison shows that the predetermined judgment value is not smaller, the target address is set. An increment instruction (eg, “IQCP (R_RNDHEN2), 240”) for initializing the stored value is executable. The value of the random number counter area is compared with a predetermined determination value. If the predetermined determination value is smaller, an increment process is performed on the value of the random number counter area. If the predetermined determination value is not smaller, The value of the random number counter area is initialized.

  Alternatively, the arithmetic processing means determines whether or not the value stored at the target address is zero without storing it in the general-purpose register, and if the result of the determination is affirmative, the arithmetic processing means sets the target address. If the stored value is initialized and the result of the determination is negative, a decrement instruction (for example, “DQCP (R_RNDHEN3), 238”) that executes a decrement process on the value stored in the target address can be executed. Configured. The arithmetic processing means determines whether or not the value of the random number counter area is zero according to the decrement instruction, and initializes the value of the random number counter area if it is zero, and sets it to the value of the random number counter area if it is not zero. Perform decrement processing.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, by using an increment instruction or a decrement instruction, loading to a general-purpose register, addition processing or comparison processing (determination processing) in the general-purpose register, and random number counter area (address destination area) This eliminates the need to write three codes, such as loading, and makes the program more compact and reduces the program capacity than conventional programs. In addition, direct addition or subtraction of the value stored in the random number counter area (address destination area) by increment or decrement instructions does not use a general-purpose register, so a problem occurs even if interrupt processing occurs. There are no advantages.

  According to the fourteenth embodiment, the game control program storage means includes a table area including a plurality of storage areas specified by one address. For example, the table area is an area for storing a special game sequence branch table in the data area. The table area stores, for each storage area, the address of a subroutine that is selected as the game progresses. The game control means includes a first register that stores the top address of the table area, and a second register that stores a value acquired in accordance with the progress of the game. The arithmetic processing means derives an address value obtained by adding the value stored in the second register (corresponding to the special figure game process number) to the value stored in the first register (first address value of the table area), and the derived address An instruction (for example, “CALL (HL + A)”) for calling up processing of an address stored in the value is configured to be executable. In accordance with this instruction, the arithmetic processing means calls a subroutine of an address stored in a specific storage area in the table area to control the progress of the game. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such instructions.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, since a subroutine call can be executed without providing a single instruction for calculating the subroutine address alone, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced.

[Fifteenth embodiment]
In the fifteenth embodiment, “CQPW” and “CQHKW”, which are instructions for comparing a value stored in an address destination with a predetermined value without storing it in the register (at least general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A, will be described. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the fourteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to a program code (program list).

  FIG. 144 is a program list for explaining a part of the program structure according to the fifteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, the program code corresponding to the modified example 1 of the special figure game process using the command peculiar to the present embodiment will be described, and the command “CQPW” which is the gist of the present embodiment will be mainly described.

  The codes of the modified example 1 of the special figure game process in the fifteenth embodiment are the special figure game process in the fourteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 142, particularly, line numbers 7540 to 7570 corresponding to A2603 to A2604 in FIG. Since it is different from the above code, it will be described below.

  Specifically, the code “CQPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” of line number 7540 is transferred to the special-purpose game processing timer area of 2 bytes corresponding to the address “R_TGAME + 1” (here, an absolute address) by an instruction “CQPW”. This is a content (command) for comparing the stored special figure game processing timer value (value to be determined) with a comparison value (here, 0).

  In the instruction “CQPW”, the value before the comma in the operand is defined as a value to be determined (determination target value), and the value after the comma is defined as a comparison value (here, 0). Then, as a result of comparing the determination target value with the comparison value, it is an instruction for determining whether the determination target value and the comparison value are the same or not.

  The code “JR Z, TGAMEPRC10” of line number 7550 jumps to the label TGAMEPRC10 (address corresponding to the label TGAMEPR) when the determination results are the same (when the special figure game processing timer is up). Content.

  The code “DQECW (R_TGAME + 1)” of line number 7560 is a special game process timer stored in the 2-byte area when the above determination result is not the same (when the special game process timer is not timed up). This is a process of updating -1 (subtracting 1 by 1) from the value of.

  The code “JR NZ, TGAMEPRC20” of the line number 7570 is a content that jumps to a code labeled TGAMEPRC20 when the above determination results are not the same.

  As described above, “CQPW” is an instruction that compares a defined determination target value with a predetermined comparison value and returns a determination result (comparison result) as to whether or not they are the same.

  FIG. 145 is a program list of modification 2 of the special figure game process according to the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the “CQHKW” instruction encoded in line number 8040 will be described. Note that the code of modification 2 of the special figure game process is different from the code of modification 1 of the special figure game process shown in FIG. 144 only in line number 8040.

  The code “CQHKW (R_TGAME + 1)” at line number 8040 is an instruction that determines (confirms) whether the value of the special game processing timer stored in the 2-byte area is a predetermined value by the instruction “CQHKW”. is there. For example, 0 is defined as the predetermined value (predetermined set value). Therefore, the code has a content for determining whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0.

  As a result of the determination by CQHKW, if the timer value is the same as 0, the process jumps to TGAMEPRC10 (according to the code of line number 8050). If not, the timer value is updated by -1 (the code of line number 8060). Jump to TGAMEPRC 20 (according to the code of line number 8070).

  Both “CQPW” and “CQHKW” are instructions that can execute the determination process without fetching the value of the address destination area into the register. The value of the address destination area is loaded into the register, determined, and the address destination The code amount can be made compact because there is no need to store the code in the area. In addition, since the two instructions do not need a code for register protection or need to switch banks, the program capacity can be reduced. In the above description, as a “CQPW” instruction or a “CQHKW” instruction, a code in which an address is directly designated by an absolute address “R_TGAME + 1” (machine language instruction 6 bytes “CQPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” or a machine language instruction 4 Byte “CQHKW (R_TGAME + 1)”) is used, but the addition address IY + R_TGAME + 1 with “R_TGAME + 1” as an offset address can be used to reduce the number of bytes in the machine language instruction by 1 byte (“CQPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1)”. ), 0 ”,“ CQHKW (IY + R_TGAME + 1) ”, etc.).

[Operations and effects of the fifteenth embodiment]
According to the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate), and the variable display game performs a special result. In this case, a game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state that gives a bonus to a player. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. The update information storage means is assigned a multi-byte address, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means includes a timer area (for example, a special game process timer area) that is provided corresponding to a predetermined address and that can store a timer value that counts the progress of game control. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute a comparison instruction (for example, “CQPW” instruction) for comparing with a predetermined comparison value without storing the value stored in the target address in the general-purpose register. The timer value in the timer area is compared with a predetermined comparison value. Alternatively, the arithmetic processing means can execute a determination instruction (for example, a “CQHKW” instruction) for determining whether the value stored in the target address is the same as a predetermined set value without being stored in the general-purpose register. It is configured, and it is determined whether the timer value in the timer area is the same as a predetermined set value by a determination instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such comparison instructions and determination instructions.

  As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, when either the comparison instruction (“CQPW” instruction) or the determination instruction (“CQHKW” instruction) is used for updating the timer, the timer is not updated due to a general-purpose register malfunction. It is possible to avoid the situation where the progress of the game does not progress. When the comparison command (“CQPW” command) and the determination command (“CQHKW” command) are used to update the counter (the rotation speed region or the high probability variation frequency region), the predetermined start that does not reflect the occurrence of the winning is not reflected. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the time-short state or the probability variation state continues without being terminated by the number of times. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these comparison instructions and determination instructions.

  In addition, the one code represents the direct comparison or determination of the value (the value stored in the addressed area) that is the target of the instruction without storing in the general-purpose register, that is, without using the general-purpose register. It is not necessary to set the prohibition of interrupt to protect the value of the general-purpose register during the processing period, and the program capacity can be reduced by that amount (the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced).

  Furthermore, since the general-purpose register is not used, it is not necessary to save the general-purpose register value to the stack or to switch the register bank to protect the general-purpose register value, and the program capacity can be reduced accordingly (game control). The amount of code of the whole program is reduced).

[Sixteenth Embodiment]
In the sixteenth embodiment, an unprecedented new compression method and its reading method will be described as a data compression method that can be executed by a Z80 CPU for gaming machines. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fifteenth embodiments.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining a conventional data table in explaining the compression method according to the sixteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, an assembly language code corresponding to the conventional latter-half variation group table is also shown.

  The latter-half variation group table is a table for distributing the variation pattern random number 1 that circulates values from 0 to 65535. The random value ranges from 0 to 61999 without reach, 62000 to 64499 is the normal reach system, and 64500 to 65099 is SP1. This table is referred to by the 2-byte distribution process in order to distribute the system reach 65100 to 65399 to the SP2 system reach and 65400 to 65535 to the SP3 system reach.

  Of the latter-half variation group table, the special table 1 for extraordinary figure 1 is labeled as “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1” as indicated by the line number 8500, and is a table in which the data content is composed of 5 stages in 4 bytes (1 stage). Tabular format). The code of each line describes the pseudo-instruction (DW), the distribution value, and the table name from the left side. On the right side of the comment column of the data table, the machine language code (in ROM) that is paired with the assembly language code Data).

  Specifically, the code “DW 62000, D_KOU_HZ01” in the assembly language at the line number 8530 is a pseudo-instruction that the random value is 2 bytes and the distribution value is 2 bytes. DW "is designated as an assembler. In addition, the numerical value to be subtracted from the random value is 62000, and the table corresponding to the distribution is a table name “D_KOU_HZ01”. Although detailed description is omitted here, the content of the change is further determined with reference to D_KOU_HZ01.

  The machine language code (machine language data) corresponding to the assembly language code of the line number 8530 is “5A00 30F2005B”, and “5A00” means an address in the ROM from which data is read. In the ROM, 1 byte of data per address (2 digits in hexadecimal notation) is stored, and the subsequent 8-digit machine language code “30F2005Bh” is actually stored from address 5A00h to address 5A03h. The data is “30h”, “F2h”, “00h”, and “5Bh”. The 8-digit machine language code is divided into “30F2h” and “005Bh”.

  Here, since the upper order and the lower order are interchanged, “30F2” replaces the lower two digits “F2h” and the upper two digits “30h” to read “F230h”, and the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 reads “F230h”. Corresponds to the distribution value “62000”. “005B” means an address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ01 in which “5B00h” in which the upper and lower sides are interchanged.

  Next, the machine language code for four levels will be described. In the machine language code of line number 8540, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ02 is “5B02h”, and the distribution value is “09C4h”.

  In the machine language code of line number 8550, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ03 is “5B06h”, and the distribution value is “0258h”. In the machine language code of the line number 8560, the address of D_KOU_HZ04 is “5B10h”, and the distribution value is “012Ch”. In the machine language code of the line number 8570, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ05 is “5B16h”, and the distribution value is “0088h”.

  Here, each address of the data table is “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, “5B16h” in order from the top to the fifth level (from row number 8570) to the fifth level (from row number 8530). It is. Of these five addresses, the first digit “5h” is common, so the 4-bit data corresponding to “5h” is deleted and stored in the ROM, and the 4-bit data corresponding to “5h” is read out when reading. The compression method according to the present embodiment is to perform supplementary processing. Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 148.

  FIG. 147 is a latter half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment and also shows the corresponding assembly language code. The label name is “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1”, which is the same as that of the conventional latter-half variation group table shown in FIG. 146, and FIG.

  The pseudo instruction BTA {16, 12} described in the line number 9030 includes a table in which binary data is set to 16 bits (8 bits × 2) and 12 bits (12 bits plus 4 bits plus 8 bits × It represents that the assembler creates data as a set of 2).

  The numerical part of BTA {16, 12} is an example, and the pseudo-instruction is described in the format of BTA {Numerical value 1, Numerical value 2}, and the assembler reads the bit number of numerical value 1 and the bit number of numerical value 2 in order. specify. Such a reading format continues until the code “ENDDBTA” of the line number 9140. Numerical value 1 and numerical value 2 are arbitrary numbers 1-16.

  Next, the data structure for one stage in the table will be described. The code “62000, D_KOU_HZ01-5000H” of the line number 9040 describes a distribution value 62000 that is a 2-byte numerical value and a relative address D_KOU_HZ01-5000H of a reference destination table (second-half variation selection table), and D_KOU_HZ01. -5000H is the standard for the first stage data. That is, since the address 5000H as the head of data is stored in the DP register (table pointer), the address specified by the row number 9040 may be a difference from the address stored in the DP register. Therefore, the assembly language is described as D_KOU_HZ01-5000H for convenience.

  When this is confirmed by the machine language code, the machine language codes corresponding to the assembly language code in the first stage are “30F200h” from addresses 5A00h to 5A02h and “4Bh” at address 5A03h. Of these, “F230h” obtained by switching the upper part and lower part of “30F200h” is the distribution value 62000, and “00h” is obtained by removing “B” from the difference “B00h” from the address “5000H” specified by the DP register. Value. Further, “4Bh” stored in the address 5A03h is a numerical value obtained by combining the first-stage data and the second-stage data as will be described later. For this reason, only the data stored at the address 5A03h is shown with a line feed.

  Similarly, all addresses from the address of the second-stage table with the distribution value of 2500 to the address of the fifth-stage table with the distribution value of 136 are shown as relative addresses minus 5000h. The relative address is a value (associated value) associated with the distribution value in the table. That is, as described above, since the first digit “5h” is common among the addresses “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h” in order from the top of the table, it is deleted. Since “Bh”, which is the second digit of the address, is also shared, it is possible to compress data of 4 bits per stage by deleting “5Bh” of the first and second digits. It is.

  The following FIG. 148 visualizes this more easily. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the compression method according to the sixteenth embodiment. The left side of the figure illustrates the interpretation of the pseudo instruction BTA {16, 12} by the assembler, and the right side of the figure illustrates the compressed data stored in the ROM.

  First, data contents in the first row of the table and storage in the ROM will be described. If the viewpoint is moved from the left side to the right side in the figure, the data content in the first row of the table is “0B00h” of the relative address of the table corresponding to the distribution value “F230h”. When this is expressed as a binary number, “F230h” is “1111001000110000B” and “0B00h” is “0000101100000000B”.

  Note that the reference destination address of the second half variation selection table as the absolute address of the first stage of the table described in FIG. 146 is “5B00h”, but in the present embodiment, it is assumed that 5000h is stored in the DP register (table pointer). Therefore, the relative address in each stage of the table is a value obtained by subtracting 5000h from the absolute address.

  Next, actual data stored in the ROM will be described. “1111001000110000B” corresponding to “F230h” is divided for each byte, and “00110000B” which is the lower 8 bits is the address 5A00h in the ROM (arrow 1 in FIG. 148), and “11110010B” which is the upper 8 bits. Is stored at address 5A01h (arrow 2 in FIG. 148). This is a part corresponding to “16” in BTA {16, 12}.

  The data stored in the addresses 5A00h and 5A01h in hexadecimal notation are “30h” and “F2h”.

  Further, “0000101100000000B” corresponding to “0B00h” is divided for each byte, and “00000000B” which is the lower 8 bits is stored in the address 5A02h. Just the arrow 3 corresponds to FIG.

  Next, the upper 8 bits can be divided into upper 4 bits “0000B” followed by 4 bits “1011B”. Then, the upper 4 bits “0000B” are deleted (compressed), and the 4 bits “1011B” following the upper 4 bits “0000B” are stored in the lower 4 bits of the address 5A03h (arrow 4).

  That is, the relative address obtained by subtracting 5000 h from the absolute address “5B00h” in the first row of the table is “0B00h”, but “0” in the upper first digit of this numerical value ““ 0 ”B00h” ”Corresponds to“ 0000B ”of the higher 4 bits, and“ 0000B ”of the higher 4 bits is deleted. This is the description of storing the first-stage data in the table in the ROM.

  Next, storage of data in the second row of the table will be described. The binary data of “09C4h” corresponding to the distribution value 2500 in the second-stage table data is “00001100111000100B”. This binary data can be divided into upper 4 bits, middle 8 bits, and lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits are stored in the upper 4 bits of the address 5A03h.

  That is, “1011B”, which is the first stage data, is stored as lower 4 bits (address 4), and “0100B”, which is the second stage data, is stored as upper 4 bits (address 5A03h). ). Therefore, a part of the first-stage table data and a part of the second-stage table data are stored together at the address 5A03h (arrows 4 and 5).

  Subsequently, among the table data of the second row, the middle 8 bits “10011100B” are stored in the address 5A04h (arrow 6), and the upper 4 bits “0000B” are stored in the lower 4 bits of the address 5A05h. .

  Subsequently, the binary data of “0B02h” corresponding to the relative address of the second-stage table data is “0000101100000010B”. Again, the binary data can be divided into upper 4 bits, middle 8 bits, and lower 4 bits.

  The upper 4 bits “0000B” is the first digit of the relative address ““ 0 ”B02h”, which is a numerical value obtained by subtracting 5000 h from the absolute address “5B02h” in the second row of the table. Since it corresponds to “0”, it has been deleted.

  The lower 4 bits “0010B” are stored in the upper 4 bits of the address 5A05h (arrow 8), and the middle 8 bits “10110000B” are stored in the address 5A06h (arrow 9). This is the description of storing the second-stage data in the table in the ROM.

  Similarly to the first and second stages, the third stage table data is stored in the ROM by deleting a portion common to other table data as a relative address, and finally, the fifth stage table data. Are stored in the ROM addresses 5A00h to 5A11h.

  Here, replenishment of insufficient binary data will be described.

  As for the data of the reference address (the second half variation selection table address) of the fifth stage corresponding to the lowest stage of the table, the lower 8 bits “00010110B” are stored in the address 5A10h (arrow 10), and the middle 4 bits “1011B”. Is stored as lower 4 bits at address 5A11h (arrow 11), and the upper 4 bits “0000” are deleted.

  In this state, the data stored in the address 5A11h is only for the lower 4 bits, and the data storage state in the ROM falls into an irregular state. Therefore, in the address 5A11h, the insufficient binary data for the upper 4 bits is simulated. It is automatically refilled by the interpretation of the command (arrow 12).

  In the present embodiment, the data corresponding to “5h” is obtained because “5h” in the first digit of the addresses “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h” is common. Although compressed, “Bh”, which is the second digit of the address, is also common, and by compressing “5Bh” of the first digit and the second digit, it is possible to further compress 4 bits per stage. .

[Operations and effects of the sixteenth embodiment]
In this way, since the common part as each reference destination address (relative address in the present embodiment) of the table is compressed and stored in the ROM, it is originally 4 bytes which is the capacity of one step of table data. When a storage area of 20 bytes is required for the capacity of 5 stages, the ROM capacity can be reduced because it fits in a total area of 18 bytes from 5A00h to 5A11h.

  In addition, when storing data in the ROM, if the data is not based on a certain rule (for example, a certain number of bits and a certain bit length) for each type of data, how many bits are read by the CPU 111a? I don't know and I can't read (cannot interpret). Therefore, a read range is defined in consideration of a bit length range common to all related related tables. The definition is the code of the above BTA {numerical value 1, numeric value 2}. In this embodiment, as an example, all the binaries of the latter half variation group table (including not only for special figure 1 but also for special figure 2) are used. The data (binary number data) is defined as 16 bits (corresponding to the numerical value 1) as the distribution value and 12 bits (corresponding to the numerical value 2) as the address of the latter half variation selection table.

[Seventeenth embodiment]
In the seventeenth embodiment, reading of data compressed and stored in the ROM will be described. In this embodiment, as the reading of the compressed data by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102), an instruction “LQDB” is used to start an arbitrary bit position from the specified bit position starting from bit 0 of the address pointed to by the DP register (table pointer). Bit length data can be read. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the sixteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the data read format according to the seventeenth embodiment. Here, the data from address 5A00h to address 5A10h is read by the code “LQDB BC, (HL) .16”, and the data at address 5A11h is read by the code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”.

  The LQDB instruction is written in the format of “LQDB register name, (register name) .Read bit length”, and the address value stored in the DP register is set to the register pair (pair register) of (register name) after the comma. This is an instruction to read data of read bit length starting from bit 0 of the address value calculated by adding the stored value (number of bits) and store it in the register pair of the register name before the comma. The register pair of the register name may be a different register pair or the same register pair. If the number of bits is small, the register name may indicate a single register instead of a register pair. In the single register, the read bit length is an arbitrary bit length of 1 to 8, and in the register pair, the read bit length is an arbitrary bit length of 1 to 16. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the LQDB instruction.

  First, it is stored in the address 5A00h and the address 5A01h on the assumption that the address value 5000h is specified in the DP register and that the value obtained by multiplying A00h by 8 is stored in the HL register. Data reading will be described. The read command here is “LQDB BC, (HL) .16”.

  In executing the instruction, since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of HL is A00h, a process of reading data of 16 bits from 5A00h obtained by adding A00h to 5000h is executed. The (A00h * 8) -th bit counted from the bit 0 of 5000h indicated by the arrow 13 is the read base point. In FIG. 149, A00h is described as A00h * 8 in the sense that A00h is multiplied by 8 for bit conversion (bit conversion), but details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The 1-byte data stored at the address 5A00h is “00110000B”, and the 1-byte data stored at the address 5A01h is “11110010B”. Therefore, the 16-bit length is “1111001000110000B”. (Arrow 14). When the data is expressed in hexadecimal, it is F230h, and the read 16-bit data is stored in the BC register. F230h corresponds to a distribution value of 62000.

  Next, a case will be described in which the distribution is advanced and the address of the latter-half variation selection table in the last row is read by the code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”. Here, it is assumed that the address value stored in the DP register remains 5000h, and the value of (HL register) is A10h * 8.

  In executing the instruction, since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of HL is A10h * 8, the process of reading 12 bits counted from bit 0 of 5A10h obtained by adding A10h to 5000h Executed. The data read out here is “101100010110B” (arrow 15). However, since the storage destination HL register has an area for 2 bytes, “0000B” for the 4 bits that are insufficient for the 2-byte area. "Is supplemented as part of the interpretation of the LQDB instruction (arrow 16).

  The data “0000101100010110B” read from the addresses 5A10h and 5A11h by replenishment of “0000B” is 0B16h in hexadecimal, and is stored in the HL register.

  Subsequently, the contents of a program for reading compressed data by an LQBD instruction will be described with reference to actual codes.

  FIG. 150 is a program list of the variation pattern setting process of the seventeenth embodiment. The program list of the variation pattern setting process described here will be described as a program module that is a call source of the 2-byte distribution process described below.

  The code “LD HL, (HL)” of the line number 10020 corresponds to A4302 in FIG. 37 and is the content for acquiring the address of the latter half variation pattern group table.

  The code “LD WA, (DE)” of the line number 10030 corresponds to A4303 in FIG. 37 and is a content for rotating the variation pattern random number from the target area.

  The code “CALLR P_SELW” of the line number 10050 corresponds to A4305 in FIG. 37 and is a content for making a subroutine call to the 2-byte sorting process.

  FIG. 151 is a program list of a conventional 2-byte sorting process. This module is called by the above variation pattern setting process, but is a process executed in a method in which data stored in the ROM is not compressed. The 2-byte sorting process is labeled “P_SELW”.

  The code of the line number 10510 corresponds to A4401 in FIG. 38, and the value stored in the address of the latter half fluctuation pattern table fetched into the HL register in the calling source fluctuation pattern setting process is the same as the code without assignment (C_NOTHING). It is the content which compares and determines whether it is. If they are the same, a zero flag is set as a determination result (Z).

  The code of line number 10520 corresponds to A4402 of FIG. 38, and if there is no allocation code, jumps to the part labeled SELW20, and if it is not allocation code, the code of the next line is read. .

  The code of line number 10590 and line number 10600, which is labeled as SELW20, corresponds to A4407 in FIG. 38 and is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the allocated result (the absolute address of the second half variation selection table). It is contents to do.

  Line numbers 10530 to 10570, which are one section labeled SELW10, correspond to the loop processing (A4403 to A4406) in FIG. The code “SUB WA, (HL)” of the line number 10540 corresponds to A4403 and A4404 of FIG. 38, and the distribution value acquired from the latter-half variation group table is the value of the variation pattern random number 1 stored in the WA register. This is the content to be subtracted from.

  The code “JRC, SELW20” of the line number 10550 corresponds to A4405 in FIG. 38, and jumps to SELW20 when the result of subtraction is a value smaller than 0, otherwise, the code of the next line Is the content to read.

  The code “ADD HL, 4” of the line number 10560 corresponds to A4406 in FIG. 38, and is the content to be added to the address of the next stage of the table by adding 4 bytes of the address value of the latter half fluctuation group table.

  The code “JR SELW10” of the line number 10570 also corresponds to A4406 in FIG. 38 and jumps to SELW10.

  Next, the contents of a program according to the seventeenth embodiment for reading data compressed by the LQDB instruction will be described. FIG. 152 is a program list of 2-byte distribution processing according to the seventeenth embodiment. The 2-byte sorting process of the seventeenth embodiment is also labeled “P_SELW” and called by the above-described variation pattern setting process. Further, the part of the label SELW10 corresponds to the loop processing from A4403 to A4406 in FIG. 38, and the part of the label SELW20 corresponds to A4407 in FIG.

  The code “SQLA HL, 3” (conversion instruction) of the line number 11010 is a content for shifting the 16-bit address value stored in the HL register to the left by 3 bits. By the left shift of 3 bits, the binary data for the lower 13 bits is substantially raised to the cube of 2 (8 times). That is, the address value stored in the HL register is multiplied by 8 and converted into the number of bits (the address value is converted into bits).

  The code “LQDB BC, (HL) .16” (read instruction) of the line number 11020 is an instruction for reading out data stored in the ROM after being compressed as an instruction peculiar to the present embodiment. This is the content in which 16 bits of data having a specified bit length are taken into the BC register starting from bit 0 of the indicated address.

  The code “CQP BC, C_NOTHING” of the line number 11030 is a content that is determined by comparing whether the value stored in the BC register is the same as the unallocated code (C_NOTHING). If they are the same, a zero flag is set as a determination result (Z).

  The code “JR Z, SELW20” at the line number 11040 jumps to the SELW 20 (jumps to the code at the line number 11110) when it is an unallocated code, and in that case, it reads the next line.

  First, the part of SELW 20 will be described. The code “ADD HL, 12” of the line number 11120 is a content in which 12 is added to the bit-converted value stored in the HL register.

  The code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12” (read instruction) of the line number 11130 is a content for loading binary data of 12 bits into the HL register among the values stored in the HL register. As a result, the relative address of the latter half variation selection table is acquired in the HL register.

  The code “ADD HL, 5000H” of the line number 11140 is added to the address value of the HL register and the value of the DP register 5000h, and updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (the absolute address of the second half variation selection table). It is contents to do.

  Next, it returns to the part of SELW10. The code “LQDB BC, (HL) .16” of the line number 11060 is the content for reading the distribution value data for the next 16 bits.

  The code “SUB WA, BC” of the line number 11070 is a content for subtracting the distribution value from the random value.

  The code “JRC, SELW20” of the line number 11080 jumps to the SELW20 (jumps to the code of the line number 11110) when the subtraction result is negative, and reads the next line otherwise. is there.

  The code “ADD HL, 16 + 12” of the line number 11090 has a content of adding 16 + 12 bits to the number of bits stored in the HL register. As a result, the bit-converted address (corresponding to the position of bit 0 of the distribution value) where the next distribution value is stored is stored in the HL register.

  The code “JR SELW10” of the line number 11100 is the content that returns to the top of the loop processing.

[Operations and effects of the seventeenth embodiment]
According to the seventeenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game upon establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to a start winning area or a gate), and the variable display game has a special result. In this case, a game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state that gives a bonus to a player. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores data for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means starts from a conversion instruction (for example, “SQLA HL, 3”) for calculating a bit conversion value obtained by integrating the address value of the storage area read from the game control program storage means by a predetermined number, and the bit conversion value as a starting point. A read instruction (for example, “LQDB BC, (HL) .16”) for reading a predetermined bit length is configured to be executable. The data having a predetermined bit length is a distribution value for distributing a variation display game mode and a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads a distribution value and a value associated with the distribution value by a read instruction, and selects a variation display game mode based on the value associated with the distribution value. Derive an address. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such conversion instructions and read instructions. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is an address (relative address in FIGS. 147 and 148) of the latter half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, by this conversion instruction, for example, the bit value is converted by shifting the address value fetched into the register by 3 bits to the left, that is, by multiplying the cube of 2 to 8 times. Can be calculated. Also, with this read command, data can be read using a specific bit as a read base point.

  Further, by combining the address value stored in the DP register and the bit-converted address value, a more specific bit in the 1-byte area of the address destination designated by the DP register can be used as a reading base point.

  In addition, since the bit length to be read can be set in accordance with the compression format indicating how many bits have been deleted from the original data, the compressed data is read and then the data is 2 bytes long. Can be restored.

  In addition, according to the seventeenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes a variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes a start winning area or a gate), and the variable display game is A game control means (game control device 100) is provided that performs game control for generating a special game state that gives a bonus to a player when a special result is obtained. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores binary data having a specific bit length for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means reads binary data by dividing it into a bit length smaller than a specific bit length from a plurality of storage areas having consecutive addresses, and reads binary data of 0 if the division does not satisfy the specific bit length. In addition, a read instruction (for example, “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”) read as a specific bit length is configured to be executable. The data having a specific bit length is a distribution value for distributing a variation display game mode or a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads a distribution value or a value associated with the distribution value by a read command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing this read instruction. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is an address (relative address in FIGS. 147 and 148) of the latter half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, when reading compressed data, the length of the read data is less than 8 bits on the basis of 1 byte length (8 bit length (specific bit length)). In the case where there is no data, the arithmetic processing means can supplement 0 data for all the insufficient number of bits (digits), so that the compressed data (data deleted by the compression) is automatically restored.

[Eighteenth embodiment]
In the eighteenth embodiment, compression of a bit number (bit length) that is not a divisor or multiple of 8 bits will be described as reading of compressed data using an LQDB instruction. In this embodiment, an example in which 11 bits of 32-bit data are compressed will be described as an example. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations from the first embodiment to the seventeenth embodiment.

  FIG. 153 is the latter half variation group table of the eighteenth embodiment and also shows the corresponding assembly language code. The label name is “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1”, which is the same as the latter-half fluctuation group table shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and FIG.

  In the latter half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, the absolute address of each stage (the address of the second half variation selection table) is “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h”. The data corresponding to the “5h” was compressed due to the common “5h”. On the other hand, in the eighteenth embodiment, the relative address value of the second and subsequent tables is obtained by subtracting the absolute address value of the previous stage, based on the absolute address value (D_KOU_HZ01) of the first stage table. The differential address value is stored. The difference address value is a value (associated value) associated with the distribution value in the table. Since the absolute address of the first table is 5B00h (D_KOU_HZ01) and the absolute address of the fifth table is 5B16h (D_KOU_HZ05), the difference is 5 bits of 16h (10110B in binary notation). The remaining 11 bits are compressed.

  In the latter half variation group table of the eighteenth embodiment, the table data at the first stage is not compressed, and the table data from the second stage to the fifth stage is compressed. For this reason, the pseudo instruction “BTA” is coded in the line number 9540 next to the line number 9530 in which the table in the first stage is coded in order to create data in the assembler of the data in the second to fifth stages. ing.

  The assembly language code “DW D_KOU_HZ01-5000H, 62000” of line number 9530 corresponds to the first-stage table (no reach) in an uncompressed state, and the distribution value 62000, which is a 2-byte numerical value, and the reference destination D_KOU_HZ01-5000H, which is the address of the table (second half variation selection table), is described. The DP register stores 5000h. When the machine language code (machine language data) created by the code of line number 9530 is confirmed, “00h”, “5Bh”, “30h”, and “F2h” are stored as data of 4 bytes from address 5A00h. Of these, “00h” stored in the address 5A00h and “5Bh” stored in the address 5A01h, and “30h” stored in the address 5A02h and “F2h” stored in the address 5A03h are higher and lower respectively. The fact that it has been replaced is as described above.

  The pseudo-instruction “BTA {5, 16}” at the line number 9540 is a content that specifies that the data read length is 5 bits and 16 bits. Unlike the latter-half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, the latter-half variation group table of the present embodiment describes the reference address of the table first for each level, and then describes the distribution value. The details will be described with reference to FIG. 154. The table reference destination address is stored for 5 bits, and the distribution value is read for 16 bits.

  The code “D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01, 2500” of line number 9550 compresses the difference obtained by subtracting the address value of the first stage table from the address value of D_KOU_HZ02, which is the second stage table (normal reach system), and the distribution value. It is coded as the previous original data.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02, 600” of the line number 9560 is obtained by subtracting the address value of the second-stage table from the address value of D_KOU_HZ03, which is the third-stage table (SP1 system), and the distribution value. Are encoded as original data before compression.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ03, 300” of line number 9570 is obtained by subtracting the address value of the third table from the address value of D_KOU_HZ04, which is the fourth table (SP2 system), and the distribution value. Are encoded as original data before compression.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ04, 136” in line number 9580 is obtained by subtracting the address value of the fourth table from the address value of D_KOU_HZ05, which is the fifth table (SP3 system), and the distribution value. Are encoded as original data before compression. The specified range of the compressed data reading format in the assembly language is ended by the code “ENDDBTA” of the line number 9590.

  Next, data compression according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the compression method according to the eighteenth embodiment.

  Here, the address value of “D_KOU_HZ01” is 5B00h, the address value of “D_KOU_HZ02” is 5B02h, the address value of “D_KOU_HZ03” is 5B06h, the address value of “D_KOU_HZ04” is 5B10h, and the address value of “D_KOU_HZ5B” is 16B In this case, “D_KOU_HZ02−D_KOU_HZ01” is the difference “02h”, “D_KOU_HZ03−D_KOU_HZ02” is the difference “04h”, “D_KOU_HZ04−D_KOU_HZ03” is the difference “0Ah”, and “D_KOU_HZ” is “D_KOU_HZ”.

  For this reason, it is possible to compress 12 bits while leaving 4 bits of “0Ah” (1010 in binary notation), but in other tables not illustrated, the 4 bits are insufficient as a difference notation. From FIG. 154, 11 bits are compressed while leaving 5 bits.

  Next, data in the second row of the table read by the assembler using the pseudo instruction BTA {5, 16} will be described.

  Of the data in the second row of the table, “02h” that is “D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01” is originally “0002h”, and is expressed as “0000000000000010B” in binary. Of these, the upper 11 bits are compressed, and the lower 5 bits “00010B” are stored as the lower 5 bits of the address 5A04h (arrow 17 in FIG. 154).

  Next, among the data in the second row of the table, when the distribution value 2500 is expressed in binary, it is “1001110001000100B”. Since the storage address for the upper 3 bits still remains in the previous address 5A04h, the 16-bit data is divided into the lower 3 bits, the middle 8 bits, and the upper 5 bits. Then, the lower 3 bits “100B” are stored as the upper 3 bits at the address 5A04h (arrow 18). That is, the address 5A04h stores data “10000010B” by combining “100B” which is a part of the binary data of the distribution value with the difference address value “00010B” as the lower bits.

  In addition, among the distribution values “1001110001000100B”, “10001000B” that is the middle 8 bits is stored in the address 5A05h (arrow 19), and “10011B” that is the upper 5 bits is stored as the lower 5 bits of the address 5A06h. (Arrow 20).

  Next, since the storage capacity for the upper 3 bits is left at the ROM address 5A06h, “100B” for the lower 3 bits of “04h” of “D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02” in the data in the third row of the table. Is stored as the upper 3 bits of the address 5A06h (arrow 21). Therefore, the address 5A06h is stored by combining a part of the second-stage table data and a part of the third-stage table data.

  In the following table, the third row data and the fourth row data also have a 5-bit length by deleting 11 bits from the differential address value, and the distribution value is a 16-bit length ROM that is a 1-byte storage area. Is stored in each address. At this time, the table data of 5 bit length and 16 bit length is appropriately divided and stored in the ROM so that all 8 bits are filled in each address destination.

  Next, the storage state of the data in the fifth row of the table in the ROM will be described. Of the data in the fifth row of the table, “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ04” is “06h” (0110 in binary notation), and its 5-bit length is “00110B”, but the least significant bit is carved. And stored in address 5A0Bh, and the upper 4 bits “0011B” are stored as lower 4 bits in address 5A0Ch (arrow 22).

  Subsequently, of the data in the fifth row of the table, the binary data “0000000010001000B” of the distribution value 136 is divided into the lower 4 bits, the middle 8 bits, and the upper 4 bits, and the lower 4 bits “1000B” is the address. The higher 4 bits are stored in 5A0Ch (arrow 23), and the middle 8 bits are stored in address 5A0Dh (arrow 24).

  The upper 4 bits “0000B” are stored as lower 4 bits at the address 5A0Eh (arrow 25), but the address 5A0Eh has a capacity for the upper 4 bits, so that 4 bits are stored in that portion. 0 data “0000B” is supplemented (arrow 26).

  FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the read format of the data according to the eighteenth embodiment by the CPU 111a. Here, the data from address 5A00h to address 5A0Dh is read by the code “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16”, and the data at address 5A0Eh is read by the code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5”.

  First, the data stored in the address 5A02h and the address 5A03h on the assumption that the address value 5000h is specified in the DP register and that the value converted into the bit by multiplying A02h by 8 is stored in the HL register. The reading of data will be described. The read command here is “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16”. Compared with the code in FIG. 149, (HL +) and “plus” are added to the code, but this is the content of adding the number of bits read to the HL register after reading to the BC register. It is.

  In executing the instruction, since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of the HL register is A02h, a process of reading 16 bits from 5A02h obtained by adding A02h to 5000h is executed. The (A02h * 8) -th bit counted from the bit 0 of 5000h indicated by the arrow 27 is the read base point. A02h * 8 is based on the left shift operation for 3 bits by the above SQLA instruction.

  The 1-byte data stored in the address 5A02h is “00110000B”, and the 1-byte data stored in the address 5A03h is “11110010B”. Therefore, the 16-bit length is “1111001000110000B”. (Arrow 28). When the data is expressed in hexadecimal, it is F230h, and the read 16-bit data is stored in the BC register.

  Since “F230h” is read out to the BC register, the HL register adds “16” which is the read bit length to be “5020h” which is 5010h + 16. Note that 5010h is the number of bits (A02h * 8). Since 5020h = A04h * 8 is a remainder 0, the next read position is from bit 0 of address 5A04h (arrow 29). Here, 5020h (20512 in decimal notation) is a value obtained by multiplying A04h (2564 in decimal notation) by 8, and all the calculations here are performed after bit conversion.

  Next, a case will be described in which the distribution is advanced and the data stored in the addresses 5A0Bh and 5A0Ch in the latter-half variation selection table is read by the code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5”. Here, it is assumed that the address value stored in the DP register remains 5000h, and the value of the HL register is A0Bh * 8 + 7.

  When the instruction is executed, the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h, and the HL value is A0Bh * 8 + 7. Therefore, bit 7 (arrow 30) of “5A0Bh” that is A08h * 8 + 7 is read out at 5000h. It becomes the base point. Then, the process of reading 5 bits from bit 7 of “5A0Bh” is executed by the instruction. Since the data length stored in bit 7 of address 5A0Bh is only 1 bit, the lower 4 bits are read from 5A0Ch which is the next address for 4 bits (arrow 31).

  The data read here is “00110B” (arrow 30 and arrow 31) corresponding to the difference “06h”. However, since the storage destination C register has an area for 1 byte, “000B” is supplemented as part of the interpretation of the LQDB instruction for the missing 3 bits (arrow 32).

  Since the difference “06h” is read out to the C register, the HL register adds “5” which is the read bit length to become “5064h” which is 505Fh + 5 (arrow 33). Since 5064h = A0Ch * 8 remainder 4, the next read position is from bit 4 of address 5A0Ch. “505Fh” is a value of A0Bh * 8 + 7.

  In FIG. 155, the allocation value in the first row of the table is arranged in ROM without using the assembler pseudo-instruction “BTA”. However, the LQDB instruction can be used in any data area regardless of the arrangement of the table data. Data of an arbitrary number of bits (with an arbitrary bit length of 1 to 16 bits) can be read from the position.

  FIG. 156 is a program list of 2-byte distribution processing according to the eighteenth embodiment. The 2-byte sorting process of the present embodiment is also labeled “P_SELW” and called by the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 150). Further, the part of the label SELW10 corresponds to the loop processing from A4403 to A4406 in FIG. 38, and the part of the label SELW20 corresponds to A4407 in FIG.

  The code “LD DE, (HL +)” of the line number 11510 is a content for loading the address of the reference second half variation group table into the DE register from the area corresponding to the address stored in the current HL register. The reference address of the latter-half variation group table is the reference destination address (address of the latter-half variation selection table) of D_KOU_HZ01, and is 5B00h when using an absolute address, and 0B00h when using a relative address. Thereafter, the value of the HL register is updated.

  The code “CQPW (HL), C_NOTHING” of the line number 11520 is a content that is determined by comparing whether the updated address destination data is the same as the unallocated code (C_NOTHING).

  The code “JR Z, SELW20” of the line number 11530 is a content that jumps to the part of SELW20 if it is an unallocated code, and reads the next line otherwise.

  The code “SQLA HL, 3” of the line number 11540 is a content for shifting the 16-bit address value stored in the HL register to the left by 3 bits. By the left shift of 3 bits, the binary data for the lower 13 bits is substantially raised to the cube of 2 (8 times), and the address value is converted into bits.

  First, the part of the SELW 20 will be described. The code “LD HL, DE” of the line number 11620 loads the address value stored in the DE register into the HL register, and the address value of the data corresponding to the distribution result ( This is the content to be updated to the address value of the second half variation selection table.

  Next, it returns to the part of SELW10. The code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5” (addition read instruction) of the line number 11560 starts from the bit position stored in the HL register (the read start position in the ROM is indicated by the number of bits), The contents read 5 bits of data and stored in the C register. As shown in FIG. 155, one of the differences “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, and “06h” is stored in the C register. Thereafter, the bit position stored in the HL register is updated by adding the number of bits read.

  The code “ADD DE, C” of the line number 11570 is a content for adding the difference stored in the C register to the value of the DE register. In this way, the differences “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, and “06h” are sequentially added to the address 5B00h (or relative address 0B00h) of the reference latter-half variation group table, and added to the value of the DE register. Will go.

  The code “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16” (addition read instruction) of the line number 11580 is calculated from the bit position stored in the HL register (the read start position in the ROM indicated by the number of bits) This is the content for reading 16-bit data into the BC register. Thereafter, the bit position stored in the HL register is updated by adding the number of bits read. As shown in FIG. 155, the distribution value is stored in the BC register.

  The code “SUB WA, BC” of the line number 11590 is a content for subtracting the distribution value from the random value. By repeatedly executing the code of the line number 11590, the distribution values 62000, 2500, 600, 300, and 136 are sequentially subtracted from the random number value.

  The code “JR NC, SELW10” of the line number 11600 is a content that returns to the beginning of the loop processing when the result of the subtraction does not become negative, and reads the next line when the result becomes negative. If the result of subtraction is negative, the update of the value of the DE register at line number 11570 is stopped, and the address value of the data (address value of the second half variation selection table) corresponding to the distribution result is finally obtained. Is obtained by the value of the DE register.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, the reference destination address value of each table is not the difference (FIG. 153) from the reference destination address value of the previous table, but the first table. The present invention can also be applied when the difference is a reference destination address value. That is, “D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the second level of the latter half fluctuation group table labeled “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1”, and “D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the third level. Further, the present embodiment may be applied on the assumption that “D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the fourth level and “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the fifth level.

  In the case of FIG. 157, the difference values “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, “06h” described in the left table of FIG. 154 are replaced with “02h”, “06h”, “10h”, “16h”. And the present embodiment is applied.

[Operations and effects of the eighteenth embodiment]
As described above, according to the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variation display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate) is established, and the variation display is performed. Game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state that gives a privilege to a player when a game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores data for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means has a conversion instruction (for example, “SQLA HL, 3”) for calculating a bit conversion value obtained by integrating a predetermined number of address values of the storage area read from the game control program storage means, and a bit conversion value as a starting point ( A predetermined bit length to be read is designated as a start position, and an addition read instruction (for example, “LQDB”) that calculates a value obtained by adding a value corresponding to the predetermined bit length to the bit converted value every time data having a predetermined bit length is read. BC, (HL +). 16 "). The data having a predetermined bit length is a distribution value for distributing a variation display game mode or a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads the distribution value or a value associated with the distribution value by the addition read command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a conversion instruction and an addition read instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is the address of the latter half variation selection table (the difference address value in FIGS. 153 and 154).

  As described above, in the eighteenth embodiment, data can be read from an arbitrary position in the data area by an arbitrary bit length of 1 to 16 bits by an addition read instruction (LQDB instruction).

  Therefore, by setting the read position according to the state of the data arranged in the ROM and setting the read bit length, the compressed data can be read and the data can be read and compressed (deleted). (Bit length) can be arbitrarily determined. In addition, after reading the distribution value or the value associated with the distribution value by the addition read instruction, the next read position is set without executing another instruction by the executed addition read instruction. Continuous reading can be easily performed.

  In addition, when the data continuously read out with an arbitrary bit length becomes a bit length less than 8 bits or 16 bits, 0 data is automatically set for the missing digits (the number of missing bits). Therefore, the data can be read as 8-bit or 16-bit data regardless of the compression state of the data arranged in the ROM.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined.

  Furthermore, the registers in the codes of the embodiments can be replaced with other registers. For example, not only the addition address “IY +...” But also “IX +...” And “HL +. When a plurality of registers are used in the code of each embodiment, the combination of the plurality of registers may be arbitrary or may be replaced. For example, the code “LQD B, (DE +)” (stored in the DE register) Code for updating the address value in the DE register after storing the address value area value in the B register) and the code “AQND C, (WA +)” (the address value area value stored in the WA register and C A code that updates the address value of the WA register after calculating the logical product of the register values can also be used.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine such as a pachislot machine (for example, one that can define an accessory ratio or a payout rate).

  The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 30 Game board 30b Out port 32 Game area 35 General winning port 36 1st starting winning port (1st starting winning region)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variation prize winning device 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
65 Out-ball detection switch 66 Discharged ball number display part 67 Out-going ball rate display part 68 Bonus ratio display part 100 Game control device (main board)
200 Dispensing control device (dispensing control board)
300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 Power supply device 760 Big hit history display section 800 Character ratio display area 830 Sub display 842 General winning opening ratio display area 844 First function ratio warning display section 846 Second function ratio warning display section 865 Over winning warning setting display

Claims (1)

A game having a game control means for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a variable display game is executed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game gives a special result to a player. In the machine
The game control means includes
Game control program storage means for storing a game control program;
Arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program;
Update information storage means for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means;
A first register group, and a second register group comprising a register group having the same configuration as the first register group,
The arithmetic processing means includes:
A value stored in the first register group and a value stored in the second register group are exchanged, and an exchange instruction stored in each register group can be executed.
Based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, a random number used for the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special gaming state in the variable display game is extracted,
With the extracted random number stored in the first register group, the random number stored in the first register group by the exchange instruction is saved in the second register group,
Before making a prior determination as to whether or not to generate the special gaming state based on the random number, the random number saved in the second register group by the exchange instruction is returned to the first register group,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the prior determination is performed using a random number returned to the first register group.